Home

FE FRENIC-Multi High Performance Compact Inverter Manual

1. Hexa decimal on the LED monitor LED4 m Hexadecimal expression LED3 LED2 LED1 A 4 bit binary number can be expressed in hexadecimal format 1 hexadecimal digit Table 3 15 shows the correspondence between the two notations The hexadecimals are shown as they appear on the LED monitor Table 3 15 Binary and Hexadecimal Conversion Hexadecimal Hexadecimal ojojojojojojojo alalalalolololo alalolo a alolo oj oj oj o alalalalolololo alAlol o AalAalolo O oO o co 3 4 5 Checking I O signal status Menu 4 I O Checking Using Menu 4 I O Checking displays the I O status of external signals including digital and analog I O signals without using a measuring instrument Table 3 16 lists check items available The menu transition in Menu 4 I O Checking is shown in Figure 3 5 List of I O check items VO data mn S S al By LED segment ON OFF Te 00 o WO status in binary format 93995 Input status in hex format GBG i Output status in hex format wat H z By LED segment ON OFF I O status in binary format 3895 Input status in hex format OGG Output status in hex format 8 4 02 e 5 2 Input voltage at terminal 12 V PG pulse rate 2 Z phase 4 8 k 5038 A Sey
2. 3 13 3 4 2 Setting up function codes Menu 1 Data Setting ne 3 4 3 Checking changed function codes 3 1 3 2 Menu 2 Data Checking 3 16 3 4 4 Monitoring the running status Menu 3 Drive Monitoring 3 16 3 4 5 Checking I O signal status Menu 4 I O Checking 3 19 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information Menu 5 Maintenance Information 3 4 7 Reading alarm information Menu 6 Alarm Information 3 25 3 5 Alami Mod S issiga reiua aiutu asnuta 3 27 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 4 RUNNING THE MOTOR 4 1 Running the Motor for a Test ki 4 1 1 Inspection and preparation prior to powering on 4 1 2 Turning ON power and checking 4 1 3 Preparation before running the motor for a test Setting function code data 4 2 4 1 4 Testrun 4 2 Operation 4 2 1 Jogging Operation Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES 5 1 5 1 Function Code Tables 5 2 Overview of Function Codes Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING uc 6 1 6 1 Before Proceeding with Troubleshooting 6 1 6 2 If No Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor 6 2 1 Motor is running abnormally 6 2 2 Problems with inverter settings 6 3 If an Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor A aineen acti e tected 6 10 6 4 If an Abnormal Pattern Appears on the LED Moni
3. MCCBs are designed to protect the power circuits between the power control board and inverter s main terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T for three phase input power supply L1 L and L2 N for single phase input power supply from overload or short circuit which in turn prevents secondary disasters caused by the inverter malfunctioning LL FRNOOZE te ot FRNOOSE te 2U FRINOOTE 1e 2U FRNOIOE1e 2U 12 FRIOOSE 1e 4U FRNOOTE te 41 RNOIOETa 4U FRNO5E 1e 4U FRNOSOE 1e 4U ERNE 12E ie 7U FRNF2SE1e 7U FRNFSOE1e 7U operated i RCDs GFCls function in the same way as MCCBs Use the MCCBs and protective device RCDs GFCls that satisfy the recommended rated current listed below RCD asa ie fault input Nominal Rated current of circuit interrupter power applied moter Inverter type MCCS and GFO A GFCI supply HP A ERNE IDE te ou 1 with 4 FRNF25E1e 2U 5 overcurrent protection S FRNOOIE1e cU a Thiee phase 400 gt t ERNOODE 1e 7U FRNOOJE 1e 7U Note 1 A box W in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure afeju j i ed eal ed 5 75 es co Ls E ry 1 m __ vs __ v4 a aa Select the MCCB or RCD GFCI with appropriate breaking capacity according to the power supply capacity A WARNING When connecting the inverter to the power supply add a recommended molded case circuit breaker MCCB or residual current operated protective device RCD a ground fault circuit
4. 3 Wrong configuration of function codes F50 and F51 Recheck the specifications of the braking resistor gt Review data of function codes F50 and F51 then reconfigure them Note The inverter issues an overheat alarm of the braking resistor by monitoring the magnitude of the braking load not by measuring its surface temperature Therefore even if the surface temperature of the braking resistor does not rise when the use of the brake exceeds more frequently than the one specified by function codes F50 and 51 the inverter issues an overheat alarm To squeeze out full performance of the braking resistor configure data of function codes F50 and F51 while actually measuring the surface temperature of the braking resistor CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 16 10 41 Electronic thermal overload alarm 1 Le Electronic thermal overload alarm 2 Problem Possible Causes 1 The characteristics of electronic thermal did not match those of the motor overload Electronic thermal protection for motor 1 or motor 2 activated What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the motor characteristics gt Reconsider the data of function codes P99 F10 and F12 and A39 A06 and A08 gt Use an external thermal relay 2 Activation level for the electronic thermal relay was inadequate Check the continuous allowable curr
5. Analog output Input impedance of external device Min 5kQ 0 to 10 VDC output While the terminal is outputting 0 to 10 VDC it is capable to drive up to two meters with 10kQ impedance Adjustable range of the gain 0 to 300 Pulse Pulse signal is output You can select FMP function with the slide switch monitor SW6 on the interface PCB and change the data of the function code F29 FMP You can also select the signal functions following with function code F31 function Input impedance of the external device Min 5kQ Pulse duty Approx 50 Pulse rate 25 to 6000 p s Voltage waveform e Pulse output waveform 11 12 Loavmex 2to ov e FM output circuit Pulse output Analog Two common terminals for analog input and output signal terminals common These terminals are electrically isolated from terminals CM s and CMY Do not connect a meter with pull up resistor to the input primary side CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 20 Table 2 9 Symbols Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals Continued Functions Classifi cation Transistor 1 Various signals such as inverter running speed freq arrival and output 1 overload early warning can be assigned to any terminals Y1 and Y2 by setting function code E20 and E21 Refer to Chapter 5 Section 5 2 Overview of Fun
6. Site to be installed In door Ambient temperature 10 C 14 F to 50 C 122 F Ambient humidity 5 to 95 RH no condensation allowed Ambient air No corrosive gas no inflammable gas no dust and no direct sunlight allowed Altitude 3281ft 1000 m or less Air pressure 86 to 106 kPa Vibration Within 2 to 9 Hz Within 9 to 20 Hz Within 20 to 55 Hz Within 55 to 200 Hz 3 mm maximum amplitude 9 8 m s 2 mis 1 mis Storage ambient temperature 25 13 F to 70 C 158 F Storage ambient humidity 5 to 95 RH no condensation allowed External dimension Refer to Section 8 4 2 Standard keypad Mass 0 081 Ibs 35 grams With a keypad rear cover Note When using an inverter in a place of an altitude within 3281ft 1000 m to 9843ft 3000 m you need to lower the output current of the inverter For details refer to Chapter 2 Section 2 1 Operating Environment 8 3 2 Communications specifications of keypad No of linkable unit Table 8 2 Hardware specifications Specification One to one connection with an inverter Remarks For a remote site operation Link cable US ANSI TIA EIA 568A category 5 compliant straight type cable 10BASE T 100BASE TX straight type Extension cable for the remote site operation CB 5S CB 3S CB 1S and etc Maximum cable length 66ft 20 m Connector Pin num
7. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 25 Oo 26 27 28 29 30 ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo 31 Overload Stop J63 to J67 Detection value Detection level Mode selection Operation condition and Timer When the monitored status index of the load exceeds the detection level specified by J64 for the period specified by J67 the inverter activates the overload stop function according to operation specified by J65 Use this function for such as system protection from applying a load that cannot be allowed by the system characteristics or any reason on the system design or system in which the motor spindle is locked by a mechanical stopper E Detection value J63 J63 specifies the detection value of status index to be monitored Data for J63 Detection value Output torque Description To improve the accuracy of torque calculation be sure to auto tune the inverter for the applied motor This setting covers the driving torque only Output current E Detection level J64 J64 specifies the detection level assuming the inverter rated current and motor rated torque as 100 m When J65 3 The no load current to the motor always flows Specify J64 Detection level correctly considering the no load current of the applied motor Hit and stop the detection level J64 is determined based on not Note the J63 data but the motor rated toq
8. F01 C30 Frequency Command 1 and 2 F01 or C30 sets the source that specifies reference frequency 1 or reference frequency 2 respectively Enable A keys on the keypad Refer to Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD Enable the voltage input to terminal 12 0 to 10 VDC maximum frequency obtained at 10 VDC CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 18 Function Enable the current input to terminal C1 C1 function 4 to 20 mA DC maximum frequency obtained at 20 mA DC Enable the sum of voltage 0 to 10 VDC and current inputs 4 to 20 mA DC given to terminals 12 and C1 C1 function respectively See the two items listed above for the setting range and the value required for maximum frequencies Note If the sum exceeds the maximum frequency F03 the maximum frequency will apply Enable the voltage input to terminal C1 V2 function 0 to 10 VDC maximum frequency obtained at 10 VDC Enable UP and DOWN commands assigned to the digital input terminals The UP command data 17 and DOWN command data 18 should be assigned to the digital input terminals X1 to X5 Enable the digital input of the binary coded decimal BCD code or binary data entered via the digital I O interface option For details refer to the Digital I O Interface Option Instruction Manual Enable the pulse
9. keys the change will not take effect Pressing the key will make the change take effect and save it into the inverter s memory Impossible m Copying data The data copying feature copies the function code data stored in the inverter s memory into the keypad s memory With this feature you can easily transfer the data saved in a source inverter to other destination inverters The standard keypad does not support this feature The optional multi function keypad supports it with Menu 8 in Programming mode If the specifications of the source and destination inverters differ some code data may not be copied to ensure safe operation of your power system Whether data will be copied or not is detailed with the following symbols in the Data copying column of the function code tables given below Y Will be copied unconditionally Y1 Will not be copied if the rated capacity differs from the source inverter Y2 Will not be copied if the rated input voltage differs from the source inverter N Will not be copied The function code marked with N is not subject to the Verify operation either If necessary set up uncopied code data manually and individually m Using negative logic for programmable I O terminals The negative logic signaling system can be used for the digital input and output terminals by setting the function code data specifying the properties for those terminals Negative logic refers to the inv
10. DE DL LUL Item Output current Switching at approx __ m tsecond intervals u eee a i aiaa Item Tua Error sub code Switching atapprox 1 second intervals 5 Z Di ag y FE Wo PARR a Li cal ZOLI e Same as above mag gt 300i ke Same as above A H LU a Same as above Figure 3 6 Alarm Information Menu Transition CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 25 Basic key operation To view the alarm information set function code E52 to 2 Full menu mode beforehand 1 Turn the inverter ON It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears 2 Use the A and keys to display Alarm Information 5 41 3 Press the amp key to proceed to a list of alarm codes e g ii In the list of alarm codes the alarm information for the last 4 alarms is saved as an alarm history 4 Each time the A or O key is pressed the last 4 alarms are displayed in order from the most recentoneas Jand 4 5 While the alarm code is displayed press the amp key to have the corresponding alarm item number e g amp _ i and data e g Output frequency displayed alternately in i
11. Run reverse Exclusively assigned to FWD and REV terminals by E98 and E99 Any negative logic Active OFF command cannot be assigned to the functions Note marked with in the Active OFF column The Enable external alarm trip and Force to stop are fail safe terminal commands For example when data 9 in Enable external alarm trip Active OFF alarm is triggered when OFF when data 1009 Active ON alarm is triggered when ON CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 41 Terminal function assignment and data setting E Select multi frequency 0 to 15 steps S81 SS2 SS4 and SS8 Function code data 0 1 2 and 3 The combination of the ON OFF states of digital input signals S81 SS2 SS4 and SS8 selects one of 16 different frequency commands defined beforehand by 15 function codes C05 to C19 Multi frequency 0 to 15 With this the inverter can drive the motor at 16 different preset frequencies The table below lists the frequencies that can be obtained by the combination of switching SS1 SS2 SS4 and SS8 In the Selected frequency column Other than multi frequency represents the reference frequency sourced by frequency command 1 F01 frequency command 2 C30 or others For details refer to the block diagram in FRENIC Multi User s Manual Chapter 4 Section 4 2 Drive Frequency Command Block S
12. oe If a filter other than Fuji optional output filter OFL 4A is connected to Note the inverter s output secondary circuit the result of tuning can be unpredictable When you replace an inverter make a note of the old inverter s settings for the primary resistance R1 leakage reactance X no load current and rated slip frequency and set those values to the new inverter s function codes 4 1 4 Test run A WARNING If the user specifies the function codes wrongly or without completely understanding this Instruction Manual and the FRENIC Multi User s Manual the motor may rotate with a torque or at a speed not permitted for the machine Accident or injury may result Follow the descriptions given in Section 4 1 1 Inspection and preparation prior to powering on to Section 4 1 3 Preparation before running the motor for a test then begin test driving of the motor ACAUTION If any abnormality is found in the inverter or motor immediately stop operation and determine the cause referring to Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 4 4 1 Turn the power ON and check that the reference frequency 7 71 Hz is blinking on the LED monitor 2 Seta low reference frequency such as 5 Hz using A e keys Check that the frequency is blinking on the LED monitor 3 Press the T
13. 3 Check for cracks breakage deformation and remarkable rust 4 Check the capacitors for electrolyte leaks and deformation How to inspect 1 Retighten 2 Smelling and visual inspection 3 4 Visual inspection Evaluation criteria 1 2 3 4 No abnormalities Cooling fan Cooling system 1 Check for abnormal noise and excessive vibration 2 Check for loose bolts 3 Check for discoloration caused by overheat 1 Hearing and visual inspection or turn manually be sure to turn the power OFF 2 Retighten 3 Visual inspection 1 Smooth rotation 2 3 No abnormalities Ventilation path Check the heat sink intake and exhaust ports for clogging and foreign materials Visual inspection No abnormalities If the inverter is stained wipe it off with a chemically neutral cloth to remove dust and use a vacuum cleaner 7 3 List of Periodical Replacement Parts Each part of the product has its own service life that will vary according to the environmental and operating conditions It is recommended that the following parts be replaced as specified below When the replacement is necessary consult your Fuji Electric representative Table 7 2 Replacement Parts Part name Standard replacement intervals DC link bus capacitor 10 years Electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit boards 10 years Cooling fan 10 years Note These replacement intervals a
14. Auto search for idling motor speed at starting Data for HO9 For restart after momentary power failure F14 4 or 5 For normal startup 0 Disable Disable Disable 1 Enable Enable Disable 2 Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable i Not When the inverter is equipped with any of output circuit filters OFL O000 2 and 4 in Lay the secondary lines it cannot perform auto search Use the filter OFL 000 O0A instead E Auto search delay time H49 Auto search for the idling motor speed will become unsuccessful if it is done while the motor retains residual voltage It is therefore necessary to leave the motor for an enough time for residual voltage to disappear H49 specifies that time 0 0 to 10 0 sec At the startup triggered by a run command ON auto search starts with the delay specified by H49 When two inverters share a single motor to drive it alternately coast to stop it and perform auto search every switching H49 can eliminate the need of the run command timing control The H49 data should be the same value as the H13 data Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Restart time At the restart after a momentary power failure at the start by turning the terminal command BX Coast to a stop OFF and ON or at the restart by auto reset the inverter applies the delay time specified by H13 The inverter will not start unless the time specified by H13 has elapsed even if the starting condition
15. Figure 3 5 Menu Transition in Menu 4 I O Checking CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 19 Basic key operation To check the status of the I O signals set function code E52 to 2 Full menu mode beforehand 1 Turn the inverter ON It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the S key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears 2 Use the A and keys to display I O Checking 4 1_ 3 Press the amp key to proceed to a list of I O check items e g 5_ 77 5 key to p g 4 Use the Nand Y keys to display the desired I O check item then press the G amp key The corresponding I O check data appears For the item 547 or 4_47 using the A and Q keys switches the display method between the segment display for external signal information in Table 3 17 and hexadecimal display for I O signal status in Table 3 18 5 Press the key to return to a list of I O check items Press the key again to return to the menu Table 3 16 I O Check Items LED monitor D ipti howe escription I O signals on the control Shows the ON OFF state of the digital I O terminals a circuit terminals Refer to m Displaying control I O signal terminals on the next page for details Shows the ON OFF state of the digital I O terminals that received a command via RS 485 and optional communications Refer
16. Frequency setting O other than above Command via link TS Multi frequency command PID output as frequency command T Final frequency command PID cancel ol Hz PID ON CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 10 3 3 3 Running stopping the motor By factory default pressing the T key starts running the motor in the forward direction and pressing the 6 key decelerates the motor to stop The we key is enabled only in Running mode The motor rotational direction can be selected by changing the setting of function code F02 E Operational relationship between function code F02 Operation method and S key Table 3 8 lists the relationship between function code F02 settings and the T key which determines the motor rotational direction Table 3 8 Motor Rotational Direction Specified by F02 Data for F02 Pressing the S key runs the motor In the direction commanded by the terminal FWD or REV Note Forward fun key disabled The motor is driven by terminal Reverse FWD or REV command In the forward direction Note The rotational direction of 7 IEC compliant motors is opposite In the reverse direction to that of the motor shown here For the details on operations with function code F02 refer to Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES When the keypad is in use for specifying the f
17. H30 2 3 or 5 y98 1 Via RS 485 communications link option card H30 6 y98 0 H30 7 y98 0 H30 8 y98 0 H30 6 7 or 8 y98 1 2 5 no D c G E 9 cs x Via field bus option Ra H30 0 2 or 6 y98 2 H30 1 3 or 7 y98 2 H30 4 5 or 8 y98 2 H30 0 1 to 8 y98 3 For details refer to the FRENIC Multi User s Manual Chapter 4 BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC and the RS 485 Communication User s Manual or the Field Bus Option Instruction Manual CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 66 H45 Mock Alarm H97 Clear Alarm Data H45 causes the inverter to generate a mock alarm in order to check whether external sequences function correctly at the time of machine setup Setting the H45 data to 1 displays mock alarm on the LED monitor and issues alarm output ALM to the digital output terminal specified see E20 E21 and E27 Accessing the H45 data requires simultaneous keying of Pe key N key After that the H45 data automatically reverts to 0 allowing you to reset the alarm Just as for data alarm history and relevant information of those alarms that could occur in running of the inverter the inverter saves mock alarm data enabling you to confirm the mock alarm status To clear the mock alarm data use H97 Accessing the H9
18. Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 The inverter ran the Check the data of function code H07 Acceleration deceleration motor by S curve or curvilinear pattern pattern gt Select the linear pattern H07 0 gt Shorten the acceleration deceleration time F07 F08 E10 and E11 The current limiting prevented the output frequency from increasing during acceleration Make sure that F43 Current limiter Mode selection is set to 2 Enable during acceleration and at constant speed then check that the setting of F44 Current limiter Level is reasonable gt Readijust the setting of F44 to appropriate value or disable the function of current limiter in F43 gt Increase the acceleration deceleration time F07 F08 E10 and E11 The automatic regenerative braking was active during deceleration Check the data of function code H69 Automatic deceleration gt Increase the deceleration time F08 and E11 4 Overload Measure the output current gt Lighten the load In the case of a fan or a pump load lower the setting data of the F15 Frequency limiter High In winter the load tends to increase 5 Torque generated by the motor was insufficient Check that the motor starts running if the value of the torque boost F09 and A05 is increased gt Increase the value of the torque boost F09 and A05 6 An external frequency command i
19. item Output frequency a Ba fre Switching at approx 5 Current alarm code S am __1 second intervals f A E we ji gt UU 52 8 g le L J il r Al _item _ Switching at approx Output current ne 1 second intervals 1D 2x 0 u i gt X E item Switching at approx Error sub code 3 1 second intervals n 6 2 i lt gt u Most recent alarm code Sy 2 oy t gt i Same as above E g 1002 I fn 2nd recent alarm code S gt j Same as above Eg 2 LU T e5 5 I pa f 3rd recent alarm code S PR gt Same as above IM Eg 304 IEN Ey s ist of alarm es unning status info at the time List of alarm cod R tatus info at the ti an alarm occurred Figure 3 7 Menu Transition in Alarm Mode 3 28 Chapter 4 RUNNING THE MOTOR 4 1 Running the Motor for a Test 4 1 1 Inspection and preparation prior to powering on Check the following prior to powering on 1 Check if connection is correct Especially check if the power wires are connected to the inverter input terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T or L1 L and L2 N and output terminals U V and W respectively and that the grounding wires are connected to the ground electrodes correctly Refer to Figure 4 1 A WARNING Do not connect power supply wires to the inverter output terminals U V and W Otherwise the inverter may be broken if you turn the power ON Be sure to connect the grounding wires of the inverter and the motor to the gro
20. 1 The power supply voltage was over the range of the inverter s specifications Measure the input voltage gt Decrease the voltage to within that of the specifications CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 11 Possible Causes 2 Asurge current entered the input power supply What to Check and Suggested Measures If within the same power supply a phase advancing capacitor is turned ON or OFF or a thyristor converter is activated a surge temporary precipitous rise in voltage or current may be caused in the input power gt Install a DC reactor 3 The deceleration time was too short for the moment of inertia for load Recalculate the deceleration torque from the moment of inertia for load and the deceleration time gt Increase the deceleration time F08 E11 and H56 gt Enable the regenerative braking H69 2 4 or deceleration characteristics H71 1 gt Enable torque limiter F41 gt Set the rated voltage at base frequency F05 and A03 to 0 to improve braking ability 4 The acceleration time was too short Check if the overvoltage alarm occurs after rapid acceleration gt Increase the acceleration time F07 and E10 gt Select the S curve pattern H07 5 Braking load was too heavy Compare the braking torque of the load with that of the inverter gt Set the rated voltag
21. A WARNING When wiring the inverter to the power supply insert a recommended molded case circuit breaker MCCB or residual current operated protective device RCD a ground fault circuit interrupter GFCI with overcurrent protection in the path of each pair of power lines to inverters Use the devices recommended ones within the related current range e Use wires in the specified size Tighten terminals with specified torque Otherwise fire could occur Do not connect a surge killer to the inverter s output circuit Do not use one multicore cable in order to connect several inverters with motors Doing so could cause fire Ground the inverter in compliance with the national or local electric code Be sure to connect the grounding wire for the inverters grounding terminal G Otherwise electric shock or fire could occur Qualified electricians should carry out wiring Be sure to perform wiring after turning the power off Otherwise electric shock could occur Be sure to perform wiring after installing the inverter Otherwise electric shock or injuries could occur Ensure that the number of input phases and the rated voltage of the product match the number of phases and the voltage of the AC power supply to which the product is to be connected Do not connect the power supply wires to output terminals U V and W Doing so could cause fire or an accident 5 aS 2 3 5 Wiring for m
22. AWG22 0 34 mm Al0 34 6TQ 3 5 mm Al0 5 6WH AWG18 0 75 mm Al0 75 6GY Head thickness 0 02 inch AWG20 0 5 mm AWG16 1 25 mm CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Al1 5 6BK 2 9 0 6 mm Screwdriver head style 2 3 3 Recommended wire sizes Table 2 7 lists the recommended wire sizes The recommended wire sizes for the main circuits are examples of using HIV single wire for 75 C 167 F at an ambient temperature of 50 C 122 F Table 2 7 Recommended Wire Sizes Recommended wire size AWG mm 1 Main circuits Main circuit Nominal power input applied Invertertype L1 R L2 S L3 T Ground Inverter Braking Control motor IL1 L L2 N ing output resistor circuit P Sc u v w DB Power supply voltage w DCR w o DCR FRNF12E1 2U FRNF25E1 2U FRNFSOE1 2U FRN001E1W 2U FRN002E1W 2U FRN003E1W 2U FRN005E1W 2U FRN007E1W 2U FRN010E1W 2U FRN015E1W 2U FRN020E1W 2U FRNF50E1 W 4U FRN001E1W 4U FRN002E1 W 4U FRN003E1 W 4U FRN005E1W 4U FRN007E1W 4U FRN010E1W 4U FRN015E1W 4U FRN020E1 W 4U FRNF12E1 7U FRNF25E1 7U FRNFSOE1 7U FRNOO1E1M 7U FRN002E1W 7U FRN003E1 W 7U gt o D N N a E Sa D D g Three phase 460 V Three phase
23. E65 Reference Loss Detection Continuous running frequency When the analog frequency command entered through terminals 12 and C1 C1 V2 function has dropped below 10 of the expected frequency command within 400 ms the inverter presumes that the analog frequency command wire has been broken and continues its operation at the frequency determined by the ratio specified by E65 to the reference frequency When the frequency command level in voltage or current returns to a level higher than that specified by E65 the inverter presumes that the broken wire has been fixed and continues to run following the frequency command Avoid an abrupt voltage or current change for the analog frequency command The abrupt change may be interpreted as a wire break Setting E65 data at 999 Disable allows the Reference loss detected signal REF OFF to be issued but does not allow the reference frequency to change the inverter runs at the analog frequency command as specified When E65 0 or 999 the reference frequency level at which the broken wire is recognized as fixed is f1 x 0 2 When E65 100 or higher the reference frequency level at which the broken wire is recognized as fixed is f1 x 1 The reference loss detection is not affected by the setting of analog input adjustment filter time constants C33 C38 and C43 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctia
24. F27 0 e heard from motor What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the data of function codes F26 Motor sound Carrier frequency and F27 Motor sound Tone gt Increase the carrier frequency F26 gt Readijust the setting of F27 to appropriate value 2 The ambient temperature of the inverter was too high when automatic lowering of the carrier frequency was enabled by H98 Measure the temperature inside the panel of the inverter gt If it is over 40 C lower it by improving the ventilation gt Lower the temperature of the inverter by reducing the load In the case of a fan or a pump lower the setting data of the frequency limiter F15 Note If you disable H98 an GI or GILL alarm may occur 3 Resonance with the load CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fa Check the precision of the mounting of the load or check whether there is resonance with the panel or likes gt Disconnect the motor and run it without the inverter and determine where the resonance comes from Upon locating the cause improve the characteristics of the source of the resonance gt Adjust the settings of C01 Jump frequency 1 to C04 Jump frequency Hysteresis width so as to avoid continuous running in the frequency range causing resonance x 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 6 6 The motor does not accelerate and decelerate at the set time
25. FOO Data Protection FOO specifies whether to protect function code data except F00 and digital reference data such as frequency command PID command and timer operation from accidentally getting changed by pressing the v keys Data for FOO Function Disable both data protection and digital reference protection allowing you to change both function code data and digital reference data with the A V keys Enable data protection and disable digital reference protection allowing you to change digital reference data with the A Mikeys But you cannot change function code data except F00 Disable data protection and enable digital reference protection allowing you to change function code data with the A keys But you cannot change digital reference data Enable both data protection and digital reference protection not allowing you to change function code data or digital reference data with the Wv keys Enabling the protection disables the a keys to change function code data To change F00 data simultaneous keying of F from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0 keys is required g Tip Even when FOO 1 or 3 function code data can be changed via the communications link For similar purposes WE KP a signal enabling editing of function code data from the keypad is provided as a terminal command for digital input terminals Refer to the descriptions of E01 through E05
26. Pa CES Mii z p owes 24397 lt p 5 0288S 01 ani p2 a Prim 40 2a i4 Tay aa Power supply Dimensions inch mm voltage Inverter type D D1 DZ Three phase FRNF50E1S 4U 4 96 126 3 39 86 1 57 40 460 V FRNOO1E1S 4U 5 90 150 2 52 64 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 8 8 z anna gt p oann OAN omet pi ee FET nN OFT anomenar Stat Unit inch mm Power supply Dimensions inch mm voltage Inverter type D D1 D2 Three phase FRN002E1S 2U 230 V FRN003E1S 2U 5 90 3 39 Three phase FRNOO2E1S 4U 150 86 2 52 460 V FRNOO3E1S 4U 64 Single phase z 6 30 3 78 230 V FRN002E1S 7U 160 96 Sputan z i Sats zam Sanz Lut E 2a 22 j 3a F ri beaten mame HEJ s G am e e Main ramepiate 3 Power supply voltage Inverter type Three phase 230 V FRNOO5E1S 2U Three phase 460 V FRNOOS5E1S 4U Single phase 230 V FRNOO3E1S 7U 8 9 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Unit inch mm e s ene Power supply voltage Inverter type FRNOO7E1S 2U FRNO10E1S 2U FRNOO7E1S 4U FRNO10E1S 4U Three phase 230 V Three phase 460 V Power supply voltage Inverter type FRN
27. 230 V DCR DC reactor 1 Use the terminal crimp with an insulation sheath or with processing by the insulation tube Use the insulated wire of 75 C 167 F 600 V HIV insulated This selection assumes the inverter is used in ambient temperature at 50 C 122 F Note 1 A box W in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 10 2 3 4 Wiring precautions Follow the rules below when performing wiring for the inverter 1 Make sure that the power supply voltage is within the rated voltage range specified on the nameplate 2 Be sure to connect the three phase power wires to the main circuit power input terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T or connect the single phase power wires to the main circuit power input terminals L1 L and L2 N of the inverter If the power wires are connected to other terminals the inverter will be damaged when the power is turned ON 3 Always connect the grounding terminal to prevent electric shock fire or other disasters and to reduce electric noise 4 Use crimp terminals covered with insulated sleeves for the main circuit terminal wiring to ensure a reliable connection Keep the power supply wiring primary circuit and motor wiring Secondary circuit of the main circuit and control circuit wiring as far away as possible from each other
28. Application functions y codes Link functions o codes Optional function Displays only function codes that have been Data Checking 4 changed from their factory defaults You can refer to or change those function code data Displays the running information required for Drive Monitoring h maintenance or test running I O Checking Displays external interface information Maintenance Displays maintenance information including Information i cumulative run time Displays the recent four alarm codes You can Alarm Information 7 refer to the running information at the time when the alarm occurred Note 1 Mounting an optional multi function keypad TP G1 adds the data copying function to the menu enabling reading writing and verifying of function code data Note 2 The o codes are displayed only when the corresponding option is mounted For details refer to the Instruction Manual for the corresponding option E Selecting menus to display The menu driven system allows you to cycle through menus To cycle through necessary menus only for simple operation use function code E52 that provides a choice of three display modes as listed below The factory default E52 0 is to display only two menus Menu 0 Quick Setup and Menu 1 Data Setting allowing no switching to any other menu Table 3 10 Keypad Display Mode Selection Function Code E52 Data for E
29. Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 8 15 LED Alarm Name Description monitor output displays 30A B C Overload Stops the inverter output if the Insulated Gate Bipolar Ch Yes protection Transistor IGBT internal temperature calculated from the output current and temperature of inside the inverter is over the preset value External alarm Places the inverter in alarm stop state upon receiving digital cia Yes input input signal THR Electronic In the following cases the inverter stops running the motor to hf Yes thermal protect the motor in accordance with the electronic thermal We overload overload protection setting Protects general purpose motors over the entire frequency range F10 1 Protects inverter motors over the entire frequency range F10 2 The operation level and thermal time constant can be set by F11 and F12 e a For motor 2 read F10 to F12 as A06 to A08 2 PTC A PTC thermistor input stops the inverter output for motor cy Yes thermistor protection Connect a PTC thermistor between terminals C1 and 11 and set the function codes and slide switch on the interface PCB accordingly Overload Outputs a preliminary alarm at a preset level before the early inverter is stopped by the electronic thermal overload warning protection for the motor Stall prevention Operates when instantaneous overcurrent limiting is
30. hence the actual acceleration deceleration time is longer than the reference acceleration deceleration time Output frequency Acc time Dec time Reference Reference Maximum Acc time Dec time frequency a F03 A01 Time CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 61 Acceleration deceleration time lt S curve acceleration deceleration weak when the frequency change is 10 or more of the maximum frequency gt Acceleration or deceleration time s 2 x 5 100 90 100 2 x 5 100 x reference acceleration or deceleration time 1 1 x reference acceleration or deceleration time lt S curve acceleration deceleration strong when the frequency change is 20 or more of the maximum frequency gt Acceleration or deceleration time s 2 x 10 100 80 100 2 x 10 100 x reference acceleration or deceleration time 1 2 x reference acceleration or deceleration time Curvilinear acceleration deceleration Acceleration deceleration is linear below the base frequency constant torque but it slows down above the base frequency to maintain a certain level of load factor constant output This acceleration deceleration pattern allows the motor to accelerate or decelerate with the maximum performance of the motor E Note Choose an appropriate acceleration deceleration time taking into account the Shots machinery s
31. info ctiautomation net Preface Thank you for purchasing our FRENIC Multi series of inverters This product is designed to drive a three phase induction motor for fan and pump applications Read through this instruction manual and be familiar with proper handling and operation of this product Improper handling might result in incorrect operation a short life or even a failure of this product as well as the motor Have this manual delivered to the end user of this product Keep this manual in a safe place until this product is discarded Listed below are the other materials related to the use of the FRENIC Multi Read them in conjunction with this manual as necessary FRENIC Multi User s Manual RS 485 Communication User s Manual The materials are subject to change without notice Be sure to obtain the latest editions for use E Safety precautions Read this manual thoroughly before proceeding with installation connections wiring operation or maintenance and inspection Ensure you have sound knowledge of the device and familiarize yourself with all safety information and precautions before proceeding to operate the inverter Safety precautions are classified into the following two categories in this manual Failure to heed the information indicated by this symbol may A WARN N G lead to dangerous conditions possibly resulting in death or serious bodily injuries Failure to heed the information indicated
32. more orders of class gt Check whether it is possible to replace the inverter with one with an appropriate capacity gt Manually specify the values for the motor parameters P06 P07 and P08 or A20 A21 and A22 gt Disable both auto tuning and auto torque boost set data of F37 or A13 to 1 5 The motor was a special type such as a high speed motor gt Disable both auto tuning and auto torque boost set data of F37 or A13 to 1 6 A tuning operation involving motor rotation P04 or A18 2 was attempted while the brake was applied to the motor gt Specify the tuning that does not involve the motor rotation P04 or A18 1 gt Release the brake before tuning that involves the motor rotation P04 or A18 2 Q For details of tuning errors refer to Errors during Tuning in Chapter 4 Section 4 1 3 Preparation before running the motor for a test Setting function code data 19 amp G RS 485 communications error E P RS 485 communications error Option card Problem Possible Causes 1 Conditions for communications differ between the inverter and host equipment A communications error occurred during RS 485 communications What to Check and Suggested Measures Compare the settings of the y codes y01 to y10 y11 to y20 with those of the host equipment gt Correct any settings that differ 2 Even though no Check the host equipment time y08 S18 galec
33. panel with poor ventilation Required Clearances CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 1 When mounting two or more inverters Horizontal layout is recommended when two or more inverters are to be installed in the same unit or panel If it is necessary to mount the inverters vertically install a partition plate or the like between the inverters so that any heat radiating from an inverter will not affect the one s above As long as the ambient temperature is 40 C 104 F or lower inverters can be mounted side by side without any gap between them only for inverters with a capacity of less than 7 5 HP m When employing external cooling At the shipment time the inverter is set up for mount inside your equipment or panel so that cooling is done all internally To improve cooling efficiently you can take the heat sink out External heat of the equipment or the panel as shown on the right so that on cooling is done both internally and externally this is called Internal heat external cooling aion SY T Cooling In external cooling the heat sink which dissipates about SSS fans 70 of the total heat total loss generated into air is situated Internal 1 outside the equipment or the panel As a result much less fans 5 heat is radiated inside the equipment or the panel Hieke a i Heat To take advantage of external cooling you
34. 10 15 2 0 5 3 x 11 7 22 7 0 9 2 4 2 5 3 10 3 EMC Directives Emission egory C2 Category C3 EN61800 3 2004 Immunity egory C3 Category C3 Weight Ibs kg 1 Standard 4 pole motors Other than those items in the above table are the same as those in Section 8 1 Standard Models 8 2 2 Three phase 460 V class series Type FRN_ _ _ E1E 4U 001 002 003 010 015 Applicable motor rating HP 1 1 2 3 10 15 3 5 5 5 5 5 11 0 17 9 1 6 2 5 2 5 5 0 8 1 EMC Directives Emission Category C2 Category C3 EN61800 3 2004 Immunity Category C3 Category C3 Weight Ibs kg 1 Standard 4 pole motors Other than those items in the above table are the same as those in Section 8 1 Standard Models 8 2 3 Single phase 230 V class series Type FRN_ _ _ E1E 7U F50 001 Applicable motor rating HP 1 1 2 1 1 8 2 9 0 8 1 3 EMC Directives Emission Category C2 EN61800 3 2004 Immunity Category C3 Weight Ibs kg 41 Standard 4 pole motors CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 8 4 8 3 Specifications of Keypad Related 8 3 1 Protective structure General specifications of keypad Table 8 1 General Specifications Specification Front side IP40 Back mounting side IP20 Remarks
35. 7 5 and 10 HP To remove the terminal cover first loosen the terminal cover fixing screw on it and put your finger in the dimple of the terminal cover labeled PULL and then pull it up toward you 2 To remove the main circuit terminal block cover put your thumbs on the handles of the main circuit terminal block cover and push it up while supporting it with your fingers Refer to Figure 2 5 Terminal cover fixing screw PULL Main circuit terminal block cover Handles Figure 2 5 Removing the Covers For Inverters with a Capacity of 7 5 and 10 HP Note When mounting the main circuit terminal block cover fit it according to the guide on the inverter Main circuit terminal block cover Figure 2 6 Mounting the main circuit terminal block cover For Inverters with a Capacity of 7 5 and 10HP CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 5 3 For inverters with a capacity of 15 and 20 HP To remove the terminal cover first loosen the terminal cover fixing screw on it and put your finger in the dimple of the terminal cover labeled PULL and then pull it up toward you To remove the main circuit terminal block cover hold the handles on the both sides of the main circuit terminal block cover and pull it up Terminal cover fixing screw PULL Main circuit terminal block cover Handles Figure 2 7 Removing th
36. Analog Output FM 5 35 5 23 5 34 5 36 5 37 Dynamic torque vector control Vif control with slip compensation active Vif control with optional PG interface Dynamic torque vector control with optional PG interface Disable No current limiter works Enable at constant speed Disable during ACC DEC F43 Current Limiter 2 Note 5 38 1 2 3 4 0 1 Mode selection 2 Enable during ACC constant speed operation F44 Level 20 to 200 The data is interpreted as the rated output current of the inverter for 100 F50 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection 1 to 900 for Braking Resistor 999 Disable Discharging capability 0 Reserved F51 Allowable average loss 0 001 to 50 000 0 000 Reserved 180 Note Em o gt Ee o o S The shaded function codes 777 are applicable to the quick setup Note Default settings for inverters with inverter s ROM version 0799 or earlier F43 0 and F44 200 For the inverter s ROM version checking procedure refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 6 Reading maintenance informatio CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 2 E codes Extension Terminal Functions Refer ae Default i setting page E01 Terminal X1 Function Selecting function code data assigns the corresponding function to 5 40 terminals X1 to X5 as listed below E02_ Terminal X2 Fun
37. Analog frequency setting in voltage V2 OFF PTC thermistor input C1 ON Figure 2 22 shows the location of slide switches for the input output terminal configuration Switching example Ire 2 sw3 o T A a qa t A l CACCZOCCCCACSI Factory default SHG SW7 SWS Swi C1 V2 IOFF ON B default el 4 i SOURGE I Figure 2 22 Location of the Slide Switches CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 24 2 4 Mounting and Connecting a Keypad 2 4 1 Mounting style and parts needed for connection 1 Mounting style You can mount a keypad in any style described below Mounting a keypad on the panel wall Refer to Figure 2 23 E Installing a keypad at a remote site e g for operation on hand Refer to Figure 2 24 Remote operation extension cable Keypad Keypad Inverter fixing screw Figure 2 23 Mounting Keypad on the Panel Wall N Remote operation extension cable Inverter Figure 2 24 Installing Keyp
38. Auto torque boos Variable Torque torque V f boosi pattern specified by F09 Enable Constant torque load Constant torque load To be selected if a motor may be over excited at no load Note Ifa required load torque acceleration toque is more than 50 of the rated torque it is recommended to select the linear V f pattern factory default Linear V f pattern Auto torque boosi E V f characteristics The FRENIC Multi series of inverters offers a variety of V f patterns and torque boosts which include V f patterns suitable for variable torque load such as general fans and pumps or for special pump load requiring high starting torque Two types of torque boost are available manual and automatic Output voltage V Rated voltage 100 Output voltage V R l 100 Rated voltage Torque Output Torque Output boost t 0 pene boost to i frequency Base Fa Base Hz requency frequency 1 F04 F04 Variable torque V f pattern F37 0 5 23 Linear V f pattern F37 1 f Tio When the variable torque V f pattern is selected F37 0 or 3 the output voltage ip s a R may be low and insufficient voltage output may result in less output torque of the motor at a low frequency zone depending on some characteristics of the motor itself and load In such a case it is recommended to increase the output voltage at the low frequency zone using the non linear V f patter
39. Command via link Multi frequency command Final frequency command PID output as frequency command CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 8 E Settings under PID dancer control To enable the PID dancer control you need to set function code J01 to 3 Under the PID control the items that can be specified or checked with Y and Y keys are different from those under the regular frequency control depending upon the current LED monitor setting If the LED monitor is set to the speed monitor E43 0 the item accessible is the primary frequency command if it is set to any other data it is the PID dancer position command Refer to the FRENIC Multi User s Manual for the details of the PID control Setting the PID dancer position command with the Nan V keys 1 Set function code J02 to 0 A Q keys on keypad 2 Set the LED monitor to something other than the speed monitor E43 0 when the inverter is in Running mode When the keypad is in Programming or Alarm mode you cannot modify the PID command with the V key To enable the PID dancer position command to be modified with the N V key first switch to Running mode 3 Press the V key to display the PID dancer position command The lowest digit of the displayed command and its decimal point blink 4 To change the command press the N V key again The com
40. Current from EMC Filter Built in Type Inverter Leakage current mA 1 Input power Inverter type Normal Worst 2 FRNF12E1E 2U FRNF25E1E 2U FRNF50E1E 2U FRNOO1E1E 2U FRNOO2E1E 2U FRNOO3E1E 2U FRNOO5E1E 2U FRNOO7E1E 2U FRNO10E1E 2U FRNO15E1E 2U FRNO20E1E 2U FRNF50E1E 4U FRNOO1E1E 4U FRNOO2E1E 4U FRNOO3E1E 4U FRNOO5E1E 4U FRNOO7E1E 4U FRNO10E1E 4U FRNO15E1E 4U FRNO20E1E 4U FRNF12E1E 7U FRNF25E1E 7U Single phase FRNFSOE1E 7U 230 V FRNOO1E1E 7U FRNOO2E1E 7U FRNOO3E1E 7U Three phase 230 V Three phase 460 V 1 The values are calculated assuming the power supplies of three phase 240 V 50 Hz three phase 400 V 50 Hz and single phase 230 V 50 Hz 2 The worst condition includes a phase loss in the supply line CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 10 5 Table 10 2 Leakage Current from Inverters with an External EMC complaint Filter Optional Input power Three phase 230 V Inverter type FRNF12E1S 2U FRNF25E1S 2U FRNF5S0E1S 2U FRNOO1E1S 2 Filter type EFL 0 75E11 2 Leakage current mA 1 Normal Worst 2 FRNO02E1S 2 FRN003E1S 2 FRN005E1S 2 EFL 4 0E11 2 FRN007E1S 2 FRN010E1S 2 EFL 7 5E11 2 FRNO15E1S 2 FRNO20E1S 2 EFL 15SP 2 Three phase 460 V FRNOO1E1
41. E27 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 60 HOG Cooling Fan ON OFF Control To prolong the life of the cooling fan and reduce fan noise during running the cooling fan stops when the temperature inside the inverter drops below a certain level while the inverter stops However since frequent switching of the cooling fan shortens its life the cooling fan is kept running for 10 minutes once it is started HO6 specifies whether to keep running the cooling fan all the time or to control its ON OFF Data for H06 Cooling fan ON OFF Disable Always in operation Enable ON OFF controllable H07 Acceleration Deceleration Pattern HO7 specifies the acceleration and deceleration patterns patterns to control output frequency Linear acceleration deceleration The inverter runs the motor with the constant acceleration and deceleration S curve acceleration deceleration To reduce an impact that acceleration deceleration would make on the machine the inverter gradually accelerates decelerates the motor in both the acceleration deceleration starting and ending zones Two types of S curve acceleration deceleration are available 5 weak and 10 strong of the maximum frequency which are shared by the four inflection points The acceleration deceleration time command determines the duration of acceleration deceleration in the linear period
42. FRN003E1W 2U 7 9 230 V 5 FRN005E1W 2U 12 6 7 5 FRN007E1W 2U 18 6 10 FRN010E1W 2U 25 3 15 FRN015E1W 2U 37 3 20 FRN020E1W 2U 49 1 1 2 FRNF50E1W 4U 1 1 FRN001E1W 4U 1 5 2 FRN002E1W 4U 2 9 Three 3 FRNOO3E1ml 4U 4 phase 5 FRN005E1W 4U 6 3 460 V 7 5 FRN007E1W 4U 9 3 10 FRN010E1W 4U 12 7 15 FRN015E1W 4U 18 7 20 FRN020E1W 4U 24 6 1 8 FRNF12E1W 7U 0 68 1 4 FRNF25E1W 7U 1 4 Single 4 2 FRNF50E1M 7U 2 phase 230 V 1 FRN001E1W 7U FRN002E1W 7U 5 8 3 FRN003E1W 7U 7 9 Note 1 A box in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 16 E Changing validating and saving function code data when the inverter is running Function codes are indicated by the following based on whether they can be changed or not when the inverter is running Change when Notation A running Validating and saving function code data Possible If the data of the codes marked with Y is changed with A and amp keys the change will immediately take effect however the change is not saved into the inverter s memory To save the change press the key If you press the key without pressing the S key to exit the current state then the changed data will be discarded and the previous data will take effect for the inverter operation Possible Even if the data of the codes marked with Y is changed with A and
43. FRNO20E1S 4U FRNF12E1S 7U 33 6 3 8 Three phase 460 V 51 3 5 8 FRNF25E1S 7U FRNF5SOE1S 7U FRNOO1E1S 7U FRNOO2E1S 7U FRNOO3E1S 7U Single phase 230 V CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net ix Conformity to UL standards and Canadian standards cUL certification Continued ACAUTION EMC filter built in type Required torque Wire size Power supply voltage Three phase 230 V Three phase 460 V Single phase 230 V CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Inverter type FRNF12E1E 2U Ib in N m AWG or kcmil mm FRNF25E1E 2U FRNFSOE1E 2U FRNOO1E1E 2U Main terminal 10 6 1 2 FRNOO2E1E 2U FRNOO3E1E 2U FRNOOSE1E 2U 15 9 1 8 FRNOO7E1E 2U FRNO10E1E 2U Output 33 6 3 8 Input 16 2 1 8 FRNO15E1E 2U FRNO20E1E 2U FRNFSOE1E 4U FRNOO1E1E 4U FRNOO2E1E 4U FRNOO3E1E 4U FRNOOSE1E 4U Output 51 3 5 8 Input 72 0 8 1 15 9 1 8 FRNOO7E1E 4U FRNO10E1E 4U Output 33 6 3 8 Input 16 2 1 8 FRNO15E1E 4U FRNO20E1E 4U FRNF12E1E 7U FRNF25E1E 7U FRNFSOE1E 7U FRNOO1E1E 7U Output 51 3 5 8 Input 16 2 1 8 FRNOO2E1E 7U FRNOO3E1
44. Measures 1 Temperature around the Measure the temperature around the motor motor exceeded that of motor specifications gt Lower the temperature 2 Cooling system for the motor malfunctioned Check if the cooling system of the motor is operating normally gt Repair or replace the cooling system of the motor 3 Load was too heavy Measure the output current gt Lighten the load e g lighten the load before overload occurs using E34 Overload Early Warning In winter the load tends to increase gt Lower the temperature around the motor gt Increase the motor sound carrier frequency F26 4 The set activation level H27 of the PTC thermistor for motor overheat protection was inadequate Check the thermistor specifications and recalculate the detection voltage gt Reconsider the data of function code H27 5 APTC thermistor and pull up resistor were connected incorrectly or the resistance was Check the connection and the resistance of the pull up resistor gt Correct the connections and replace the resistor with one with an appropriate resistance inadequate CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 15 Possible Causes 6 The value set for the torque boost F09 and A05 was too high What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the data of function codes F09 and A05 and
45. Not In equipment where a decrease in the output frequency does not lead to a decrease Sasa in the load the overload prevention control is of no use and should not be enabled H71 Deceleration Characteristics Setting the H71 data to 1 ON enables forced brake control If regenerative energy produced during the deceleration of the motor and returned to the inverter exceeds the inverter s braking capability an overvoltage trip will occur The forced brake control increases the motor energy loss during deceleration increasing the deceleration torque e a This function is aimed at controlling the torque during deceleration it has no effect if there is braking load Enabling the automatic deceleration anti regenerative control H69 2 or 4 disables the deceleration characteristics specified by H71 H89 Motor overload memory retention This is Motor overload memory Electrical thermal O L relay retention selection at power up H89 set to To do this Inactive When power up the drive Motor overload data is reset Active When power is down the drive stores Motor overload data and use this data at next power up H94 Cumulative Motor Run Time 1 Operating the keypad can display the cumulative run time of motor 1 This feature is useful for management and maintenance of the mechanical system H94 allows you to set the cumulative run time of the motor to the desired value For example specifying 0
46. OFF of LED segments Terminal input signal status under communications control in hexadecimal format Terminal output signal status Shows the ON OFF status of the digital I O terminals under RS 485 communications control Refer to Displaying control I O signal terminals under communications control in Section 3 4 5 Checking I O signal status for details under communications control in hexadecimal format Error sub code Secondary error code for the alarm When the same alarm occurs repeatedly in succession the alarm information for the first occurrences will be preserved and the information for other occurrences in between will be discarded The number of consecutive occurrences will be preserved as the first alarm information 3 5 Alarm Mode If an abnormal condition arises the protective function is invoked and issues an alarm then the inverter automatically enters Alarm mode At the same time an alarm code appears on the LED monitor E Releasing the alarm and switching to Running mode Remove the cause of the alarm and press the key to release the alarm and return to Running mode The alarm can be removed using the key only when the latest alarm code is displayed E Displaying the alarm history It is possible to display the most recent 3 alarm codes in addition to the one currently displayed Previous alarm codes can be displayed by pressing the N Y key while the cur
47. Output frequency Output frequency put current Output frequency before slip compensation Output frequency after slip compensation Output current put voltage Output voltage culated torque Reference frequency Calculated output torque of the motor in Frequency specified by a frequency command Rotational Rotational direction being outputted direction forward reverse stop Running Running status in hexadecimal format status Refer to E Displaying running status on the next page 7 120 Motor spesi Display value Output frequency Hz x Function code POT For motor 2 read P01 as A15 road shan Display value Output frequency Hz x Function code E50 spee k The 7 segment letters J appear for 10000 r min or more If Line speed E appear decrease function code E50 data so that the LED monitor displays 9999 or below referring to the above equation PID command Virtual physical value e g temperature or pressure of the object to be controlled which is converted from the PID command using function code E40 and E41 data PID display coefficients A and B Display value PID command x Coefficient A B B If PID control is disabled appears PID feedback Virtual physical value e g temperature or pressure of the object to amount be controlled which is converted from the PID command using function code E40 and E41 data PID display
48. Setting in Programming mode allows you to set up function codes for making the inverter functions match your needs To set function codes in this menu it is necessary to set function code E52 to 0 Function code data editing mode or 2 Full menu mode Basic key operation For details of the basic key operation refer to Menu 0 Quick Setup in Section 3 4 1 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 15 3 4 3 Checking changed function codes Menu 2 Data Checking Menu 2 Data Checking in Programming mode allows you to check function codes that have been changed Only the function codes whose data has been changed from the factory defaults are displayed on the LED monitor You can refer to the function code data and change it again if necessary The menu transition in Menu 2 Data Checking is as same as its of Menu 0 Quick Setup Basic key operation For details of the basic key operation refer to Menu 0 Quick Setup in Section 3 4 1 Ti To check function codes in Menu 2 Data Checking it is necessary to set function code IP E52 to Function code data check mode or 2 Full menu mode 3 4 4 Monitoring the running status Menu 3 Drive Monitoring Menu 3 Drive Monitoring is used to monitor the running status during maintenance and trial running The display items for Drive Monitoring are listed in Table 3 12 Figure 3 4
49. Takes effect in the constant speed operation mode Takes effect in all the operation modes E Timer J67 J67 configures the timer to suppress any activation of the overload stop function by any unexpected momentary load fluctuation If an activation condition of the overload stop function is taken for the time specified by the timer J67 the inverter activate it in case of J65 1 or 2 Not If J65 3 the timer setting is ignored In this case the inverter decelerates the motor instantaneously with the torque limit function so that referring to the timer is to interfere running of this function J68 to J72 Braking Signal Brake OFF current Brake OFF frequency Brake OFF timer Brake ON frequency and Brake ON timer These function codes are for the brake releasing turning on signals of hoisting elevating machines CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 72 Releasing the Brake The inverter releases the brake Terminal command BRKS ON after checking torque generation of the motor monitoring whether it applies both the output current and frequency to the motor which are higher than ones specified for the time long enough Function code Data setting range 0 to 200 Set it putting the inverter rated current at 100 Brake OFF current Brake OFF frequency 0 0 to 25 0 Hz Brake OFF timer 0 0 to 5 0 s Tu
50. Yes communications inverter and an optional card stops the inverter output error detection Option error When an option card has detected an error this function stops ErS Yes detection the inverter output Operation STOP Pressing the 9 key on the keypad forces the Er amp Yes protection key inverter to decelerate and stop the motor even if the priority inverter is running by any run commands given via the terminals or communications link operation After the motor stops the inverter issues alarm amp Start The inverter prohibits any run operations and displays Er amp Yes check 4 amp on the 7 segment LED monitor if any run function command is present when Powering up 7 An alarm is released the S key is turned ON or an alarm reset RST is input Enable communications link LE has been activated and the run command is active in the linked source Tuning error During tuning of motor parameters if the tuning has failed or has Er 7 Yes detection aborted or an abnormal condition has been detected in the tuning result the inverter stops its output RS 485 When the inverter is connected to a communications network via Era Yes communications the RS 485 port designed for the keypad detecting a error detection communications error stops the inverter output and displays an error code r 8 Data save error If the data could not be saved during activation of the Ere Yes during under undervoltage protection function t
51. before use Related function codes Non linear V f pattern Disabled Linear V f pattern only H50 to H53 Functions Restrictions Starting frequency Starting frequency holding time not supported F24 Stop frequency Stop frequency holding time not supported F39 Overload early warning Disabled E34 and E35 Droop control Disabled UP DOWN control Disabled Fixed at default setting 0 PID control Disabled Braking signal Disabled J68 to J72 Software current limiter Disabled F43 and F44 Rotation direction limitation Disabled H08 Overload stop Disabled J63 to J67 To run motor 2 with the M2 M1 terminal command and a run command e g FWD the input of the M2 M1 should not be delayed 10 ms or more from that of the run command If the delay exceeds 10 ms motor 1 will be driven by default Cnote m Enable DC braking DCBRK Function code data 13 This terminal command gives the inverter a DC braking command through the inverter s digital input Refer to the descriptions of F20 to F22 for DC braking E Select torque limiter level TL2 TL1 Function code data 14 This terminal command switches between torque limiter 1 F40 and F41 and torque limiter 2 E16 and E17 as listed below If no TL2 TL1 terminal command is assigned torque limiter 1 F40 and F41 takes effect by default Input terminal command TL2 TL1 Torque limiter level OFF Torque limiter 1 F40 and F41
52. between Tuning while the motor is stopped P04 or A18 1 and Tuning while the motor is running P04 or A18 2 In the case of Tuning while the motor is running P04 or A18 2 also adjust the acceleration and deceleration times F07 and F08 and set the rotation direction properly so that it matches the actual rotation direction of the machine system Data for Motor parameters Tuning tyoe Selection condition P04 A18 subjected to tuning 9 YP of tuning type Primary resistance Tuning the R1 and X The motor cannot be rotated R1 with the motor being or more than 50 of the rated Leakage reactance stopped load would be applied on the X motor if rotated Primary resistance Tuning the R1 X and Even if the motor is rotated it R1 rated slip frequency with is safe and the load applied Leakage reactance he motor being stopped on the motor would be no X Tuning the no load current more than 50 of the rating Nodiead current with the motor running at If you do the tuning with no 50 of the base frequency load you will get the highest Rated slip frequency precision Lastly tuning the rated slip frequency with the motor being stopped Upon completion of the tuning each motor parameter will be automatically saved into the applicable function code 3 Preparation of machine system Perform appropriate preparations on the motor and its load such as disengaging the coupli
53. between LED segments and I O signals Table 3 19 Segment Display for External Signal Information LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 Segment LED No Bit Input terminal Output terminal CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 22 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information Menu 5 Maintenance Information Menu 5 Maintenance Information contains information necessary for performing maintenance on the inverter The menu transition in Menu 5 Maintenance information is as same as its of in Menu 3 Drive Monitoring Basic key operation To view the maintenance information set function code E52 to 2 Full menu mode beforehand 1 Turn the inverter ON It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the eS key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears Cor ta 2 Use the A and v keys to display Maintenance Information 5 472 3 Press the G amp key to proceed to a list of maintenance item codes e g 5_ tH 4 Use the A and OU keys to display the desired maintenance item then press the Gs key The data of the corresponding maintenance item appears 5 Press the eS key to return to a list of maintenance items Press the S key again to return to the menu Table 3 20 Display Items for Maintenance Informat
54. can be assigned only by E98 or E99 E20 E21 Terminal Y1 and Y2 Function E27 Terminal 30A B C Function Relay output E20 E21 and E27 assign output signals listed on the next page to general purpose programmable output terminals Y1 Y2 and 30A B C These function codes can also switch the logic system between normal and negative to define the property of those output terminals so that the inverter logic can interpret either the ON or OFF status of each terminal as active The factory default settings are Active ON Terminals Y1 and Y2 are transistor outputs and terminals 30A B C are relay contact outputs In normal logic if an alarm occurs the relay will be energized so that 30A and 30C will be closed and 30B and 30C opened In negative logic the relay will be deenergized so that 30A and 30C will be opened and 30B and 30C closed This may be useful for the implementation of failsafe power systems When a negative logic is employed all output signals are active e g an alarm would be Note recognized while the inverter is powered OFF To avoid causing system malfunctions by this interlock these signals to keep them ON using an external power supply Furthermore the validity of these output signals is not guaranteed for approximately 1 5 seconds after power on so introduce such a mechanism that masks them during the transient period e Terminals 30A B C use mechani
55. data N N 571 H95 DC Braking 0 Slow 5 33 Braking response mode 1 Quick H96 STOP Key Priority Start Check Function Data STOP key priority Start check function Disable Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable Enable Enable 1 Clear alarm data and return to zero H98 Protection Maintenance Function 10 to 31 Display data on the keypad s LED monitor in decimal format 5 71 In each bit 0 for disabled 1 for enabled Mode selection Bit 0 Lower the carrier frequency automatically Bit 1 Detect input phase loss Bit 2 Detect output phase loss Bit 3 Select life judgment threshold of DC link bus capacitor Bit 4 Judge the life of DC link bus capacitor Acodes Motor 2 Parameters Code Name Data setting range Incr Data Default ment copying setting A01 Maximum Frequency 2 25 0 to 400 0 01 Hz N f Yy 600 A02 Base Frequency 2 25 0 to 400 0 pot Pref nop yf oo A03 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 2 0 Output a voltage in proportion to input voltage 80 to 240 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 230 V class series 160 to 500 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 460 V class series A04 Maximum Output Voltage 2 80 to 240V Output an AVR controlled voltage for 230 V class series poor Serer PPP TTS 2 These function codes and their data are displayed but they are reserved for particular manufacturers Unless otherwise specified do not access these function codes 6 These are available
56. disable the judgment on the life of the DC link bus capacitor Since load may vary significantly in the following cases disable the judgment on the life during operation Either conduct the measurement with the judgment enabled under appropriate conditions during periodical maintenance or conduct the measurement under the operating conditions matching the actual ones e An option card or multi function keypad is used Another inverter or equipment such as a PWM converter is connected to the terminals of the DC link bus To set data of H98 assign functions to each bit total 5 bits and set it in decimal format The table below lists functions assigned to each bit Bit number Judge the life Soor e Detec Detect Lower the judgment k carrier Function of DC link bus threshold of DC outpu input frequency capacitor link bus capacitor phase phase loss automatically Data 0 Disable Use the factory Disab Disable Disable default Data 1 Enable Use the user Enable Enable Enable setting Example of Enable 1 Use the factory Disable 0 Enable 1 Enable 1 decimal default 0 expression 19 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 70 Conversion table Decimal to from binary Decimal Decimal Oo 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 jojojojojojojo 24
57. for power factor correction Do not mount power capacitors for power factor correction in the inverter s primary circuit Use the DC reactor to correct the inverter power factor Do not use power capacitors for power factor correction in the inverter s output secondary circuit An overcurrent trip will occur disabling motor operation Discontinuance of surge killer Do not connect a surge killer to the inverter s output secondary circuit Combina tion with F Use of a filter and shielded wires is typically recommended to peripheral Reducing noise satisfy EMC Directive devices If an overvoltage trip occurs while the inverter is stopped or M inst operated under a light load it is assumed that the surge Gasures ea current is generated by open close of the power capacitor for SUIDE CUILeMs power factor correction in the power system Connect a DC reactor to the inverter When checking the insulation resistance of the inverter use Megger test a 500 V megger and follow the instructions contained in Chapter 7 Section 7 5 Insulation Test Control circuit When using remote control limit the wiring length between re the inverter and operator panel to 66ft 20 m or less and use wiring length A 3 twisted pair or shielded wire If long wiring is used between the inverter and the motor the inverter will overheat or trip as a result of overcurrent Wiring length high frequency current flowing int
58. for the power circuit malfunctioned or the connection was incorrect What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the input voltage to find where the peripheral equipment malfunctioned or which connection is incorrect gt Replace any faulty peripheral equipment or correct any incorrect connections Other loads were connected to the same power supply and required a large current to start running to the extent that it caused a temporary voltage drop on the supply side a Measure the input voltage and check the voltage variation gt Reconsider the power system configuration 6 Inverter s inrush current caused the power voltage drop because power supply transformer capacity was insufficient 4 m Input phase loss Problem Possible Causes 1 Main circuit power input wires broken Check if the alarm occurs when you switch on a molded case circuit breaker MCCB a residual current operated protective device RCD a ground fault circuit interrupter GFCI with overcurrent protection or a magnetic contactor MC Reconsider the capacity of the power supply transformer Input phase loss occurred or interphase voltage unbalance rate was large What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the input voltage gt Repair or replace the wires 2 The terminal screws for the main circuit power input of the inverter were not tight enough Check if the screws on the inverter input termi
59. frequency causing the system oscillation hunting or activating the inverter overvoltage trip alarm 7 When specifying the acceleration time therefore you need to take into account machinery characteristics and moment of inertia of the load A CAUTION When the instantaneous overcurrent limiting is enabled the motor output torque could drop For driving elevating machinery which could cause a serious problem with a drop of the motor output torque therefore disable the instantaneous overcurrent limiting Note that disabling it will cause an overcurrent trip when a current exceeding the inverter protection level flows so secure the protective coordination using a mechanical brake An accident could occur 5 64 H28 Droop Control In a system in which two or more motors drive single machinery any speed gap between inverter driven motors results in some load unbalance between motors The droop control allows each inverter to drive the motor with the speed droop characteristics for increasing its load eliminating such kind of load unbalance Speed Output frequency Reference frequency aac Droop characteristics Load 100 Motor load torque Note To use droop control be sure to auto tune the inverter for the motor H30 Communications Link Function Mode selection y98 Bus Link Function Mode selection Using the RS 485 communications link standard option or field bus option allow
60. has disappeared from the LED monitor switch ON the main circuit power again 7 Select Menu 5 Maintenance Information in Programming mode and note the reading relative capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 4 2 Measuring the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor during power off time under ordinary operating condition If the measuring method for discharging condition of the DC link bus capacitor during a power off time under the ordinary operating condition at the end user s installation is different from the initial measuring method at the time of factory shipment the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitors can not be measured Follow the procedure mentioned below when you measure the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitors under the ordinary operating condition at the end User s installation 1 Set function code H98 Protection maintenance function to enable the user to specify the judgment criteria for the service life of the DC link bus capacitor Bit 3 refer to function code H98 2 Place the inverter in stopped state 3 Place the inverter in the state of power off under ordinary operating conditions 4 Set both function codes H42 Capacitance of DC link bus capacitor and H47 Initial capacitance of DC link bus capacitor to 0000 5 Switch OFF the inverter Measure the discharg
61. interrupter GFCI and MC if necessary It is not necessary to align phases of the power supply wires and the input terminals of the inverter with each other With overcurrent protection Ka Tip It is recommended that a magnetic contactor be inserted that can be manually activated Xa This is to allow you to disconnect the inverter from the power supply in an emergency e g when the protective function is activated so as to prevent a failure or accident from causing the secondary problems 2 3 6 Wiring for control circuit terminals A WARNING In general sheaths and covers of the control signal cables and wires are not specifically designed to withstand a high voltage i e reinforced insulation is not applied Therefore if a control signal cable or wire comes into direct contact with a live conductor of the main circuit the insulation of the sheath or the cover might break down which would expose the signal wire to a high voltage of the main circuit Make sure that the control signal cables and wires will not come into contact with live conductors of the main circuit Failure to observe these precautions could cause electric shock and or an accident ACAUTION Noise may be emitted from the inverter motor and wires Take appropriate measure to prevent the nearby sensors and devices from malfunctioning due to such noise An accident could occur Table 2 9 lists the symbols names and function
62. key to start running the motor in the forward direction Check that the reference frequency is displayed on the LED monitor 4 To stop the motor press the F key lt Check points during a test run gt Check that the motor is running in the forward direction Check for smooth rotation without motor humming or excessive vibration Check for smooth acceleration and deceleration When no abnormality is found press the T key again to start driving the motor then increase the reference frequency using AN V keys Check the above points again If any problem is found modify the function code data again as described below 4 2 Operation After confirming that the inverter normally drives the motor in a test run make mechanical connections connections to the machine system and electrical connections wiring and cabling and configure the necessary function codes properly before starting a production run Depending on the production run conditions further adjustments can be required such as adjustments of torque boost F09 A05 acceleration time F07 E10 and deceleration time F08 E11 LF 3 Note a 4 2 1 Jogging Operation This section provides the procedure for jogging the motor Making the inverter ready to jog with the steps below The LED monitor should display 4 24 Enter Running mode see page 3 3 Press the A keys simultaneously The LED monitor displays the jogging frequency for approximately
63. keys to run and stop the motor Note that this run command enables only the forward rotation Keypad Forward rotation There is no need to specify the rotation direction Enables SU keys to run and stop the motor Note that this run command enables only the reverse rotation Keypad Reverse rotation There is no need to specify the rotation direction Oa When function code F02 0 or 1 the Run forward FWD and Run reverse REV Note terminal commands must be assigned to terminals FWD and REV respectively When the FWD or REV is ON the F02 data cannot be changed When assigning the FWD or REV to terminal FWD or REV with F02 being set to 1 be sure to turn the target terminal OFF beforehand otherwise the motor may unintentionally rotate e In addition to the run command sources described above higher priority command sources including communications link are provided For details refer to the FRENIC Multi User s Manual F03 Maximum Frequency 1 F03 specifies the maximum frequency to limit a reference frequency Specifying the maximum frequency exceeding the rating of the equipment driven by the inverter may cause damage or a dangerous situation Make sure that the maximum frequency setting matches the A WARNING The inverter can easily accept high speed operation When changing the speed setting carefully check the specifications of motors or equipment beforehand Otherwi
64. load depending on the load state huge moment of inertia for example To avoid that H69 provides a choice of cancellation of the anti regenerative control to apply when three times the specified deceleration time is elapsed thus decelerating the motor Data for H69 Function Disable Enable Canceled if actual deceleration time exceeds three times the one specified by FO8 E11 Enable Not canceled even if actual deceleration time exceeds three times the one specified by F08 E11 Enabling the anti regenerative control may automatically increase the deceleration time When a braking unit is connected disable the anti regenerative control Note 5 67 H70 Overload Prevention Control H70 specifies the decelerating rate of the output frequency to prevent a trip from occurring due to an overload This control decreases the output frequency of the inverter before the inverter trips due to a heat sink overheat or inverter overload with an alarm indication of 7 4 or i 4 respectively It is useful for equipment such as pumps where a decrease in the output frequency leads to a decrease in the load and it is necessary to keep the motor running even when the output frequency drops Data for H70 Function 0 00 Decelerate the motor by selected deceleration time 0 01 to 100 0 Decelerate the motor by deceleration rate from 0 01 to 100 0 Hz s 999 Disable overload prevention control
65. load torque H09 H49 Starting Mode Auto search and Delay time HO09 specifies the auto search mode for idling motor speed to run the idling motor without stopping it The auto search applies to both a restart of the inverter after a momentary power failure and every normal startup The auto search mode can be switched by assigning an STM terminal command Enable auto search for idling motor speed at starting to a digital input terminal with any of E01 to E05 function code data 26 If no STM is assigned the inverter interprets STM as being OFF by default Auto search for idling motor speed Starting the inverter with a run command ON BX OFF auto reset etc with STM being ON searches for the idling motor speed for a maximum of 1 2 seconds to run the idling motor without stopping it After completion of the auto search the inverter accelerates the motor up to the reference frequency according to the frequency command and the preset acceleration time Freguancy command eens Motor speed 1 Starry moge I Dewy tree 1 Hew N Auto search for idling motor speed to follow CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 62 E H09 and STM terminal command Enable auto search for idling motor speed at starting The combination of HO9 data and the STM state determines whether to perform the auto search as listed below
66. mA DC of analog input as 100 _e The analog input less than the bias base point C50 is limited by the bias value Note F18 e Specifying that the data of the bias base point C50 is equal to or greater than that of each gain base point C34 C39 or C44 will be interpreted as invalid so the inverter will reset the reference frequency to 0 Hz Reference frequency 4 Gain C32 C37 or C42 Point B8 Bias F18 Point A Analog input 0 Bias Gain 100 base base point point C50 C34 C39 of C44 Example Setting the bias gain and their base points when the reference frequency 0 to 100 follows the analog input of 1 to 5 VDC to terminal 12 in frequency command 1 Reference frequency Gain C32 1909 fe Port B Bias F18 0 Point A Analog input 0 1V 10 5V 50 100 Bias Gain base base point C50 point C34 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 32 Point A To set the reference frequency to 0 Hz for an analog input being at 1 V set the bias to 0 F18 0 Since 1 V is the bias base point and it is equal to 10 of 10 V full scale set the bias base point to 10 C50 10 Point B To make the maximum frequency equal to the reference frequency for an analog input being at 5 V set the gain to 100 C32 100 Since 5 V is the gain base point and it is equal to 50 of 10 V full scale se
67. monitor Golo Section 63 If an abnormal pattern appears on the LED monitor _ _ Go to Section 6 4 while no alarm code is displayed If any problems persist after the above recovery procedure contact your Fuji Electric representative CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 1 6 2 If No Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor 6 2 1 Motor is running abnormally 1 The motor does not rotate Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 No power supplied to the inverter Check the input voltage output voltage and interphase voltage unbalance gt Turn ON a molded case circuit breaker MCCB a residual current operated protective device RCD a ground fault circuit interrupter GFCI with overcurrent protection or a magnetic contactor MC gt Check for voltage drop phase loss poor connections or poor contacts and fix them if necessary 2 No forward reverse Check the input status of the forward reverse command with Menu operation command was inputted or both the commands were inputted simultaneously external signal operation 4 I O Checking using the keypad gt Input a run command gt Set either the forward or reverse operation command to off if both commands are being inputted gt Correct the assignment of commands FWD and REV to function codes E98 and E99 gt Connect the extern
68. n Item lt Control circuit command Oa 234 voe PLC goats Operation ON level H REV Run voltage reverse Or SINK OFF level _ Photocoupler command Mw Operation ON level 5 voltage SOURCE 1 SOURCE OFF level 1O LSJ Operation current at X1 to X5 T N FWD REV nput voltage is at 0 V CM Allowable leakage current at OFF Figure 2 15 Digital Input Circuit 2 18 Table 2 9 Symbols Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals Continued Functions Connects to PLC output signal power supply Rated voltage 24 VDC Maximum 50 mA DC Allowable range 22 to 27 VDC This terminal also supplies a power to the circuitry connected to the transistor output terminals Y1 and Y2 Refer to Analog output pulse output transistor output and relay output terminals in this Section for more Digital Two common terminals for digital input signals input These terminals are electrically isolated from the terminals 11 s and CMY common m Using a relay contact to turn X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 FWD or REV ON or OFF Figure 2 16 shows two examples of a circuit that uses a relay contact to turn control signal input X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 FWD or REV ON or OFF In circuit a the slide switch SW1 has been turned to SINK whereas in circuit b it has been turned to SOURCE Note To conf
69. net 3 5 When the LED monitor displays a PID command or its output amount the dot decimal point When the LED monitor displays a PID feedback amount the dot decimal point attached to the When the LED monitor displays a load factor the 7 segment letter in the lowest digit stands for When the LED monitor displays the motor output the unit LED indicator kW blinks 3 3 2 Setting up frequency and PID commands You can set up the desired frequency and PID commands by using A and QO keys on the keypad It is also possible to set up the frequency command as load shaft speed motor speed etc by setting function code E48 E Setting up a frequency command Using and V keys Factory default 1 Set function code F01 to 0 N V keys on keypad This can be done only when the inverter is in Running mode 2 Press the N V key to display the current reference frequency The lowest digit will blink 3 If you need to change the frequency command press the AIM key again The new setting will be automatically saved into the inverter s internal memory and retained even when the power is off When the power is turned ON next time the setting will be used as an initial reference frequency Gip If you have set function code F01 to 0 AIM keys on keypad but have selected a frequency command source other than frequency command 1 i e frequency command 2 frequency command via communication or multi frequency command then t
70. number of poles of the motor Enter the value given on the nameplate of the motor This setting is used to display the motor speed on the LED monitor refer to E43 The following expression is used for the conversion Ko 120 Motor speed r min Noof boes poles x Frequency Hz P02 Motor 1 Rated capacity P02 specifies the rated capacity of the motor Enter the rated value given on the nameplate of the motor When P99 0 3 or 4 0 01 to 30 00 HP When P99 1 P03 Motor 1 Rated current PO3 specifies the rated current of the motor Enter the rated value given on the nameplate of the motor P04 Motor 1 Auto tuning The inverter automatically detects the motor parameters and saves them in its internal memory Basically it is not necessary to perform tuning when using a Fuji standard motor with a standard connection with the inverter In any of the following cases perform auto tuning since the motor parameters are different from those of Fuji standard motors so as not to obtain the best performance under each of these controls auto torque boost torque calculation monitoring auto energy saving operation torque limiter automatic deceleration anti regenerative control auto search for idling motor speed slip compensation torque vector droop control or overload stop The motor to be driven is made by other manufacturer or is a non standard motor Cabling between the motor and the inverter is lon
71. of the motor Thermal time constant 0 5 to 75 0 0 Tt Trin Restart Mode after Momentary Power 0 Disable restar Trip mediately 5 28 Failure Disable restart Trip after a recovery from power failure Mode selection 4 Enable restart Restart at the frequency at which the power failure occurred for general loads 5 Enable restart Restart at the starting frequency for low inertia load Frequency Limiter High 0 0 to 400 0 oi z Yy Low 0 0 to 400 0 A cc A A Bias Frequency command 1 _ 100 00 to 100 00 7 onoj a v 5 32 DC Braking 1 5 33 Braking starting frequency Braking level 0 to 100 Braking time 0 00 Disable 0 01 to 30 00 Starting Frequency 1 0 1 to 60 0 E 5 34 Holding time oot 100 OOOO Stop Frequency 0 1 to 60 0 CORA The shaded function codes 777 are applicable to the quick setup i ynon you make settings from the keypad the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can isplay Eemi If the setting range is from 200 00 to 200 00 the incremental unit is for 200 to 100 0 1 for 99 9 to 10 0 and for 100 0 to 200 0 and 0 01 for 9 99 to 0 01 and for 0 00 to 99 99 4 Default settings for these function codes vary depending on the inverter capacity See Table 5 1 Factory Defaults According to Inverter Capacity on pages 5 15 and 5 16 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email i
72. on inverters with inverter s ROM version 0800 or later For the version checking procedure refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 10 A codes continued Name Data setting range en A05 Torque Boost 2 0 0 to 20 0 percentage with respect to A03 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 2 Note This setting takes effect when A13 0 1 3 or 4 Code Thang Unit when runnir Data Default copying setting 4 A06 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection 1 For a general purpose motor with shaft driven cooling fan for Motor 2 2 For an inverter driven motor non ventilated motor or motor with Select motor characteristics separately powered cooling fan A07 Overload detection level 0 00 Disable T 1 to 135 of the rated current allowable continuous drive current of the do motor A08 Thermal time constant Braking starting frequency A10 Braking level 0 to 100 Ii s a o0 ATT Braking time 7 00 Disable Se aig Bee A12 A13 Load Selection Variable torque oad Y Auto Torque Boost Constant torque load Auto Energy Saving Operation 2 Auto torque boost Auto energy saving operation Variable torque load during ACC DEC Auto energy saving operation Constant torque load during ACC DEC Auto energy saving operation Auto torque boost during ACC
73. once a year and keep them on for 30 to 60 minutes Do not connect the inverter to a motor or run the motor CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 1 3 Chapter 2 MOUNTING AND WIRING OF THE INVERTER 2 1 Operating Environment Install the inverter in an environment that satisfies the requirements listed in Table 2 1 Table 2 1 Environmental Requirements Table 2 2 Output Current Derating Factor in Relation to Altitude Item Specifications E I T S Output current Site location Indoors Altitude derino factor Ambient 10 C 14 F to 50 C 122 F Note 1 3300ft 1000m or 1 00 lower temperature 3300ft 1200 to 0 97 Relative 5 to 95 No condensation 4900ft 1500m humidity 4900ft 1500 to 0 95 6600ft IEN x Atmosphere The inverter must not be exposed to dust 6600ft 2000 to direct sunlight corrosive gases flammable 8200ft PENN 0 91 gas oil mist vapor or water drops Note 2 8200ft 2500 to The atmosphere can contain only a low level 9800ft 300m 0 88 of salt Note 1 When inverters are mounted 0 01 mg cm or less per year side by side without any gap between them less than 7 5HP the ambient temperature should be within the range from 10 C 14 F to 40 C 104 F The inverter must not be subjected to sudden changes in temperature that will cause condensation to form Note 2 Do not install t
74. power supply with the capacity of 500 kVA or 10 times the inverter capacity if the inverter capacity exceeds 50 kVA and X is 5 8 Obtained when a DC reactor DCR is used 9 Average braking torque obtained when reducing the speed from 60 Hz with AVR control OFF It varies with the efficiency of the motor 10 Average braking torque obtained by use of an external braking resistor standard type available as option CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 8 1 8 1 2 Three phase 460 V class series Feo Ww u Three pram 380 t 59 V S060 He Votage 10 iw 19 Vatas uroaimor 2 oF tena Frequency 0 9 ten LASOT C72 2 No 14 ENSOITE 1997 20 UL open type Napa ooog Fen rocteg yarn zana 300 SNA Sean Faan Pee an erp Standard 4 pole motor 2 Rated capacity is calculated assuming the output rated voltage as 460 V 3 Output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage 4 Use the inverter at the current enclosed with parentheses or below when the carrier frequency is set to 4 kHz or above F26 and the inverter continuously runs at 100 load 5 In the case of inverters with a capacity of 20 HP at an ambient temperature of 45 C 104 F or above this overload capability is assured provided that the inverter has run continuously with 85 of the rated current 6 Max volt
75. readjust the data so that the motor does not stall even if you set the data toa lower value gt Readjust the data of the function codes F09 and A05 7 The V f pattern did not match the motor Check if the base frequency F04 and A02 and rated voltage at base frequency F05 and A03 match the values on the nameplate on the motor gt Match the function code data to the values on the nameplate of the motor 8 Wrong settings Although no PTC thermistor is used the thermistor H26 is active gt Set H26 Thermistor Mode selection to 0 Disable 9 ab Braking resistor overheated Problem Possible Causes 1 Braking load is too heavy The electronic thermal protection for the braking resistor has been activated What to Check and Suggested Measures Reconsider the relationship between the braking load estimated and the real load gt Lower the real braking load gt Review the performance of the current braking resistor and raise it Modification of related function code data F50 and F51 is also required 2 Deceleration time currently specified is too short Re estimate the deceleration torque and time needed for the current load with a moment of inertia and a deceleration time gt Lengthen the deceleration time F08 E11 or H56 gt Review the performance of the braking resistor and raise it Modification of related function code data F50 and F51 is also required
76. signal Reset key ey states maintenance information and RUN LED alarm information Function Data key ia UP key DOWN key Table 3 1 Overview of Keypad Functions LED Monitor Keys and LED Functions Indicators Four digit 7 segment LED monitor which displays the followings according to the operation modes LED m In Running mode Running status information e g output Monitor I frequency current and voltage m In Programming mode Menus function codes and their data m In Alarm mode Alarm code which identifies the alarm factor if the protective function is activated Program Reset key which switches the operation modes of the inverter m In Running mode Pressing this key switches the inverter to Programming mode m In Programming mode Pressing this key switches the inverter to Running mode m In Alarm mode Pressing this key after removing the alarm factor will switch the inverter to Running mode Function Data key which switches the operation you want to do in each mode as follows E In Running mode Pressing this key switches the information to be displayed concerning the status of the inverter output frequency Hz output current A output voltage V etc E In Programming mode Pressing this key displays the function code and sets the data entered with and V keys E In Alarm mode Pressing this key displays the details of the problem indicated by the alarm code that has come up on the
77. storage 1 Do not leave the inverter directly on the floor 2 If the environment does not satisfy the specified requirements wrap the inverter in an airtight vinyl sheet or the like for storage 3 If the inverter is to be stored in an environment with a high level of humidity put a drying agent such as silica gel in the airtight package described in item 2 1 4 2 Long term storage The long term storage methods for the inverter vary largely according to the environment of the storage site General storage methods are described below 1 The storage site must satisfy the requirements specified for temporary storage However for storage exceeding three months the ambient temperature should be within the range from 10 C 14 F to 30 C 86 F This is to prevent the electrolytic capacitors in the inverter from deteriorating 2 The inverter must be stored in a package that is airtight to protect it from moisture Include a drying agent inside the package to maintain the relative humidity inside the package within 70 3 If the inverter has been installed in the equipment or control panel at a construction site where it may be subjected to humidity dust or dirt then remove the inverter and store it in a suitable environment specified in Table 1 1 Precautions for storage over 1 year If the inverter will not be powered on for a long time the property of the electrolytic capacitors may deteriorate Power the inverters on
78. taps shown below Figure 2 27 Tightening torque 6 2 Ib in 0 7 N m Panel wall Keypad fixing screws Figure 2 27 Mounting a Keypad on the Panel Wall Connect an extension cable CB 5S CB 3S or CB 1S or off the shelf straight LAN cable to RJ 45 connectors Modular jacks on the keypad and inverter standard RS 485 port Refer to Figure 2 28 Penel wall RJ 45 connector Modular jack J SS RJ 45 connector AA To RJ 45 connector on inverter Remote operation extension cable CB 5S CB 3S CB 1S or LAN cable Figure 2 28 Connecting a Keypad and an Inverter s Standard RS 485 port m Installing a keypad at a remote site e g for operation on hand Follow the step in Mounting a keypad on the panel wall CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 27 2 5 Cautions Relating to Harmonic Component Noise and Leakage Current 1 Harmonic component Input current to an inverter includes a harmonic component which may affect other loads and power factor correcting capacitors that are connected to the same power supply as the inverter If the harmonic component causes any problems connect a DC reactor option to the inverter It may also be necessary to connect an AC reactor to the power factor correcting capacitors 2 Noise If noise generated from the inverter affects other devices or that generated from periph
79. the JOG terminal command and a run command e g FWD the input of the JOG should not be delayed 100 ms or more from that of the run command If the delay exceeds 100 ms the inverter does not jog the motor but runs it ordinarily until the next input of the JOG E Select frequency command 2 1 Hz2 Hz1 Function code data 11 Turning this terminal command ON and OFF switches the frequency command source between frequency command 1 F01 and frequency command 2 C30 If no Hz2 Hz71 terminal command is assigned the frequency sourced by F01 takes effect by default Input terminal command Frequency command source Hz2 Hz1 TUSE OFF Follow F01 Frequency command 1 ON Follow C30 Frequency command 2 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 44 Select motor 2 motor 1 M2 M1 Function code data 12 Turning this terminal command ON switches from motor 1 to motor 2 Switching is possible only when the inverter is stopped Upon completion of switching the digital terminal output Switched to motor 2 SWM2 assigned to any of terminals Y1 Y2 and 30A B C turns ON If no M2 M1 terminal command is assigned motor 1 is selected by default Input terminal command Selected motor SWM2 status M2 M1 after completion of switching Motor 1 Motor 2 Switching between motors 1 and 2 automatically switches applicable function codes as list
80. the equipment are left Check if the voltages of the main and Measure the voltages The standard control circuit are correct using a multimeter or specification must be the like satisfied CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 1 Check part Table 7 1 List of Periodic Inspections Continued Check item 1 Check if the display is clear 2 Check if there is missing parts in the characters How to inspect 1 2 Visual inspection Evaluation criteria 1 2 The display can be read and there is no fault Structure such as frame and cover 1 Abnormal noise and excessive vibration 2 Loosen bolts tightened parts 3 Deformation and breakage 4 Discoloration and deformation caused by overheat 5 Check for foulness and dust 1 Visual or hearing inspection 2 Retighten 3 4 5 Visual inspection 1 2 3 4 5 No abnormalities Common 1 Check if bolts and screws are tight and not missing 2 Check the devices and insulators for deformation cracks breakage and discoloration caused by overheat and deterioration 3 Check for foulness and dust 1 Retighten 2 3 Visual inspection 1 2 3 No abnormalities Conductor and wire 1 Check the conductor for discoloration and distortion caused by overheat 2 Check the sheath of the cable for cracks and discol
81. the printed circuit boards Move to Menu 5 Maintenance Information in Programming mode and check the accumulated run time of the electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit boards This value is calculated from the cumulative total number of hours a voltage has been applied on the electrolytic capacitor The value is displayed on the LED monitor in units of 1000 hours CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 5 Cooling fan Select Menu 5 Maintenance Information and check the accumulated run time of the cooling fan The inverter accumulates hours for which the cooling fan has run The display is in units of 1000 hours The accumulated time should be used just a guide since the actual service life will be significantly affected by the temperature and operation environment 2 Early warning of lifetime alarm For the components listed in Table 7 3 you can get an early warning of lifetime alarm at one of the transistor output terminals Y1 and Y2 and the relay contact terminals 30A B C as soon as any of the conditions listed under the Judgment level column has been exceeded When the replacement data of any parts exceeds the judgment level this signal comes ON Table 7 3 Criteria for Issuing a Lifetime Alarm Parts to be replaced Judgment level DC link bus capacitor 85 or lower of the capacitance than that of the factory setting Electr
82. this manual is organized Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INVERTER 1 1 1 Acceptance Inspection A 1 2 External View and Terminal Blocks 1 3 Transportation 1 4 Storage Environment 1 4 1 Temporary storage 1 4 2 Long term storage eee 1 Chapter 2 MOUNTING AND WIRING OF THE INVERTER see sccStee tier te carte viet 2 2 1 Operating Environment 2 2 Installing the Inverter 2 3 Wiring 2 3 1 Removing and mounting the terminal cover and the main circuit terminal DIOCK COVEN idtscdivtivsceteeesstestteestdentensh 2 4 2 3 2 Terminal arrangement diagram and screw specifications 2 3 3 Recommended wire sizes 2 3 4 Wiring precautions 2 3 5 Wiring for main circuit terminals and grounding terminals eeee 2 3 6 Wiring for control circuit terminals 2 3 7 Setting up the slide switches 2 4 Mounting and Connecting a Keypad 2 4 1 Mounting style and parts needed for connection 2 4 2 Mounting installing steps 2 5 Cautions Relating to Harmonic Component Noise and Leakage Current 0 2 28 Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD 3 1 3 1 LED Monitor Keys and LED Indicators on the Keypad 3 2 Overview of Operation 3 3 Running Mode 3 3 1 Monitoring the running status 3 3 2 Setting up frequency and PID commands 3 3 3 Running stopping the motor 3 4 Programming Mode 3 11 3 4 1 Setting up basic function codes quickly Menu 0 Quick Setup
83. to m Displaying control I O signal terminals and Displaying control I O signal terminals under communications control on the following pages for details I O signals on the control circuit terminals under communications control 4 le Input voltage on terminal 12 Shows the input voltage on terminal 12 in volts V 4 id Input current on terminal C1 Shows the input current on terminal C1 in milliamperes mA EI Output voltage to analog meters Shows the output voltage on terminal FM in volts V FM Pulse rate of FM Shows the output pulse rate on terminal FM in pulses per second p s Input voltage on terminal C1 Shows the input voltage on terminal C1 V2 function assigned in volts V Option control circuit terminal Shows the ON OFF state of the digital I O terminals on 1 0 the digital I O interface option Refer to m Displaying control I O signal terminals on digital I O interface option on page 3 22 for details PG pulse rate 1 Shows the PG pulse rate inputted when the PG A B phase interface is installed Displayed value Pulse rate p s 1000 PG pulse rate 1 Z phase Shows the pulse rate p s in Z phase when the PG interface is installed PG pulse rate 2 Shows the second PG pulse rate inputted when two A B phase PG interfaces are installed Displayed value Pulse rate p s 1000 PG pulse rate 2 Z phase Shows
84. to display the desired function code L in this example then press the G5 key The data of this function code appears In this example data of 7 appears 3 14 5 Change the function code data using the A and V keys In this example press the A key two times to change data 7 to Z Press the 5 key to establish the function code data The SALE appears and the data will be saved in the memory inside the inverter The display will Cr return to the function code list then move to the next function code In this example A dic Pressing the S amp S key instead of the 8 key cancels the change made to the data The data reverts to the previous value the display returns to the function code list and the original function code reappears J key to return to the menu from the function code list 6 Rs Tip Cursor movement You can move the cursor when changing function code data by holding down the E key for 1 second or longer in the same way as with the frequency settings This action is called Cursor movement Power ON P Y a PNY Running mode Function code data rogramming _mode _ gt nm 4 u ena EO V 2 times 1 E fad C J Save data and go to the next function code Figure 3 3 Example of Function Code Data Changing Procedure 3 4 2 Setting up function codes Menu 1 Data Setting Menu 1 Data
85. voltage P N Item Voltage Current Current Waveform Ammeter Voltmeter Wattmeter Ammeter Voltmeter Wattmeter DC voltmeter AR As AT VR Vs VT WR WT Au Av Aw Vu Vv Vw Wu Ww V Name of meter Rectifier or Digital J 5 Moving iron i Digital AC Digital AC Digital AC Moving coil 22e type moving iron AC power power meter power meter power meter type ee YP type meter 5 i 2 oO E E o n 7 Note It is not recommended that meters other than a digital AC power meter be used for measuring the output voltage or output current since they may cause larger measurement errors or in the worst case they may be damaged Figure 7 1 Connection of Meters CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 7 7 5 Insulation Test Because an insulation test is made in the factory before shipment avoid a Megger test If a Megger test is unavoidable follow the procedure below Because a wrong test procedure will cause breakage of the inverter take sufficient care A dielectric strength test will cause breakage of the inverter similarly to the Megger test if the test procedure is wrong When the dielectric strength test is necessary contact your Fuji Electric representative 1 Megger test of main circuit Use a 500 VDC Megger and shut off the main power supply without fail during
86. 0 FRN002E1 W 4U 73 14 z DB2 2 4C 160 55 0 110 Three FRNOO3E1 4U 50 phase FRNOOSE1m 4U DB3 7 4C 130 140 75 0 185 460V TERNOO7E1m 4U DB5 5 4C 80 55 20 0 275 i FRNO10E1m 4U DB7 5 4C 60 38 0 375 FRNO15E1m 4U DB11 4C 40 55 10 0 55 FRNO20E1m 4U DB15 4C 34 4 75 0 75 FRNF12E1 7U 1000 100 i FRNF25E1W 7U 500 75 Single DB0 75 2C 100 50 0 075 phase FRNF50E1W 7U 250 37 230V FRNOO1E1m 7U 133 20 FRN002E1 W 7U 73 14 DB2 2 2C 40 55 0 110 FRN003E1W 7U 50 10 Note 1 A box W in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure E01 to E05 Terminal X1 to X5 Function E98 E99 Terminal FWD and REV Function Function codes E01 to E05 E98 and E99 allow you to assign commands to terminals X1 to X5 FWD and REV which are general purpose programmable digital input terminals These function codes may also switch the logic system between normal and negative to define how the inverter logic interprets either ON or OFF status of each terminal The default setting is normal logic system Active ON So explanations that follow are given in normal ogic system Active ON ACAU T i O N In the case of digital input you can assign commands to the switching means for the run command and its operation and the reference frequency e g S81 SS2 SS4 SS8 Hz2 Hz1 Hz PID IVS and LE Be aware that switching any of such signals may cause a sudden start running or an abrupt ch
87. 0 20 13 79 11 75 2 50 0 12 to 0 24 0 12 0 34 0 27 12 96 12 67 2 50 0 25 to 0 49 0 25 0 70 0 56 11 02 13 84 2 50 0 50 to 0 99 0 50 1 00 0 61 6 15 8 80 2 50 1 00 to 1 99 1 00 1 50 0 77 3 96 8 86 2 50 2 00 to 2 99 2 00 2 90 1 40 4 29 7 74 2 50 3 00 to 4 99 3 00 4 00 1 79 3 15 20 81 1 17 5 00 to 7 49 5 00 6 30 2 39 3 34 23 57 1 50 7 50 to 9 99 7 50 9 30 3 12 2 65 28 91 1 17 10 00 to 14 99 10 00 12 70 4 37 2 43 30 78 1 17 15 00 to 19 99 15 00 18 70 6 36 2 07 29 13 1 00 20 00 to 24 99 20 00 24 60 4 60 2 09 29 53 1 00 25 00 to 29 99 25 00 30 00 8 33 1 75 31 49 1 00 30 00 30 00 36 20 9 88 1 90 32 55 1 00 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 59 H04 HO5 Auto reset Times and Reset interval H04 and H05 specify the auto reset function that makes the inverter automatically attempt to reset the tripped state and restart without issuing an alarm for any faults even if any protective function subject to reset is activated and the inverter enters the forced to stop state tripped state If the protective function works in excess of the times specified by H04 the inverter will issue an alarm for any faults and not attempt to auto reset the tripped state Listed below are the recoverable alarm statuses to be retried Alarm status LED monitor displays Alarm status LED monitor displays Overcurren
88. 0 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 53 E61 Terminal 12 Extended Function E62 Terminal C1 Extended Function C1 function E63 Terminal C1 Extended Function V2 function E61 E62 and E63 define the property of terminals 12 C1 C1 function and C1 V2 function respectively There is no need to set up these terminals if they are to be used for frequency command sources Data for E61 E62 or E63 0 None Function Description This is an auxiliary analog frequency input to be added Auxiliary frequency to frequency command 1 F01 It is never added to command 1 frequency command 2 multi frequency command or other frequency commands This is an auxiliary analog frequency input to be added Auxiliary frequency to all frequency commands including frequency command 2 command 1 frequency command 2 and multi frequency commands This input includes temperature pressure or other PID command 1 commands to apply under the PID control Function code J02 should be also configured This input includes the feedback of the temperature or PID feedback amount pressure under the PID control If these terminals have been set up to have the same data the operation priority is given in the following order E61 gt E62 gt E63 Selecting the UP DOWN control F01 C30 7 ignores auxiliary frequency command 1 and 2 C Note
89. 0 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 23 6 4 If an Abnormal Pattern Appears on the LED Monitor while No Alarm Code is Displayed 1 center bar appears Problem A center bar has appeared on the LED monitor Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 Any of PID commands Make sure that when you wish to view other monitor items E43 is and their feedback not set to 10 PID command or 12 PID feedback amount related functions is gt Set E43 to a value other than 10 or 12 disabled Make sure that when you wish to view a PID command or a PID feedback amount PID control is still in effect or J01 is not set to 0 gt Set J01 to 1 Enable Process control normal operation or 2 Enable Process control inverse operation 2 Connection to the keypad was in poor Prior to proceed check that pressing the sa key does not take effect for the LED display connection Check connectivity of the extension cable for the keypad used in remote operation gt Replace the cable 2 __ __ under bar appears Problem An under bar ____ appeared on the LED monitor when you pressed the T key or entered a run forward command FWD or a run reverse command REV The motor did not start Possible Causes 1 The voltage of the DC link bus was low What to Check and Suggested Measures Select 5_ under Menu 5 Maintenance Inf
90. 005E1W 2U Three FRN007E1S 2U M5 33 6 3 8 33 6 Figure C phase 7 5 a Input M4 M5 3 8 230 V RN007E1E 2U Output M5 15 9 1 8 3 8 Figure F FRN010E1S 2U M5 33 6 3 8 we Figure C 10 Input M4 M5 p FRNO10E1E 2U Output M5 15 9 1 8 3 8 Figure F i5 FRNO15E1S 2U 51 3 5 8 ie 51 3 Figure C FRN015E1E 2U re 71 7 8 1 5 8 Figure F 56 FRNO20E1S 2U 51 3 5 8 wi 51 3 Figure C FRNO20E1E 2U 71 7 8 1 5 8 Figure F 1 2 FRNF50E1W 4U 1 FRN001E10 4U 15 9 15 9 2 FRN002E1W 4U M4 1 8 M4 1 8 Figure B 3 FRN003E1W 4U i i 5 FRN005E1W 4U FRN007E1S 4U M5 33 6 3 8 33 6 Figure C T5 eRNOO7E1E 4U__ Input Ma 15 9 1 8 ia 38 Figure F Three Output M5 9 1 8 igure hase F X Fis 4160 RNO10E1S 4U M5 33 6 3 8 33 6 igure C 10 ERNO10E1E 4U Input M4 15 9 1 8 Me 3 8 Figure F Output M5 9 1 8 igure FRNO15E1S 4U M6 51 3 5 8 513 Figure C 1S i Input M4 M6 MENSEN FRN015E1E 4U Output M6 15 9 1 8 5 8 Figure F FRN020E1S 4U M6 51 3 5 8 Ha Figure C 207 ii Input M4 M6 i BEA FRN020E1E 4U Output M6 15 9 1 8 5 8 Figure F 1 8 FRNF12E1 7U 1 4 FRNF25E1 7U 10 6 10 6 i a M3 5 M3 5 Fi D ie 1 2 FRNFSOE1m 7U 1 2 1 2 hai 230 V 1 FRN001E1W 7U 2 FRN002E1W 7U 15 9 15 9 i M4 M4 Figure E 3 FRNOO3E1Ml 7U 1 8 1 8 ae Note 1 A box W in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 7 F
91. 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net xl Synchronous It is necessary to take special measures suitable for this motors motor type Consult your Fuji Electric representative for details In running special Single phase motors are not suitable for inverter driven motors Single phase variable speed operation Use three phase motors motors Even if a single phase power supply is available use a three phase motor as the inverter provides three phase output Use the inverter within the ambient temperature range from 10 C 14 F to 50 C 122 F Environ The heat sink and braking resistor of the inverter may mental Installation become hot under certain operating conditions so install the conditions location inverter on nonflammable material such as metal Ensure that the installation location meets the environmental conditions specified in Chapter 2 Section 2 1 Operating Environment Install a recommended molded case circuit breaker MCCB Installing an or residual current operated protective device RCD a MCCB or ground fault circuit interrupter GFCI with overcurrent RCD GFCI protection in the primary circuit of the inverter to protect the wiring Ensure that the circuit breaker rated current is equivalent to or lower than the recommended rated current If a magnetic contactor MC is mounted in the inverter s output secondary circuit for switching the motor to commercial power or f
92. 4 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Check whether appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires and communications cable gt Reinforce noise control measures card Refer to the instruction manual of the option card for details 6 19 17 amp amp Operation protection Problem You incorrectly operated the inverter Possible Causes 1 The F key was pressed when H96 1 or 3 What to Check and Suggested Measures Although a Run command had been inputted from the input terminal or through the communications port the inverter was forced to decelerate to stop gt If this was not intended check the setting of H96 2 The start check function was activated when H96 2or3 With a Run command being inputted any of the following operations has been performed Turning the power ON Releasing the alarm Switching the enable communications link LE operation gt Review the running sequence to avoid input of a Run command when this error occurs If this was not intended check the setting of H96 Turn the run command OFF before resetting the alarm 3 The forced stop digital input STOP was turned ON 18 Tuning error Problem Auto tuning failed Possible Causes 1 A phase was missing There was a phase loss in the connection between the inverter
93. 52 Mode Menus selectable Function code data editing mode factory default Vide n Dae Sone Function code data check mode Menu 2 Data Checking Full menu mode Menus 0 through 6 Tip Pressing the AO key will cycle through the menu With the S key you can select the Tip desired menu item Once the entire menu has been cycled through the display will return to the first menu item 3 12 3 4 1 Setting up basic function codes quickly Menu 0 Quick Setup Menu 0 Quick Setup in Programming mode allows you to quickly display and set up a basic set of function codes specified in Chapter 5 Section 5 1 Function Code Tables To use Menu 0 Quick Setup you need to set function code E52 to 0 Function code data editing mode or 2 Full menu mode The predefined set of function codes that are subject to quick setup are held in the inverter Listed below are the function codes including those not subject to quick setup available on the FRENIC Multi Function code group F codes Table 3 11 Function Codes Available on FRENIC Multi Function codes FOO to F51 Function Fundamental functions Description Functions concerning basic motor running E codes E01 to E99 Extension terminal functions Functions concerning the assignment of control circuit terminals Functions concerning the display of the LED monitor C codes C01 to C53 Control functions
94. 60 V class series Built in Category C2 Category C3 Single phase External Category C3 230 V class series Built in Category C2 CAUTION When you use FRENIC Multi inverters categorized as Category C2 of the EN61800 3 in a domestic environment you may need to take appropriate countermeasures to reduce or eliminate any noise emitted from these inverters FRENIC Multi inverters categorized as Category C3 of the EN61800 3 are not designed for use in a domestic environment These inverters may interfere with the operations of home appliances or office equipment due to noise emitted from them CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 10 1 10 3 Compliance with EMC Standards 10 3 1 General The CE marking on inverters does not ensure that the entire equipment including our CE marked products is compliant with the EMC Directive Therefore CE marking for the equipment shall be the responsibility of the equipment manufacturer For this reason Fuji s CE mark is indicated under the condition that the product shall be used within equipment meeting all requirements for the relevant Directives Instrumentation of such equipment shall be the responsibility of the equipment manufacturer Generally machinery or equipment includes not only our products but other devices as well Manufacturers therefore shall design the whole system to be complian
95. 7 data requires simultaneous keying of 9 key N key For details refer to the description of H97 H69 Automatic Deceleration Anti regenerative control Mode selection H76 Torque Limiter Frequency increment limit for braking H69 enables or disables the anti regenerative control In the inverter not equipped with a PWM converter or braking unit if the regenerative energy returned exceeds the inverter s braking capability an overvoltage trip occurs To avoid such an overvoltage trip enable the automatic deceleration anti regenerative control with this function code and the inverter controls the output frequency to keep the braking torque around 0 Nm in both the acceleration deceleration and constant speed running phases Since increasing the output frequency too much in the anti regenerative control is dangerous the inverter has a torque limiter Frequency increment limit for braking that can be specified by H76 The torque limiter limits the inverter s output frequency to less than Reference frequency H76 setting Note that the torque limiter activated restrains the anti regenerative control resulting in a trip with an overvoltage alarm in some cases Increasing the H76 data 0 0 to 400 0 Hz makes the anti regenerative control capability high In addition during deceleration triggered by turning the run command OFF the anti regenerative control increases the output frequency so that the inverter may not stop the
96. 8 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 1 2 1 3 Transportation When carrying an inverter always support its bottom at the right and left sides with both hands Do not hold covers or individual parts only Avoid applying excessively strong force to the terminal block covers as they are made of plastic and are easily broken 1 4 Storage Environment 1 4 1 Temporary storage Store the inverter in an environment that satisfies the requirements listed in Table 1 1 Table 1 1 Environmental Requirements for Storage and Transportation Item Requirements Storage temperature 1 25 13 F to A location where the inverter is not subject to abrupt changes 70 C 158 F in temperature that would result in the formation of Relative humidity 5 to 95 2 condensation or ice Atmosphere The inverter must not be exposed to dust direct sunlight corrosive or flammable gases oil mist vapor water drops or vibration The atmosphere must contain only a low level of salt 0 01 mg cm or less per year Atmospheric pressure 86 to 106 kPa in storage 70 to 106 kPa during transportation 1 Assuming a comparatively short storage period e g during transportation or the like 2 Even if the humidity is within the specified requirements avoid such places where the inverter will be subjected to sudden changes in temperature that will cause condensation to form Precautions for temporary
97. A DOADA Meter D POA cer ery fet yup Swe FWD miN 4 REVI va Transistor tpat r 1oy a omi Dots nps pen 4 L l pa SOURCE d pol swi 1 peaj t 1 AS MOOH Moided case citu treser s touj RCO Resdusl csrert opermted Note 0 n5485 zort prosectve device ny Mme opor GPC Ground fault circuit interrupter l 1 Magrete comactor DOR DC reactor DOR Arming resistor Note 1 When connecting an optional DCR remove the jumper bar from the terminals P1 and P Note 2 Install a recommended MCCB or RCD GFCI with overcurrent protection in the primary circuit of the inverter to protect wiring At this time ensure that the circuit breaker capacity is equivalent to or lower than the recommended capacity Note 3 Install an MC for each inverter to separate the inverter from the power supply apart from the MCCB or RCD GFCI when necessary Connect a surge killer in parallel when installing a coil such as the MC or solenoid near the inverter Note 4 THR function can be used by assigning code 9 external alarm to any of the terminals X1 to X5 FWD and REV function code E01 to E05 E98 or E99 Note 5 Frequency can be set by connecting a frequency setting device external potentiometer between the terminals 11 12 and 13 instead of inputting a voltage signal 0 to 10 VDC 0 to 5 VDC or 1 to 5 VDC between the terminals 12 and 11 Note 6 For the control signal wires use shielded or twisted pai
98. DEC A14 Control Mode Selection 2 Vif control with slip compensation inactive Y Dynamic torque vector control Vif control with slip compensation active Vif control with optional PG interface Dynamic torque vector control with optional PG interface A15 No of poles Yt 2 A16 Rated capacity 0 01 to 30 00 where P99 data is 0 3 or 4 N Yt 4 0 01 to 30 00 where P99 data is 1 Y2 ma A17 Rated current 0 00 to 100 0 AlN Y1 Rated value Y2 of Fuji standard motor A18 Auto tuning 0 Disable f N N 1 Enable Tune R1 and X while the motor is stopped 2 Enable Tune R1 X and rated slip while the motor is stopped and no load current while running A19 Online tuning 0 Disable Se Tt A20 No load current 0 00 to 50 00 AlN Y1 Rated value Y2 of Fuji standard motor A2T 0 00 to 50 00 Y1 Rated value Y2 of Fuji standard motor A22 0 00 to 50 00 Y1 Rated value of Fuji standard motor A23 Slip compensation gain for driving 0 0 to 200 0 1 P Y 100 0 A24 Slip compensation response time 0 01 to 10 00 Y 50 A25 Slip compensation gain for braking yfyf moo A26 Rated slip frequency 0 00 to 15 00 N Y1 Rated value Y2 of Fuji standard motor A39 Motor 2 Selection Motor characteristics 0 Fuji standard motors 8 series f N Yt Motor characteristics 1 HP rating motors Y2 Motor characteristics 3 Fuji standard motors 6 series Other motors A40 Slip Compensation 2 Enable during ACC DEC and en
99. E 7U Control circuit x Main terminal Control circuit a Circuit breaker A E Precautions for use In running general purpose motors Driving a 460 V general purpose motor When driving a 460V general purpose motor with an inverter using extremely long wires damage to the insulation of the motor may occur Use an output circuit filter OFL if necessary after checking with the motor manufacturer Fuji motors do not require the use of output circuit filters because of their reinforced insulation Torque characteristics and temperature rise When the inverter is used to run a general purpose motor the temperature of the motor becomes higher than when it is operated using a commercial power supply In the low speed range the cooling effect will be weakened so decrease the output torque of the motor Vibration When an inverter driven motor is mounted to a machine resonance may be caused by the natural frequencies of the machine system Note that operation of a 2 pole motor at 60 Hz or higher may cause abnormal vibration The use of a rubber coupling or vibration proof rubber is recommended Use the inverter s jump frequency control feature to skip the resonance frequency zone s Noise When an inverter is used with a general purpose motor the motor noise level is higher than that with a commercial power supply To reduce noise raise
100. FO Instruction Manual High Performance Compact Inverter FRENIC Multi ACAUTION Thank you for purchasing our FRENIC Multi series of inverters e This product is designed to drive a three phase induction motor Read through this instruction manual and be familiar with the handling procedure for correct use Improper handling might result in incorrect operation a short life or even a failure of this product as well as the motor Deliver this manual to the end user of this product Keep this manual in a safe place until this product is discarded For how to use an optional device refer to the instruction and installation manuals for that optional device Ee es oe E CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Fuji Electric FA Components amp Systems Co Ltd INR S147 1204 E Fuji Electric Corp of America Copyright 2006 2007 Fuji Electric FA Components amp Systems Co Ltd All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced or copied without prior written permission from Fuji Electric FA Components amp Systems Co Ltd All products and company names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders The information contained herein is subject to change without prior notice for improvement CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email
101. Functions associated with frequency settings P codes P01 to P99 Motor 1 parameters Functions for setting up characteristics parameters such as capacity of the motor H codes H03 to H98 High performance functions Highly added value functions Functions for sophisticated control A codes A01 to A46 Motor 2 parameters Functions for setting up characteristics parameters such as capacity of the motor J codes J01 to J92 Application functions Functions for applications such as PID control y codes y01 to y99 Link functions Functions for controlling communication o codes 001 to 059 Optional functions Functions for options Note Note The o codes are displayed only when the corresponding option is mounted For details of the o codes refer to the Instruction Manual for the corresponding option 2 For the list of function codes subject to quick setup and their descriptions refer to Chapter 5 Section 5 1 Function Code Tables CT Through a multi function keypad you can add or delete function codes that are subject to _ Tip Quick Setup For details refer to the Multi function Keypad Instruction Manual Once you have added or deleted function codes for Quick Setup through a multi function keypad they will remain valid even after you switch to a standard keypad To restore the function code settings subject to Quick Setup to their fa
102. IO feedback value E g _ 3 09 5 f S Alarm mode F Display of alarm status K Press these keys if an alarm has occured The speed monitor allows you to select the desired one from the seven speed monitor items by using function code E48 Applicable only when PID control is active J01 1 2 or 3 The Timer screen appears only when the timer operation is enabled with function code C21 Applicable only when the full menu mode is selected E52 2 Pressing eS key can reset an alarm only when the latest alarm is displayed on the LED monitor Figure 3 1 Transition between Basic Screens in Individual Operation Mode 3 3 3 3 Running Mode When the inverter is turned ON it automatically enters Running mode in which you can 1 Monitor the running status e g output frequency and output current 2 3 Run stop the motor and 4 Jog inch the motor 3 3 1 Monitoring the running In Running mode the eleven items listed below can be monitored Immediately after turned ON the monitor item specified by function code E43 is displayed Press the amp 3 between monitor items For details of switching the monitor item by using the G5 status Configure the reference frequency and other settings Monitor of running status in Running mode in Figure 3 1 Display sample on the LED monitor 1 Monitor items Table 3 3 Monitoring Items LED indicator m ON O OFF Unit Meaning o
103. LED monitor RUN key Press this key to run the motor STOP key Press this key to stop the motor G UP and DOWN keys Press these keys to select the setting items and N and Q change the function code data displayed on the LED monitor 3 1 Table 3 1 Overview of Keypad Functions Continued LED Monitor Keys and LED Functions Indicators RUN LED Lights when any run command to the inverter is active Lights when the inverter is ready to run with a run command entered by KEYPAD he FuN key F02 0 2 3 In P i d Al d CONTROLLED the amp key 12 0 2 or 3 n Programming and Alarm modes you cannot run the inverter even if the indicator lights These three LED indicators identify the unit of numeral displayed on the LED LED monitor in Running mode by combination of lit and unlit states of them Unit kW A Hz r min and m min Unit LEDs Refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 3 1 Monitoring the running status for 3 LEDs Indicators While the inverter is in Programming mode the LEDs of Hz and kW light Simultaneous keying Simultaneous keying means pressing two keys at the same time The FRENIC Multi supports simultaneous keying as listed below The simultaneous keying operation is expressed by a letter between the keys throughout this manual For example the expression iS A keys stands for pressing the A key while holding down the E key Table 3 2 Simultaneous Keying O
104. O15E1S 2U FRNO20E1S 2U FRNO15E1S 4U FRNO20E1S 4U Three phase 230 V Three phase 460 V CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 8 10 8 5 2 Models Available on Order EMC filter built in type Unit inch mm EME rane Wie Gomes olia ite treerter on tteegara More sanap inie Poser wos AALL LI Taree Bhate nov om om es lt RoR AH HPE j RM nie E Aea comet sita iie La inverter an stenaeral xe Maia namediste A Chest tor eniereee soter cenie x 3 Ciest for snteloes contre conie 2 inverter rte winensl ens a FRNFSOEIE 4U FRNOOTEIE 4U FRNOOTETE 7U CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 8 11 Unit inch mm spyse Tae aI ln 80812 oem EA ee A AB fk PE te Wion comet olin tne leverter es ttesearel Main nemeteare Cient tec eietses estar cotie P Creed ter ehieiged central cotie aan CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 8 12 Unit inch mm Malm nemeDiote Poser eather soitot Thares gt tete 480V CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 8 13 8 5 3 Stan
105. ON Torque limiter 2 E16 and E17 m UP Increase output frequency and DOWN Decrease output frequency commands UP and DOWN Function code data 17 18 Frequency setting When the UP DOWN control is selected for frequency setting with a run command ON turning the UP or DOWN terminal command ON causes the output frequency to increase or decrease respectively within the range from 0 Hz to the maximum frequency as listed below UP DOWN Data 17 Data 18 Function Keep the current output frequency Increase the output frequency with the acceleration time currently specified Decrease the output frequency with the deceleration time currently specified Keep the current output frequency 5 46 The UP DOWN control is available in two modes one mode H61 0 in which the initial value of the reference frequency is fixed to 0 00 at the start of the UP DOWN control and the other mode H61 1 in which the reference frequency applied in the previous UP DOWN control applies as the initial value When H61 0 the reference frequency applied by the previous UP DOWN control has been cleared to 0 so at the next restart including powering on use the UP terminal command to accelerate the speed as needed When H61 1 the inverter internally holds the current output frequency set by the UP DOWN control and applies the held frequency at the next restart including powering on or At the time of
106. Replace the RS 485 communications card option 20 amp F Data saving error during undervoltage Problem The inverter failed to save data such as the frequency commands PID commands timer value for the timer operation which are specified through the keypad or the output frequencies modified by the UP DOWN terminal commands when the power was switched OFF Possible Causes 1 The voltage fed to the control PCB dropped suddenly while data was being saved when the power was turned OFF because the DC link bus was rapidly discharged What to Check and Suggested Measures Check how long it takes for the DC link bus voltage to drop to the preset voltage when power is turned OFF gt Remove whatever is causing the rapid discharge of the DC link bus electricity After pressing the S key and releasing the alarm return the data of the relevant function codes such as the frequency commands PID commands timer value for the timer driven operation specified through the keypad or the output frequencies modified by the UP DOWN terminal commands back to the original values and then restart the operation 2 Ahigh intensity noise affected the operation of the inverter while data was being saved when the power was turned OFF Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires gt Improve noise control After pressing t
107. S 4 FRNO02E1S 4 FRNOO3E1S 4 FRNOOSE1S 4 15TDHS84 FRNOO7E1S 4 FRNO10E1S 4 FN3011 30 61 FRNO15E1S 4 U U U U U U U U FRNF5S0E1S 4U U U U U U U U U FRNO20E1S 4 FN301150 62 Single phase 230 V FRNF12E1S 7U FRNF25E1S 7U FRNF50E1S 7U FRN001E1S 7U FRN002E1S 7U FRN003E1S 7U 30DKCS5 1 The values are calculated assuming the power supplies of three phase 240 V 50 Hz three phase 400 V 50 Hz and single phase 230 V 50 Hz 2 The worst condition includes a phase loss in the supply line CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 10 6 10 4 Harmonic Component Regulation in the EU 10 4 1 General comments When you use general purpose industrial inverters in the EU the harmonics emitted from the inverter to power lines are strictly regulated as stated below If an inverter whose rated input is 1kW or less is connected to public low voltage power supply it is regulated by the harmonics emission regulations from inverters to power lines with the exception of industrial low voltage power lines Refer to Figure 10 5 below for details Medium voltage Transformer User C from medium voltage to low wien Public low voltage Transformer from power supply medium voltage to low voltage Industrial low voltage Inverter power suppl
108. See Table 5 1 Factory Defaults According to Inverter Capacity on pages 5 15 and 5 16 5 These are available on inverters with inverter s ROM version 0700 or later For the version checking procedure refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information 6 These are available on inverters with inverter s ROM version 0800 or later For the version checking procedure refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 4 E codes continued Change Defaut Rarer Code Name Data setting range Unit when al pies to ail setting runnin page Ea E41 y E42 E unos DS te A A E43 mea Item selection E Speed monitor select by 48 Y Y 0 3 Output current 4 Output voltage 8 Calculated torque 9 Input power 10 PID command 12 PID feedback amount 13 Timer 14 PID output 15 Load factor 16 Motor output 21 Current position pulse count 5 22 Position deviation pulse count 5 E45 LCD Monitor 3 item selection 0 Running status rotational direction and operation guide 4 Bar charts for output frequency current and calculated torque E46 Language selection 0 Japanese 4 English 2 German 3 French 4 Spanish 5 Italian E47 Jo Low to 10 High a es E48 LED Monitor Speed monitor item 0 Output frequency Before slip compensation Output
109. TOP data 1009 and 1030 are for normall logic and 9 and 30 are for negative logic respectively E10 Acceleration Time 2 0 00 to 3600 5 22 Note Entering 0 00 cancels the acceleration time requiring external soft start and stop Deceleration Time 2 0 00 to 3600 Note Entering 0 00 cancels the acceleration time requiring external soft start and stop E16 Torque Limiter 2 5 36 Limiting level for driving E17 Limiting level for braking 5 These are available on inverters with inverter s ROM version 0700 or later For the version checking procedure refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 3 E codes continued E20 Terminal Y1 Function Selecting function code data assigns the corresponding function to terminals Y1 Y2 and 30A B C as listed below Terminal Y2 Function 0 1000 Inverter running E27_ Terminal 30A B C Function 1 1001 Frequency arrival signal 2 1002 Frequency detected 3 1003 Undervoltage detected Inverter stopped 1004 Torque polarity detected 1005 Inverter output limiting 1006 Auto restarting after momentary power failure 1007 Motor overload early warning 1010 Inverter ready to run 1021 Frequency arrival signal 2 1022 Inverter output limiting with delay 1026 Auto resetting 1027 Universal DO 1028 He
110. Table 3 18 Segment Display for I O Signal Status in Hexadecimal Format LED No Bit 8 Input terminal Output 30 terminal AIBIC Binary 0 0 Hexa decimal on the LED monitor LED3 LED2 LEDI No corresponding control circuit terminal exists XF XR and RST are assigned for communication Refer to mg Displaying control I O signal terminals under communications control below E Displaying control I O signal terminals under communications control Under communications control input commands function code S06 sent via RS 485 or other optional communications can be displayed in two ways with ON OFF of each LED segment and in hexadecimal format The content to be displayed is basically the same as that for the control I O signal terminal status display however XF XR and RST are added as inputs Note that under communications control the I O display is in normal logic using the original signals not inverted Refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual for details on input commands sent through RS 485 communications and the instruction manual of communication related options as well Displaying control I O signal terminals on digital I O interface option The LED monitor can also show the signal status of the terminals on the digital I O interface option just like the control circuit terminals Table 3 19 lists the assignment
111. U DB15 4 34 4 75 0 375 FRNF12E1 7U 90 0 037 37 FRNF25E1W 7U 9 Single Tc DBO 75 2 100 h g FRNF50E1W 7U 0 044 22 ase P30 U FRNOO1E1m 7U 17 45 0 068 18 FRN002E1W 7U DB2 2 2 40 34 0 075 10 FRN003E1 W 7U 33 30 0 077 7 Note 1 A box W in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure Compact models When using the compact models of braking resistor TK8OW120Q or TK80W100Q set F50 to 7 and F51 to 0 033 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 39 10 ED models Continuous braking Intermittent braking Power Braking resistor Resist 100 braking torque Period Less than 100 s esistance r z supply Inverter type Q Discharging Braking Allowable put voltage Type Qty capacity time average loss HED kWs s kW FRNF12E1W 2U 1000 100 FRNF25E1W 2U 500 75 DB0 75 2C 100 50 0 075 FRNF50E1W 2U 250 37 FRN001E1W 2U 133 20 FRN002E1 2U 73 14 Three DB2 2 2C 40 55 0 110 phase FRN003E1W 2U 50 230V TERNOOSE1m 2U DB3 7 2C 33 140 75 0 185 FRN007E1W 2U DB5 5 2C 20 55 20 0 275 46 FRNO10E1m 2U DB7 5 2C 15 37 0 375 FRNO15E1m 2U DB11 2C 10 55 10 0 55 FRNO20E1m 2U DB15 2C 8 6 75 0 75 FRNF50E1W 4U 250 37 DB0 75 4C 200 50 0 075 FRNOO1E1m 4U i 133 2
112. VDC Current input to terminal C1 C1 function 4 to 20 mA DC Sum of voltage and current inputs to terminals 12 and C1 C1 function Voltage input to terminal C1 V2 function 0 to 10 VDC Terminal command UP DOWN control Digital I O interface option PG interface card option Operation Method RUNISTOP keys on keypad Motor rotational direction specified by terminal command FWD REV Terminal command FWD or REV RUN STOP keys on keypad forward RUN STOP keys on keypad reverse E T er 0 Output a vollage in proportion to Input vollage 7 V 80 to 240 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 230 V class series TH 160 to 500 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 460 V class series 9 00 fo 3600 5 22 Note Entering 0 00 cancels the acceleration time requiring external soft start Deceleration Time 1 0 00 to 3600 Note Entering 0 00 cancels the deceleration time requiring external soft start Torque Boost 1 0 0 to 20 0 p 5 23 percentage with respect to F05 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 1 Note This setting takes effect when F37 0 1 3 or 4 Electronic Thermal Overload 1 For a general purpose motor with shaft driven cooling fan 5 25 Protection for Motor 1 2 For an inverter driven motor non ventilated motor or motor with Select motor characteristics separately powered cooling fan Overload detection level 0 00 Disable 0 01 to 100 00 1 to 135 of the rated current allowable continuous drive current
113. able With PTC the inverter immediately trips with displayed 2 Enable With PTC the inverter issues output signal THM and continues to run 6 H27 H28 Droop Control 60 0 to 0 0 5 Y H30 Communications Link Function Frequency command Run command Y Mode selection 0 F01 C30 F02 RS 485 F02 FO1 C30 RS 485 RS 485 RS 485 RS 485 option F02 RS 485 option RS 485 F01 C30 RS 485 option RS 485 RS 485 option RS 485 option RS 485 option H42 H43 H44 HAT of cumulative startup times H45 Mock Alarm 0 Disable 0 H47 initial Capacitance of DC Link Bus Capacitor H48 Cumulative Run Time of Capacitors on Indication for replacing capacitors on printed circuit boards 0000 to FFFF H49 H50 Non linear Vif Pattern 1 Frequency H51 Voltage H52 Non linear Vif Patten 2 Frequency H53 Voltage 0 to 240 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 200 V class series o 0 to 500 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series 4 Default settings for these function codes vary depending on the inverter capacity See Table 5 1 Factory Defaults According to Inverter Capacity on pages 5 15 and 5 16 6 These are available on inverters with inverter s ROM version 0800 or later For the version checking procedure refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 9 H c
114. able at base frequency or above N Y Operating conditions Disable during ACC DEC and enable at base frequency or above Enable during ACC DEC and disable at base frequency or above Disable during ACC DEC and disable at base frequency or above A41 Output Current Fluctuation 0 00 to 0 40 fonpngcanvaore Pe l A A A45 Cumulative Motor Run Time 2_ Change or reset the cumulative data TN E a A46 Startup Times of Moior2 indication of cumulative startup mes 8 Ei 4 Default settings for these function codes vary depending on the inverter capacity See Table 5 1 Factory Defaults According to Inverter Capacity on pages 5 15 and 5 16 5 11 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net J codes Application Functions Refer eee a OE EEE ment copying setting page J01 Mode selection 0 Disable i Enable Process control normal operation Enable Process control inverse operation Enable Dancer control J02 Remote command SV UP DOWN keys on keypad PID command 1 Terminal command UP DOWN control _Command via communications link J03 P Gain ee J04 Integral time o 010 3600 07 or J05 D Differential time J06 Feedback filter J10 Anti reset windup J1 Select alarm output 0 Absolute value alarm 7 Absolute value alarm with Hold Absolute value alarm with Latch Absolute value alarm with Hold and Latch Deviatio
115. active Instantaneous overcurrent limiting Operates if the inverter s output current exceeds the instantaneous overcurrent limit level avoiding tripping of the inverter during constant speed operation or during acceleration Alarm relay The inverter outputs a relay contact signal when the inverter Yes output issues an alarm and stops the inverter output for any fault lt Alarm reset gt _ tne The alarm stop state is reset by pressing the i key or by the digital input signal RST lt Saving the alarm history and detailed data gt The information on the previous 4 alarms can be saved and displayed Memory error The inverter checks memory data after power on and when the Eri Yes detection data is written If a memory error is detected the inverter stops Keypad The inverter stops by detecting a communications error Ero Yes communications between the inverter and the keypad during operation using error detection the standard keypad or the multi function keypad optional CPU error If the inverter detects a CPU error or LSI error caused by noise Era Yes detection or some other factors this function stops the inverter Not applicable CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 8 16 LED Alarm Name Description monitor output displays 30A B C Option Upon detection of an error in the communication between the Ert
116. ad at a Remote Site e g for Operation on Hand CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 25 2 Parts needed for connection To mount install a keypad on a place other than an inverter parts listed below are needed Parts name Remarks Extension cable Note CB 5S CB 3S and CB 1S 3 cables available in length of 16ft 5m 9 8ft 3m and 3 3ft 1m Fixing screw M3 x 16 Accessories Keypad rear cover Accessories Note When using an off the shelf LAN cable use a 10BASE T 100BASE TX straight type cable compliant to US ANSI TIA EIA 568A Category 5 Less than 66ft 20m Recommended LAN cable Manufacturer SANWA Supply Co LTD Model KB 10T5 01K 3 3ft 1m KB STP 01K 3 3ft 1m Shielded LAN cable compliant to EMC Directive 2 4 2 Mounting installing steps m Mounting a keypad on the panel wall Pull the keypad toward you while holding down the hooks on the keypad Figure 2 25 Removing a Keypad 2 Fix the keypad rear cover to the keypad Figure 2 26 Fixing the Keypad Rear Cover for Remote Keypad Operation CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 26 Make a cut out on the panel wall For details refer to Chapter 8 Section 8 4 2 Standard keypad To mount the keypad on the panel fix it firmly using a pair of M3 screws put through the
117. age V Min voltage V Volt bal 67 IEC 61800 3 Stage unbalance Three phase average voltage V XST If this value is 2 to 3 use an optional AC reactor ACR 7 The value is calculated assuming that the inverter is connected with a power supply with the capacity of 500 kVA or 10 times the inverter capacity if the inverter capacity exceeds 50 kVA and X is 5 8 Obtained when a DC reactor DCR is used 9 Average braking torque obtained when reducing the speed from 60 Hz with AVR control OFF It varies with the efficiency of the motor 10 Average braking torque obtained by use of an external braking resistor standard type available as option CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 8 2 8 1 3 Single phase 230 V class series 4 Standard 4 pole motor 2 Rated capacity is calculated by assuming the output rated voltage as 230 V 3 Output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage 4 Use the inverter at the current enclosed with parentheses or below when the carrier frequency is set to 4 kHz or above F26 and the inverter continuously runs at 100 load 5 The value is calculated assuming that the inverter is connected with a power supply with the capacity of 500 kVA or 10 times the inverter capacity if the inverter capacity exceeds 50 kVA and X is 5 6 Obtained when a DC reactor DCR i
118. ain circuit terminals and grounding terminals Table 2 8 shows the main circuit power terminals and grounding terminals Table 2 8 Symbols Names and Functions of the Main Circuit Power Terminals Symbol Functions L1 R L2 S L3 T Main circuit power Connect the three phase input power lines or single phase or L1 L L2 N inputs input power lines U V W Inverter outputs Connect a three phase motor P1 P DC reactor Connect an optional DC reactor DCR for improving power connection factor P DB DC braking resistor Connect an optional braking resistor P N DC link bus Connect a DC link bus of other inverter s An optional regenerative converter is also connectable to these terminals Se Grounding for Grounding terminals for the inverter s chassis or case and inverter and motor motor Earth one of the terminals and connect the grounding terminal of the motor Inverters provide a pair of grounding terminals that function equivalently Follow the procedure below for wiring and configuration of the inverter Figure 2 9 illustrates the wiring procedure with peripheral equipment Wiring procedure Grounding terminals G Inverter output terminals U V W and G DC reactor connection terminals P1 and P DC braking resistor connection terminals P DB DC link bus terminals P and N Main circuit power input terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T or L1 L a
119. al linear V f pattern Output voltage V A Maximum output voltage 1 FO6 Rated voltage at base frequency 1 F05 Output frequency Hz Base Maximum frequency 1 frequency 1 F04 F03 E V f pattern with two non linear points Output voltage V Maximum output voltage 1 F06 Rated voltage at base frequency 1 F05 Non linear Vit pattern 2 Voltage H53 Non linear V f pattern 1 Voltage H51 i Output frequency Hz Non linear Non linear Base Maximum Vit pattern 1 Vif pattern 2 frequency 1 frequency 1 Frequency Frequency F04 F03 H50 H52 F07 Acceleration Time 1 F08 Deceleration Time 1 E10 Acceleration Time 2 E11 Deceleration Time 2 F07 specifies the acceleration time the length of time the frequency increases from 0 Hz to the maximum frequency F08 specifies the deceleration time the length of time the frequency decreases from the maximum frequency down to 0 Hz Acc time 1 Dec time 1 F07 Maximum F08 i frequency F03 Starting Stop frequency frequency 1 F25 F23 Actual Actual acc time dec time CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 22 wee f you choose S curve acceleration deceleration or curvilinear acceleration Note deceleration in Acceleration Deceleration Pattern H07 the actual acceleration deceleration times are longer than
120. al circuit wires to control circuit terminals FWD and REV correctly gt Make sure that the sink source slide switch on the interface printed circuit board interface PCB is properly configured gt No indication of rotation direction keypad operation Check the input status of the forward reverse rotation direction command with Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad gt Input the rotation direction F02 0 or select the keypad operation with which the rotation direction is fixed F02 2 or 3 4 The inverter could not accept any run commands from the keypad since it was in Programming mode Check which operation mode the inverter is in using the keypad gt Shift the operation mode to Running mode and enter a run command 5 Arun command with higher priority than the one attempted was active and the run command was stopped While referring to the block diagram of the drive command block check the higher priority run command with Menu 2 Data Checking and Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad Refer to the FRENIC Multi User s Manual Chapter 4 gt Correct any incorrect function code data settings in H30 y98 etc or cancel the higher priority run command 6 The frequency command was set below the starting or stop frequency Check that a frequency command has been entered with Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad gt Set the value of the frequency
121. al is turned OFF in advance Otherwise an accident could occur Ifyou enable the Restart mode after momentary power failure Function code F14 4 or 5 then the inverter automatically restarts running the motor when the power is recovered Design the machinery or equipment so that human safety is ensured after restarting If you set the function codes wrongly or without completely understanding this instruction manual and the FRENIC Multi User s Manual the motor may rotate with a torque or at a speed not permitted for the machine An accident or injuries could occur Do not touch the inverter terminals while the power is applied to the inverter even if the inverter stops Doing so could cause electric shock A CAUTION Do not turn the main circuit power circuit breaker ON or OFF in order to start or stop inverter operation Doing so could cause failure Do not touch the heat sink and braking resistor because they become very hot Doing so could cause burns Setting the inverter to high speeds is easy Before changing the frequency speed setting check the specifications of the motor and machinery The brake function of the inverter does not provide mechanical holding means Injuries could occur Wiring length for EMC filter built in type ACAUTION When the wiring length between the inverter and motor exceeds 10 m the filter circuit may be overheated and damaged due to increase of leakage c
122. ance of the output cable Q V Rated voltage of the motor V l Rated current of the motor A E Rated slip frequency P12 Convert the value obtained from the motor manufacturer to Hz using the following expression and enter the converted value Note The motor rating given on the nameplate sometimes shows a larger value _ Synchronous speed Rated speed a Synchronous speed Rated slip frequency Hz x Base frequency a Note For reactance choose the value at the base frequency 1 F04 P09 Motor 1 Slip compensation gain for driving P10 Slip compensation response time P11 Slip compensation gain for braking P09 and P11 determine the slip compensation amount in for driving and braking individually Specification of 100 fully compensates for the rated slip of the motor Excessive compensation P09 P11 gt 100 may cause a system oscillation so carefully check the operation on the actual machine P10 determines the response time for slip compensation Basically there is no need to modify the default setting If you need to modify it consult your Fuji Electric representatives P99 Motor 1 Selection P99 specifies the motor to be used Data for P99 Motor type Motor characteristics 0 Fuji standard motors 8 series Motor characteristics 1 HP rating motors Motor characteristics 3 Fuji standard motors 6 series Other motors Automatic control such as auto torque
123. and the motor Turning ON the forced stop digital input STOP decelerated the inverter to stop according to the specified deceleration period H96 gt If this was not intended check the settings of E01 through E05 on terminals X1 through X5 What to Check and Suggested Measures gt Properly connect the motor to the inverter 2 V f or the rated current of the motor was not properly set Check whether the data of function codes agrees with the specifications of the motor Motor 1 F04 F05 H50 through H53 P02 and P03 Motor 2 A02 A03 A16 and A17 3 The connection length between the inverter and the motor was too long Check whether the connection length between the inverter and the motor is not exceeding 50 m gt Review and if necessary change the layout of the inverter and the motor to shorten the connection wire Alternatively minimize the connection wire length without changing the layout gt Disable both auto tuning and auto torque boost set data of F37 or A13 to 1 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 20 Possible Causes 4 The rated capacity of the motor was significantly different from that of the inverter What to Check and Suggested Measures Check whether the rated capacity of the motor is smaller than that of the inverter by three or more orders of class or larger by two or
124. and value or feedback signal function 3 Used as additional auxiliary setting to various frequency settings Input impedance 2509 Maximum input is 30 mA DC however the current larger than 20 mA DC is handled as 20 mA DC Analog 1 The frequency is commanded according to the external analog input setting voltage voltage 0 to 10 VDC 0 to 100 Normal operation input 10 to 0 VDC 0 to 100 Inverse operation v2 2 Inputs setting signal PID command value or feedback signal function a D 2 m S lt 3 Used as additional auxiliary setting to various frequency settings Input impedance 22 kQ Maximum input is 15 VDC however the voltage larger than 10 VDC is handled as 10 VDC PTC i 1 Connects PTC Positive 113 lt Control circuit gt thermistor Temperature 10 VOC input Coefficient thermistor Restar Operation level PTC for motor protection r function The figure shown below al I Comparator illustrates the internal 7 Extemal ge PTC F alarm circuit diagram To use thermistor ber 4 the PTC thermistor you 11 N must change data of the function code H26 Figure 2 12 Internal Circuit Diagram The C1 function V2 function or PTC function can be assigned to terminal C1 Doing so requires setting the slide switch on the interface PCB and configuring the related function code For de
125. ange in speed An accident or physical injury may result CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 40 Function code data Active ON Active OFF 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 Select ACC DEC time 1006 Enable 3 wire operation 1007 Coast to a stop 1008 Reset alarm 1009 Enable external alarm trip Terminal commands assigned Select multi frequency 0 to 15 steps 1010 Ready for jogging 1011 Select frequency command 2 1 1012 Select motor 2 motor 1 Enable DC braking 1014 Select torque limiter level 1017 UP Increase output frequency 1018 DOWN Decrease output frequency 1019 Enable data change with keypad 1020 Cancel PID control 1021 Switch normal inverse operation 1024 Enable communications link via RS 485 or field bus LE option 1025 Universal DI U DI 1026 Enable auto search for idling motor speed at starting STM 1027 Switch to speed feedback control PG Hz 1030 Force to stop STOP 1033 Reset PID integral and differential components PID RST 1034 Hold PID integral component PID HLD 1042 Activate the limit switch at start point 1043 Start reset 1044 Switch to the serial pulse receiving mode 1045 Enter the return mode 1046 Enable overload stop Run forward Exclusively assigned to FWD and REV terminals by E98 and E99
126. at sink overheat early warning 1030 Service lifetime alarm 1033 Reference loss detected REF OFF 1035 Inverter output on RUN2 1036 Overload prevention control OLP 1037 Current detected ID Current detected 2 1D2 i PID alarm PID ALM Switched to motor 2 j Motor overheat detected by thermistor PTC Brake signal j Terminal C1 wire break j PG error detected j Stop position override alarm j Timer output j Positioning completed i Current position count overflowed 99 1099 Alarm output for any alarm Setting the value of 1000s in parentheses shown above assigns a negative logic input to a terminal 0 01 to 10 00 Frequency Detection FDT Detection level Hysteresis width O0t04000OCOC OCSCSOCOCCCCCCCCC Yd Overload Early Warming Current Detection Level 0 00 Disable ul Current value of 1 to 200 of the inverter rated current Timer 0 07 to 600 00 1 10 00 Current Detection 2 0 00 Disable a Timer 0 01 to 600 00 1 0 01 Y F 10 00 Time 1 when you make settings from the keypad the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can isplay Example If the setting range is from 200 00 to 200 00 the incremental unit is 4 for 200 to 100 0 1 for 99 9 to 10 0 and for 100 0 to 200 0 and 0 01 for 9 99 to 0 01 and for 0 00 to 99 99 4 Default settings for these function codes vary depending on the inverter capacity
127. ating see the tables on the next page CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 58 HM When Fuji standard 8 series motors P99 0 or other motors P99 4 or A39 4 are selected the motor parameters are as listed in the following tables 230 V class series Motor Norminal Rated No load R X Rated slip capacity applied current current 4 frequency o o HP motor A A HP P02 A16 P03 A17 P06 A20 P07 A21 P08 A22 P12 A26 0 01 to 0 11 0 10 0 44 0 40 13 79 11 75 2 50 0 12 to 0 24 0 12 0 68 0 55 12 96 12 67 2 50 0 25 to 0 49 0 25 1 40 1 12 11 02 13 84 2 50 0 50 to 0 99 0 50 2 00 1 22 6 15 8 80 2 50 1 00 to 1 99 1 00 3 00 1 54 3 96 8 86 2 50 2 00 to 2 99 2 00 5 80 2 80 4 29 7 74 2 50 3 00 to 4 99 3 00 7 90 3 57 3 15 20 81 1 17 5 00 to 7 49 5 00 12 60 4 78 3 34 23 57 1 50 7 50 to 9 99 7 50 18 60 6 23 2 65 28 91 1 17 10 00 to 14 99 10 00 25 30 8 75 2 43 30 78 1 17 15 00 to 19 99 15 00 37 30 12 70 2 07 29 13 1 00 20 00 to 24 99 20 00 49 10 9 20 2 09 29 53 1 00 25 00 to 29 99 25 00 60 00 16 70 1 75 31 49 1 00 30 00 30 00 72 40 19 80 1 90 32 55 1 00 Hz 460 V class series Motor Norminal Rated No load 6 Rated slip AF A R X capacity applied current current frequency HP motor A A Hz P02 A16 HP P03 A17 P06 A20 P07 A21 P08 A22 P12 A26 0 01 to 0 11 0 10 0 22
128. ay occur due to an occurrence of temporary regeneration For safety therefore it is advisable to set H13 to a certain level so that restart will take place only after the residual voltage has dropped to a low level Note that even when power is restored restart will not take place until the restart time H13 has elapsed Factory default By factory default H13 is set at one of the values shown below according to the inverter capacity Basically you do not need to change H13 data However if the long restart time causes the flow rate of the pump to overly decrease or causes any other problem you might as well reduce the setting to about a half of the default value In such a case make sure that no alarm occurs Inverter capacity HP Factory default of H13 Restart time in seconds 1 8 to 10 0 5 15 to 20 1 0 E Restart after momentary power failure Frequency fall rate H14 During restart after a momentary power failure if the inverter output frequency and the idling motor speed cannot be harmonized with each other an overcurrent will flow activating the overcurrent limiter If it happens the inverter reduces the output frequency to match the idling motor speed according to the reduction rate Frequency fall rate Hz s specified by H14 Data for H14 Inverter s action for the output frequency fall 0 00 Follow the selected deceleration time 0 01 to 100 00 Hz s Follow data specified by H14 Follow the setting o
129. becomes activated In general set F11 to the rated current of motor when driven at the base frequency i e 1 0 to 1 1 multiple of the rated current of motor 1 P03 To disable the electronic thermal overload protection set F11 to 0 00 Disable CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 26 E Thermal time constant F12 F12 specifies the thermal time constant of the motor If the current of 150 of the overload detection level specified by F11 flows for the time specified by F12 the electronic thermal overload protection becomes activated to detect the motor overload The thermal time constant for general purpose motors including Fuji motors is approx 5 minutes by factory default Data setting range 0 5 to 75 0 minutes in increments of 0 1 minute Example When the F12 data is set at 5 0 5 minutes As shown below the electronic thermal overload protection is activated to detect an alarm condition alarm code Zi when the output current of 150 of the overload detection level specified by F11 flows for 5 minutes and 120 for approx 12 5 minutes The actual driving time required for issuing a motor overload alarm tends to be shorter than the value specified as the time period from when the output current exceeds the rated current 100 until it reaches 150 of the overload detection level Example of Operating Characteristics a Spec
130. ber Standard RJ 45 connector jack Table 8 3 Pin Assignment of RJ 45 Connector Description Refer to Table 8 3 Remarks 1 and 8 Power supply lines for keypad 5 VDC 2and7 Reference potential OV 3 and 6 Reserved 4 RS 485 communications data line 5 RS 485 communications data line 8 4 Terminal Specifications 8 4 1 Terminal functions For details about the main and control circuit terminals refer to Chapter 2 Section 2 3 5 and Section 2 3 6 Table 2 9 respectively 8 4 2 Running the inverter with keypad MUUE or Note 3 per RCOOFCI uc insien d Note 1 7 Pe Srgephase e I OR gt CM 230 V cass sores s min Piola 4 200 240V0 L OLN bi 7 3 Note 2 a ae Power supply ls af f MCCS or Note 3 J Man rout Three phase ie 230 V class series RCDGFCS ue PI A 08 N i 200 t 240 V ALUR tu 600 e i Motor te lt as MN Tiree phase gt af ro 400 V class se as 380 to 400 V 5060 Hz wA aiidis T c s0 Grounding termina Control carcut a PIC pnz wit Swe cy gen Bwr m v2 S iFM s X81 Meter J a 30 Poal or any taut swe f wo wn f REV ma Transistor output tomy ax m MCCB Molted case cint breaker O gg ae RCO Resdus owrentcpersiod Pe protective device hon Swi GFC Ground fault circuit interrupter hoe MC Magnetic contactor Las DCR OC mactor tomy DBF Braking resi
131. ble 2 A high intensity noise was given to the inverter Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires gt Improve noise control For details refer to Appendix A of the FRENIC Multi User s Manual 3 The keypad malfunctioned 14 amp 3 CPU error Problem A CPU error e g Possible Causes 1 Ahigh intensity noise was given to the inverter Check that alarm lt does not occur if you connect another keypad to the inverter gt Replace the keypad erratic CPU operation occurred What to Check and Suggested Measures Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires and communications cable gt Improve noise control 15 amp 4 Option card communications error Problem Possible Causes 1 There was a problem with the connection between the option card and the inverter A communications error occurred between the option card and the inverter What to Check and Suggested Measures Check whether the connector on the option card is properly mating with the connector of the inverter gt Reload the bus option card into the inverter 2 There was a high intensity noise from outside 16 amp 5 Option card error An error detected by the option CTi Automation Phone 800 89
132. boost F09 was too large F37 A13 0 1 3 or 4 Check that the output current decreases and the motor does not come to stall if you set a lower value than the current one for F09 and A05 gt Lower the value for torque boost F09 and A05 if the motor is not going to stall 5 The acceleration deceleration time was too short Check that the motor generates enough torque required during acceleration deceleration That torque is calculated from the moment of inertia for the load and the acceleration deceleration time gt Increase the acceleration deceleration time F07 F08 E10 E11 and H56 gt Enable current limiter F43 and torque limiter F40 and F41 gt Raise the inverter capacity 6 Malfunction caused by noise 2 dn Overvoltage Problem Check if noise control measures are appropriate e g correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires gt Implement noise control measures For details refer to Appendix A of the FRENIC Multi User s Manual gt Enable the Auto reset H04 gt Connect a surge absorber to the coil or solenoid of the magnetic contactor causing the noise The DC link bus voltage was over the detection level of overvoltage chi i Overvoltage occurs during the acceleration iii Overvoltage occurs during the deceleration LLII Overvoltage occurs during running at constant speed Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures
133. boost and auto energy saving or electronic thermal overload protection for motor uses the motor parameters and characteristics To match the property of a control system with that of the motor select characteristics of the motor and set HO3 data Data Initialization to 2 to initialize the old motor parameters stored in the inverter When initialization is complete P03 P06 P07 and P08 data and the old related internal data are automatically updated CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 57 For P99 enter the following data according to the motor type P99 0 Motor characteristics 0 Fuji standard 8 series motors Current standard e P99 3 Motor characteristics 3 Fuji standard 6 series motors Conventional standard P99 4 Other motors Other manufacturer s or unknown motors If P99 4 Other motors the inverter runs following the motor characteristics of Note Fuji standard 8 series e The inverter also supports motors rated by HP horse power typical in North America P99 1 H03 Data Initialization HO3 initializes the current function code data to the factory defaults or initializes the motor parameters n E E To change the H03 data it is necessary to press the keys or V keys simultaneous keying Data for H03 Function Disable initialization Settings manually made by the user will be re
134. by this symbol may A CAUTI O N lead to dangerous conditions possibly resulting in minor or light bodily injuries and or substantial property damage Failure to heed the information contained under the CAUTION title can also result in serious consequences These safety precautions are of utmost importance and must be observed at all times Application AWARNING e FRENIC Multi is designed to drive a three phase induction motor Do not use it for single phase motors or for other purposes Fire or an accident could occur e FRENIC Multi may not be used for a life support system or other purposes directly related to the human safety e Though FRENIC Multi is manufactured under strict quality control install safety devices for applications where serious accidents or material losses are foreseen in relation to the failure of it An accident could occur CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net i Installation A WARNING Install the inverter on a nonflammable material such as metal Otherwise fire could occur Do not place flammable object nearby Doing so could cause fire A CAUTION Do not support the inverter by its terminal block cover during transportation Doing so could cause a drop of the inverter and injuries Prevent lint paper fibers sawdust dust metallic chips or other foreign mat
135. cal contacts that cannot stand frequent ON OFF switching Where frequent ON OFF switching is anticipated for example limiting a current by using signals subjected to inverter output limit control such as switching to commercial power line use transistor outputs Y1 and Y2 instead The service life of a relay is approximately 200 000 times if it is switched ON and OFF at one second intervals CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 48 The table below lists functions that can be assigned to terminals Y1 Y2 and 30A B C To make the explanations simpler the examples shown below are all written for the normal logic Active ON Function code data Active ON Active OFF 0 1000 Inverter running RUN 1001 Frequency arrival signal FAR 1002 Frequency detected FDT 1003 Undervoltage detected Inverter stopped LU 1004 Torque polarity detected B D 1005 Inverter output limiting IOL 1006 Auto restarting after momentary power failure IPF Functions assigned Symbol NIJA AJJ nm gt 1007 Motor overload early warning OL 1010 Inverter ready to run RDY 1021 Frequency arrival signal 2 FAR2 1022 Inverter output limiting with delay IOL2 1026 Auto resetting TRY 1027 Universal DO U DO 1 1028 Heat sink overheat early warning OH 1030 Service lifetime alarm LIFE 1033 Reference loss detected REF OFF 1035 Inverter output on RUN2 1036 Overload
136. carrier frequency of the inverter Operation at 60 Hz or higher can also result in higher noise level In running special motors High speed motors If the reference frequency is set to 120 Hz or more to drive a high speed motor test run the combination of the inverter and motor beforehand to check for safe operation Explosion proof motors When driving an explosion proof motor with an inverter use a combination of a motor and an inverter that has been approved in advance Submersible motors and pumps These motors have a larger rated current than general purpose motors Select an inverter whose rated output current is greater than that of the motor These motors differ from general purpose motors in thermal characteristics Set a low value in the thermal time constant of the motor when setting the electronic thermal function Brake motors For motors equipped with parallel connected brakes their power supply for brake must be supplied from the primary circuit If the power supply for brake is connected to the inverter s output circuit by mistake the brake will not work Do not use inverters for driving motors equipped with series connected brakes Geared motors If the power transmission mechanism uses an oil lubricated gearbox or speed changer reducer then continuous operation at low speed may cause poor lubrication Avoid such operation CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208
137. ced insulation or that isolates the power supply lines connected to the electric equipment using an isolation transformer 4 The inverter should be used in an environment that does not exceed Pollution Degree 2 requirements If the environment conforms to Pollution Degree 3 or 4 install the inverter in an enclosure of IP54 or higher 5 Install the inverter AC or DC reactor input or output filter in an enclosure with minimum degree of protection of IP2X Top surface of enclosure shall be minimum IP4X when it can be easily accessed to prevent human body from touching directly to live parts of these equipment 6 To make an inverter with no integrated EMC filter conform to the EMC directive it is necessary to connect an external EMC filter to the inverter and install them properly so that the entire equipment including the inverter conforms to the EMC directive 7 Do not connect any copper wire directly to grounding terminals Use crimp terminals with tin or equivalent plating to connect them 8 To connect the three phase or single phase 230 V class series of inverters to the power supply in Overvoltage Category Ill or to connect the three phase 460 V class series of inverters to the power supply in Overvoltage Category II or III a supplementary insulation is required for the control circuitry 9 When you use an inverter at an altitude of more than 6600ft 2000 m you should apply basic insulation for the control circuits of the inver
138. clears the cumulative run time of the motor i Note The H94 data is in hexadecimal notation It appears in decimal notation on the keypad H98 Protection Maintenance Function Mode selection H98 specifies whether to enable or disable a automatic lowering of carrier frequency b 5 68 input phase loss protection c output phase loss protection and d judgment on the life of the DC link bus capacitor as well as specifying the judgment threshold on the life of the DC link bus capacitor in a style of combination Bit 0 to Bit 4 Automatic lowering of carrier frequency Bit 0 This function should be used for important machinery that requires keeping the inverter running Even if a heat sink overheat or overload occurs due to excessive load abnormal ambient temperature or cooling system failure enabling this function lowers the carrier frequency to avoid tripping 474 or 4iL4 Note that enabling this function results in increased motor noise CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 69 Input phase loss protection _ 7 Bit 1 Upon detection of an excessive stress inflicted on the apparatus connected to the main circuit due to phase loss or line to line voltage unbalance in the three phase power supplied to the inverter this feature stops the inverter and displays an alarm 17 Not In configurations where only a lig
139. coefficients A and B Display value PID feedback amount x Coefficient A B B If PID control is disabled appears Torque limit value Torque limit value Driving torque limit value A based on motor rated torque Braking torque limit value B based on motor rated torque Displaying running status To display the running status in hexadecimal format each state has been assigned to bits 0 to 15 as listed in Table 3 13 Table 3 14 shows the relationship between each of the status assignments and the LED monitor display Table 3 15 gives the conversion table from 4 bit binary to hexadecimal Notation Table 3 13 Running Status Bit Assignment 1 when function code data is being written Notation 4 under voltage limiting control Always 0 41 under torque limiting control Always 0 4 when the DC link bus voltage is higher than the undervoltage level 1 when communication is enabled when ready for run and frequency commands via communications link 4 during braking 1 when an alarm has occurred 1 when the inverter output is shut down 41 during deceleration 14 during DC braking 4 during acceleration 4 during running in the reverse direction LED No 4 under current limiting control us Display 4 during running in the forward direction Bit Notation Binary
140. command to the same or higher than that of the starting or stop frequency F23 or F25 gt Reconsider the starting and stop frequencies F23 and F25 and if necessary change them to lower values gt Inspect the frequency command signal converters switches or relay contacts Replace any ones that are faulty gt Connect the external circuit wires correctly to terminals 13 12 11 and C1 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 2 Possible Causes 7 A frequency command with higher priority than the one attempted was active What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the higher priority run command with Menu 2 Data Checking and Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad referring to the block diagram of the drive command block Refer to the FRENIC Multi User s Manual Chapter 4 gt Correct any incorrect function code data settings e g cancel the higher priority run command 8 The upper and lower frequencies for the frequency limiters were set incorrectly Check the data of function codes F15 Frequency limiter high and F16 Frequency limiter low gt Change the settings of F15 and F16 to the correct ones 9 The coast to stop command was effective Check the data of function codes E01 E02 E03 E04 E05 E98 and E99 and the input signal status with Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad
141. ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 9 2 Name of option Function and application Main option DC reactors DCRs A DCR is mainly used for power supply matching and for input power factor correction for reduction of harmonics 1 For power supply matching Use a DCR when the capacity of a power supply transformer exceeds 500 kVA In this case the percentage reactance of the power supply decreases and harmonic components and their peak levels increase These factors may break rectifiers or capacitors in the converter section of inverter or decrease the capacitance of the capacitor which can shorten the inverter s service life Also use a DCR when there are thyristor driven loads or when phase advancing capacitors are being turned ON OFF 2 For input power factor correction reduction of harmonics Generally a capacitor is used to correct the power factor of the load however it cannot be used in a system that includes an inverter Using a DCR increases the reactance of inverter s power supply so as to decrease harmonic components on the power supply lines and correct the power factor of inverter Using a DCR reforms the input power factor to approximately 90 to 95 Note At the time of shipping a jumper bar is connected across the terminals P1 and P on the terminal block Remove the jumper bar when connecting a DCR Output circuit filters Include an OFL in the inverter power output seconda
142. ction 1000 Select multi frequency E03 Terminal X3 Function 1001 Select multi frequency E04 Terminal X4 Function 1002 Select multi frequency E05 Terminal X5 Function 1003 Select multi frequency 1004 Select ACC DEC time 1006 Enable 3 wire operation 1007 Coast to a stop 1008 Reset alarm RST 1009 Enable extemal alarm trip THR 1010 Ready for jogging JOG 1011 Select frequency command 2 1 Hz2 Hz1 1012 Select motor 2 motor 1 M2 M1 Enable DC braking DCBRK 1014 Select torque limiter level TL2 TL1 1017 UP Increase output frequency UP 1018 DOWN Decrease output DOWN 1019 Enable data change with keypad WE KP 1020 Cancel PID control Hz PID 1021 Switch normal inverse operation vs 1024 Enable communications link via LE RS 485 or field bus 1025 Universal DI U DI 1026 Enable auto search for idling STM motor speed at starting 1027 Switch to speed feedback PG Hz 5 1030 Force to stop STOP 1033 Reset PID integral and PID RST differential components 1034 Hold PID integral component PID HLD 1042 Activate the limit switch at start pc 5 1043 Startireset SIR 5 1044 Switch to the serial pulse SPRM 5 receiving 1045 Enter the return mode RTN 5 46 1046 Enable overload stop OLS 5 Setting the value of 1000s in parentheses shown above assigns a negative logic input to a terminal Note In the case of THR and S
143. ction 1 1 2 SER No serial number of equipment Refer to Chapter 1 Section 1 1 3 Function codes and their data that you changed from the factory defaults Refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 3 4 ROM version Refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 6 5 Date of purchase 6 Inquiries for example point and extent of breakage uncertainties failure phenomena and other circumstances 7 6 2 Product warranty To all our customers who purchase Fuji Electric FA Components amp Systems products Please take the following items into consideration when placing your order When requesting an estimate and placing your orders for the products included in these materials please be aware that any items such as specifications which are not specifically mentioned in the contract catalog specifications or other materials will be as mentioned below In addition the products included in these materials are limited in the use they are put to and the place where they can be used etc and may require periodic inspection Please confirm these points with your sales representative or directly with this company Furthermore regarding purchased products and delivered products we request that you take adequate consideration of the necessity of rapid receiving inspections and of product management and maintenance even before receiving your products 1 Free of charge warranty period and warranty range 1 Free of charge warranty period 1 The prod
144. ction Codes for details Switches the logic value 1 0 for ON OFF of the terminals between Y1 Y2 and CMY If the logic value for ON between Y1 Y2 and CMY is 1 in the normal logic system for example OFF is 1 in the negative logic system and vice versa Transistor output 2 Transistor output circuit specification lt Control circuit gt Photocoupler Current tem go Operation ON level voltage OFF level 311035 V Maximum motor current at ON Leakage current at OFF Figure 2 18 Transistor Output Circuit Figure 2 19 shows examples of connection between the control circuit and a PLC ON When a transistor output drives a control relay connect a ote surge absorbing diode across relay s coil terminals e When any equipment or device connected to the transistor output needs to be supplied with DC power feed the power 24 VDC allowable range 22 to 27 VDC 50 mA max through the PLC terminal Short circuit between the terminals CMY and CM in this case 3 2 3 fe ie o 2 a a E i Transistor Common terminal for transistor output signal terminals output This terminal is electrically isolated from terminals CM s and 11 s common i Connecting Programmable Logic Controller PLC to Terminal Y1 or Y2 Figure 2 19 shows two examples of circuit connection between the transistor o
145. ction code data 30 This output signal comes ON when it is judged that the service life of any one of capacitors DC link bus capacitors and electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit board and cooling fan has expired This signal should be used as a guide for replacement of the capacitors and cooling fan If this signal comes ON use the specified maintenance procedure to check the service life of these parts and determine whether the parts should be replaced or not Em Reference loss detected REF OFF Function code data 33 This output signal comes ON when an analog input used as a frequency command source is in a reference loss state as specified by E65 due to a wire break or a weak connection This signal goes OFF when the operation under the analog input is resumed Refer to the description of E65 E Inverter output on RUN2 Function code data 35 This output signal comes ON when the inverter is running at the starting frequency or below or the DC braking is in operation Overload prevention control OLP Function code data 36 This output signal comes ON when the overload prevention control is activated The minimum ON duration is 100 ms Refer to the description of H70 E Current detected and Current detected 2 ID and D2 Function code data 37 38 The ID or ID2 output signal comes ON when the output current of the inverter exceeds the level specified by E34 Current detection Level or E37 Cur
146. ction via keypad operation is incorrect Check the data of function code F02 Run command gt Change the data of function code F02 to 2 fl fl keys on keypad forward or 3 P P gt keys on keypad reverse 4 If the speed variation and current vibration such as hunting occur at the constant speed Possible Causes 1 The frequency command fluctuated What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the signals for the frequency command with Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad gt Increase the filter constants C33 C38 and C43 for the frequency command 2 The external frequency command device was used CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Check that there is no noise in the control signal wires from external sources gt Isolate the control signal wires from the main circuit wires as far as possible gt Use shielded or twisted wires for the control signal Check whether the frequency command has not failed because of noise from the inverter gt Connect a capacitor to the output terminal of the frequency command or insert a ferrite core in the signal wire Refer to Chapter 2 Section 2 3 6 Wiring for control circuit terminals 6 5 Possible Causes 3 Frequency switching or multi frequency command was enabled What to Check and Suggested Measures Check whether the relay signal for sw
147. ctory defaults initialize the whole data using function code H03 data 1 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 13 Figure 3 2 shows the menu transition in Menu 0 Quick Setup Power ON Running mode Sle v1 Programming mode Menu List of function codes Function code data gt Menu 0 o 7 Quick Setup i i een ee i OFac i 8 Egi 58 1 1 Me ato J FG Ps gt Z Fas i i F oY Poo a eee Figure 3 2 Menu Transition in Menu 0 Quick Setup Basic key operation This section gives a description of the basic key operation following the example of the function code data changing procedure shown in Figure 3 3 f This example shows you how to change function code F01 data from the factory default N Vv keys on keypad F01 0 to Current input to terminal C1 C1 function 4 to 20 mA DC F01 2 1 Turn the inverter ON It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the E key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears In this example Arc is displayed If anything other than Arc is displayed use the A and keys to display Finc Press the G5 key to proceed to a list of function codes Use the N and v keys
148. cy If you specify any wrong data for these function codes the inverter may not run the motor at the desired speed or cannot start it normally CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 31 F18 Bias Frequency command 1 C50 Bias for Frequency 1 Bias base point C32 C34 Analog Input Adjustment for 12 Gain Gain base point C37 C39 Analog Input Adjustment C1 Gain Gain base point C42 C44 Analog Input Adjustment V2 Gain Gain base point When any analog input for frequency command 1 F01 is used it is possible to define the relationship between the analog input and the reference frequency by multiplying the gain and adding the bias specified by F18 As shown in the graph below the relationship between the analog input and the reference frequency specified by frequency command 1 is determined by points A and B Point A is defined by the combination of the bias F18 and its base point C50 Point B by the combination of the gain C32 C37 or C42 and its base point C34 C39 or C44 The combination of C32 and C34 applies to terminal 12 that of C37 and C39 to C1 C1 function and that of C42 and C44 to C1 V2 function Configure the bias F18 and gain C32 C37 or C42 assuming the maximum frequency as 100 and the bias base point C50 and gain base point C34 C39 or C44 assuming the full scale 10 VDC or 20
149. d Otherwise electric shock could occur e Do not operate switches with wet hands Doing so could cause electric shock e If the auto reset function has been selected the inverter may automatically restart and drive the motor depending on the cause of tripping Design the machinery or equipment so that human safety is ensured after restarting e If the stall prevention function current limiter automatic deceleration and overload prevention control have been selected the inverter may operate at an acceleration deceleration time or frequency different from the commanded ones Design the machine so that safety is ensured even in such cases Otherwise an accident could occur CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net iii A WARNING The go key on the keypad is effective only when the keypad operation is enabled with function code F02 0 2 or 3 When the keypad operation is disabled prepare an emergency stop switch separately for safe operations Switching the run command source from keypad local to external equipment remote by turning ON the Enable communications link command LE disables the gro key To enable the gro key for an emergency stop select the STOP key priority with function code H96 1 or 3 Ifan alarm reset is made with the Run command signal turned ON a sudden start will occur Ensure that the Run command sign
150. d The inverter will start operation in the normal starting sequence Ifthe Coast to a stop terminal command BX is entered during the power failure the inverter gets out of the restart mode and enters the normal running mode If a run command is entered with power supply applied the inverter will start from the normal starting frequency CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 29 During a momentary power failure the motor slows down After power is restored the inverter restarts at the frequency just before the momentary power failure Then the current limiting function works and the output frequency of the inverter automatically decreases When the output frequency matches the motor speed the motor accelerates up to the original output frequency See the figure below In this case the instantaneous overcurrent limiting must be enabled H12 1 Power failure Recovery F14 4 DC link bus Undervoltage i voltage r i i i i 3 Searching for E motor speed Output KN frequency Ma Motor speed i rem Acceleration H t L Auto restarting after 4 i f momentary power failure i ON Time E Restart mode after momentary power failure Allowable momentary power failure time H16 H16 specifies the maximum allowable duration 0 0 to 30 0 seconds from an occurrence of a momentary power failure undervoltage until
151. d Rated capacity of momentary power applied Inverter type torque boost motor failure motor HP Restart time HP s FO9 A05 PO2 A16 H13 1 8 FRNF12E1W 2U 8 4 0 12 0 5 1 4 FRNF25E1W 2U 8 4 0 25 0 5 1 2 FRNF50E1W 2U 7 1 0 50 0 5 1 FRN001E1W 2U 6 8 1 00 0 5 2 FRN002E1W 2U 6 8 2 00 0 5 3 FRN003E1W 2U 6 8 3 00 0 5 5 FRN005E1W 2U 5 5 5 00 0 5 7 5 FRN007E1W 2U 4 9 7 50 0 5 10 FRN010E1W 2U 4 4 10 00 0 5 15 FRN015E1W 2U 3 5 15 00 1 0 20 FRN020E1W 2U 2 8 20 00 1 0 1 2 FRNF50E1W 4U 7 1 0 50 0 5 1 FRN001E1W 4U 6 8 1 00 0 5 2 FRN002E1W 4U 6 8 2 00 0 5 3 FRN003E1W 4U 6 8 3 00 0 5 5 FRN005E1W 4U 5 5 5 00 0 5 7 5 FRN007E1W 4U 4 9 7 50 0 5 10 FRN010E1W 4U 4 4 10 00 0 5 15 FRN015E1W 4U 3 5 15 00 1 0 20 FRN020E1W 4U 2 8 20 00 1 0 1 8 FRNF12E1W 7U 8 4 0 12 0 5 1 4 FRNF25E1W 7U 8 4 0 25 0 5 1 2 FRNF50E1W 7U 7 1 0 50 0 5 FRN001E1W 7U 6 8 1 00 0 5 FRN002E1W 7U 6 8 2 00 0 5 FRN003E1W 7U 6 8 3 00 0 5 he above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 15 Table 5 1 2 Factory Defaults According to Inverter Capacity Power Nominal Rated current of HP standard motor supply aay Inverter type A voltage HP F11 E34 E37 A07 1 8 FRNF12E1W 2U 0 68 1 4 FRNF25E1W 2U 1 4 1 2 FRNF50E1W 2U 1 FRN001E1W 2U Three 2 FRN002E1W 2U 5 8 phase 3
152. d crystal display LCD Also allows you to copy function code data from one FRENIC Multi inverter to another Extension cable for remote keypad operation The extension cable connects the RS 485 communications port standard with a keypad or an RS 485 USB converter Three lengths are available 16 4 ft 5 m 9 8ft 3 m and 3 3ft 1 m RS 485 Communications card This makes communication to a PLC or personal computer system easy Option This has a pair of RJ 45 connectors that acts as a transfer port for a multidrop network configuration without using a branch adapter RS 485 USB converter A converter that allows connection of an RS 485 communications port to a USB port on a PC Inverter support loader software Inverter support loader software Windows GUI Graphics User Interface based that makes setting of function codes easy Other peripheral equipment Surge absorbers A surge absorber suppresses surge currents and noise from the magnetic contactors mini relays and timers and protects the inverter from malfunctioning Surge killers A surge killer eliminates surge currents induced by lightening and noise from the power supply lines Use of a surge killer is effective in preventing the electronic equipment including inverters from damage or malfunctioning caused by such surges and or noise Arresters An arrester suppresses surge currents and noise invaded from the power supply li
153. d indication E50 x Frequency Hz Line speed Coefficient for speed indication E50 x Frequency Hz Where the frequency refers to the reference frequency to be applied for settings constant feeding rate time load shaft speed or line speed or to the output frequency before slip compensation to be applied for monitor If the constant feeding rate time is 999 9 min or more or the denominator of the right hand side is zero 0 999 9 appears E51 Display Coefficient for Input Watt hour Data Use this coefficient multiplication factor for displaying the input watt hour data 5_ i ina part of maintenance information on the keypad Input watt hour data Display coefficient E51 data x Input watt hour kWh Setting E51 data to 0 000 clears the input watt hour and its data to 0 After clearing N Note be sure to restore E51 data to the previous value otherwise input watt hour data will not be accumulated E59 Terminal C1 Signal Definition C1 V2 function E59 defines the property of terminal C1 for either a current input 4 to 20 mA DC C1 function or a voltage input 0 to 10 VDC V2 function In addition to this setting you need to turn SW7 on the interface PCB to the corresponding position as listed below Data for E59 Input configuration SW7 position Current input 4 to 20 mA DC C1 function C1 Voltage input 0 to 10 VDC V2 function V2 CTi Automation Phone 80
154. d its common terminal to braking resistor s terminals 2 and 1 To protect the motor from overheat without using the thermal sensor relay mounted on the braking resistor configure the electronic thermal overload protection facility by setting F50 and F51 data to the discharging capability and allowable average loss values listed below respectively Braking Continuous braking Intermittent braking Power resistor Resistance 100 braking torque Period Less than 100s supply Inverter type Q Discharging Braking Allowable pyt voltage Type Qty capability time average loss ED kWs s kW i FRNF12E1W 2U 90 0 037 37 FRNF25E1W 2U 9 i DBO 75 2 100 FRNF50E1 2U 0 044 22 FRN001E1W 2U 17 45 0 068 18 Three FRNOOZE1M 2U an 34 0 075 10 phase FRN003E1W 2U 33 30 0 077 7 230V FRNOOSE1m 2U DB3 7 2 33 37 a 0 093 FRNOO7E1 M 2U DB5 5 2 20 55 0 138 FRN010E1W 2U DB7 5 2 15 37 0 188 5 FRN015E1W 2U DB11 2 10 55 10 0 275 FRN020E1W 2U DB15 2 8 6 75 0 375 FRNF50E1M 4U DB0 75 4 200 9 0 044 22 FRN001E1W 4U 1 17 45 0 068 18 FRNOO2E1 W 4U DB2 2 4 160 34 0 075 10 Three FRNOO3E1 W 4U 33 30 0 077 7 phase FRNOO5E1 4U DB3 7 4 130 37 20 0 093 460V TERNOO7E1m 4U DB5 5 4 80 55 0 138 FRNO10E1 4U DB7 5 4 60 38 0 188 5 FRNO15E1 4U DB11 4 40 55 10 0 275 FRN020E1 W 4
155. d limit the output current Refer to the description of function code H12 If F43 1 the current limiter is enabled only during constant speed operation If F43 2 the current limiter is enabled during both of acceleration and constant speed operation Choose F43 1 if you need to run the inverter at full capability during acceleration and to limit the output current during constant speed operation E Mode selection F43 F43 selects the motor running state in which the current limiter will be active Data for Running states that enable the current limiter F43 During acceleration Disable During constant speed Disable During deceleration Disable Disable Enable Disable Enable Enable Disable E Level F44 F44 specifies the operation level at which the output current limiter becomes activated in ratio to the inverter rating Since the current limit operation with F43 and F44 is performed by software it may cause a delay in control If you need a quick response specify a current limit operation by hardware H12 1 at the same time If an excessive load is applied when the current limiter operation level is set extremely low the inverter will rapidly lower its output frequency This may cause an overvoltage trip or dangerous turnover of the motor rotation due to undershooting e The torque limiter and current limiter are very similar function each other If both are activated concu
156. d motor output Calibration Full scale output of the meter calibration This always outputs the full scale 100 PID command SV Command value under PID control 100 of the feedback amount PID output MV Output level of the PID controller under PID control Frequency command Maximum frequency F03 A01 If F31 16 PID output J01 3 Dancer control and J62 2 or 3 Ratio compensation enabled the PID output is equivalent to the ratio against the primary reference frequency and may vary within 300 of the frequency The monitor displays the PID output in a converted absolute value To indicate the value up to the full scale of 300 set F30 data to 33 E Pulse rate F33 dedicated to FMP F33 specifies the number of pulses at which the output of the monitored item selected reaches 100 in accordance with the specifications of the counter to be connected F40 F41 E16 E17 Torque Limiter 1 Limiting levels for driving and braking Torque Limiter 2 Limiting levels for driving and braking If the inverter s output torque exceeds the specified levels of the driving torque limiter F40 E16 and the braking torque limiter F41 E17 the inverter controls the output frequency and limits the output torque for preventing a stall Specify the limiting levels at which the torque limiter becomes activated as the percentage of the motor rated torque To switc
157. dard keypad Unit inch mm 13 5 0 20 3 12 79 2 6 2 __2 71 68 8 0 20 6 2 mm ALE im g 3 12 79 2 2 71 68 8 5 68 8 a g 1 65 41 8 For remote operation or panel wall mounting Dimensions of holes in panel viewed from A The keypad rear cover should be mounted CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 8 14 8 6 Protective Functions LED Alarm Name Description monitor output displays 30A B C Overcurrent Stops the inverter output to protect the During cht Yes protection inverter from an overcurrent resulting from acceleration overload Short circuit Stops the inverter output to protect the protection inverter from overcurrent due to a short circuiting in the output circuit During Gee deceleration Ground fault Stops the inverter output to protect the protection inverter from overcurrent due to a ground fault in the output circuit This protection is During running F effective only during startup of the inverter If at constant you turn ON the inverter without removing speed the ground fault this protection may not work Overvoltage Stops the inverter output upon detection of During chit Yes protection an overvoltage condition 400 VDC for acceleration three phase 230 V 800 VDC for three phase Duri mid 460 V class series in
158. dling STM motor speed at starting j Switch to speed feedback PG Hz 5 Force to stop STOP i Reset PID integral and PID RST differential components Hold PID integral component PID HLD i Activate the limit switch at start pc LS 5 i Startireset SIR 5 j Switch to the serial pulse SPRM 5 receiving j Enter the return mode RTN 5 j Enable overload stop OLS 5 Run forward FWD 99 Run reverse REV Setting the value of 1000s in parentheses shown above assigns a negative logic input to a terminal Note In the case of THR and STOP data 1009 and 1030 are for normall logic and 9 and 30 are for negative logic respectively 5 These are available on inverters with inverter s ROM version 0700 or later For the version checking procedure refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 6 C codes Control Functions Refer Code Name Data setting range ing Default 1 ment setting page C01 Jump Frequency 1 0 0 to 400 0 C02 C03 0 01 Coa C05 _ Multi Frequency 0 00 to 400 00 1 Hz C06 CO7 C08 Cos C10 ci C12 C13 C14 C15 Y C16 Y 0 00 C17 C18 C19 15 C Jogging Frequency a 0 07 5 55 E lt o 4 Enable C30 Frequency Command 2 0 UP DOWN keys on keypad Voltage in
159. down was caused by a program other than a program supplied by this company or the results from using such a program The breakdown was caused by modifications or repairs affected by a party other than Fuji Electric The breakdown was caused by improper maintenance or replacement using consumables etc specified in the operation manual or catalog etc The breakdown was caused by a chemical or technical problem that was not foreseen when making practical application of the product at the time it was purchased or delivered The product was not used in the manner the product was originally intended to be used The breakdown was caused by a reason which is not this company s responsibility such as lightning or other disaster eS Q 2 Furthermore the warranty specified herein shall be limited to the purchased or delivered product alone 3 The upper limit for the warranty range shall be as specified in item 1 above and any damages damage to or loss of machinery or equipment or lost profits from the same etc consequent to or resulting from breakdown of the purchased or delivered product shall be excluded from coverage by this warranty 3 Trouble diagnosis As a rule the customer is requested to carry out a preliminary trouble diagnosis However at the customer s request this company or its service network can perform the trouble diagnosis on a chargeable basis In this case the customer is asked to assume the burd
160. e at base frequency F05 and A03 to 0 to improve braking ability 6 Malfunction caused by noise 3 Undervoltage Problem Possible Causes 1 Amomentary power failure occurred Check if the DC link bus voltage was below the protective level when the alarm occurred gt Improve noise control For details refer to Appendix A of the FRENIC Multi User s Manual gt Enable the Auto reset H04 gt Connect a surge absorber to the coil or solenoid of the magnetic contactor causing the noise DC link bus voltage was below the undervoltage detection level What to Check and Suggested Measures gt Reset the alarm gt If you want to restart running the motor by not treating this condition as an alarm set F14 to 4 or 5 depending on the load 2 The power to the inverter was switched back on too soon with F14 1 Check if the power to the inverter was switched back on although its control PCB was still operating Check whether the LEDs on the keypad light gt Switch the power ON again after all LEDs on the keypad go off 3 The power supply voltage did not reach the range of the inverter s specifications CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax Measure the input voltage gt Increase the voltage to within that of the specifications 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 12 Possible Causes 4 Peripheral equipment
161. e Covers For Inverters with a Capacity of 15 and 20 HP When mounting the main circuit terminal block cover fit it according to the guide on the inverter Insert the main circuit terminal block cover by fitting the part labeled GUIDE according to the guide on the inverter Push where PUSH are labeled to snap it into the inverter Note Figure 2 8 Mounting the Main Circuit Terminal Block Cover For Inverters with a Capacity of 15 and 20 HP 2 6 2 3 2 Terminal arrangement diagram and screw specifications The table below shows the main circuit screw sizes tightening torque and terminal arrangements Note that the terminal arrangements differ according to the inverter types Two terminals designed for grounding shown as the symbol G in Figures A to E make no distinction between a power supply source a primary circuit and a motor a secondary circuit 1 Arrangement of the main circuit terminals Table 2 4 Main Circuit Terminal Properties Power Nominal Terminal Tightening Ground Tightening supply apps Inverter type screw torque ing screw torque Refer to voltage HP size Ib in N m size Ib in N m 1 8 FRNF12E1M 2U 1 4 FRNF25E1 2U 10 6 10 6 M3 5 M3 5 Fi A 1 2 FRNF50E10 2U 1 2 1 2 a 1 FRN001E1W 2U 2 FRN002E1W 2U JES fe 3 FRN003E1W 2U M4 1 8 M4 1 8 Figure B 5 FRN
162. e and check whether the problem persists 2 The desired menu is not displayed Possible Causes 1 The limiting menus function was not selected appropriately Check and Measures Check the data of function code E52 Keypad Menu display mode gt Change the data of function code E52 so that the desired menu can be displayed 3 Data of function codes cannot be changed Possible Causes 1 An attempt was made to change function code data that cannot be changed when the inverter is running What to Check and Suggested Measures Check if the inverter is running with Menu 3 Drive Monitoring using the keypad and then confirm whether the data of the function codes can be changed when the motor is running by referring to the function code tables gt Stop the motor then change the data of the function codes The data of the function codes is protected S Check the data of function code F00 Data Protection gt Change the setting of FOO from 1 or 3 to O or 2 3 The WE KP command Enable data change with keypad is not input though it has been assigned to a digital input terminal Check the data of function codes E01 E02 E03 E04 E05 E98 and E99 and the input signals with Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad gt Input a WE KP command through a digital input terminal 4 The key was not pressed Check whether you have pressed the key after changing the func
163. e interface PCB However if you remove the interface PCB be sure to mount the interface PCB by putting hooks provided on the interface PCB into the inverter until you have heard click sound Hooks Interface printed Aa f YS circuit board Baw J N interface PCB wo Y Figure 2 21 Mounting the Interface Printed Circuit Board Interface PCB 2 22 2 3 7 Setting up the slide switches A WARNING Before changing the switches turn OFF the power and wait more than five minutes Make sure that the LED monitor is turned OFF Further make sure using a circuit tester or a similar instrument that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P and N has dropped below the safe voltage 25 VDC An electric shock may result if this warning is not heeded as there may be some residual electric charge in the DC bus capacitor even after the power has been turned OFF E Switching the slide switches Switching the slide switches with excessive power the switches may be damaged Switching the slide switches using precision screwdriver etc and treat it without damages Do not switching the slide switches with an acute thing such as needles E Setting up the slide switches Switching the slide switches located on the control PCB and interface PCB allows you to customize the operation mode of the analog output terminals digital I O terminals and communications ports The locations of those switches a
164. e motor s driven by the inverter to be started stopped with the MC the frequency of the starting stopping operation should be once or less per hour The more frequent the operation the shorter operation life of the MC and capacitor s used in the DC link bus due to thermal fatigue caused by the frequent charging of the current flow If this is not necessary start stop the motor with the terminal commands FWD REV or with the keypad Main peripheral equipment E At the output secondary side Prevent externally turned around current from being applied to the inverter power output terminals U V and W unexpectedly An MC should be used for example if a circuit that switches the motor driving source between the inverter output and commercial factory power lines is connected to the inverter Note As application of high voltage external current to the inverter s output side may break the IGBTs MCs should be used in the power control system circuits to switch the motor drive power supply to the commercial factory power lines after the motor has come to a complete stop Also ensure that voltage is never mistakenly applied to the inverter output terminals due to unexpected timer operation or similar m Driving the motor using commercial power lines MCs can also be used to switch the power supply of the motor driven by the inverter to a commercial power supply CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www
165. e selection Data for H30 Frequency command Inverter itself F01 C30 Run command Inverter itself F02 Via RS 485 communications link standard Inverter itself F02 Inverter itself F01 C30 Via RS 485 communications link standard Via RS 485 communications link standard Via RS 485 communications link standard Via RS 485 communications link option card Inverter itself F02 Via RS 485 communications link option card Via RS 485 communications link standard Inverter itself F01 C30 Via RS 485 communications link option card Via RS 485 communications link standard Via RS 485 communications link option card Via RS 485 communications link option card Via RS 485 communications link option card Command sources specified by y98 Data for y98 Run command Follow H30 data Follow H30 data Via field bus option Via field bus option Frequency command Follow H30 data Via field bus option Follow H30 data Via field bus option Combination of command sources Frequency command Inverter itself Inverter itself H30 0 y98 0 Via RS 485 communications link standard H30 1 y98 0 Via RS 485 communications link option card H30 4 y98 0 Via field bus option H30 0 1 or 4 y98 1 Via RS 485 communications link standard H30 2 y98 0 H30 3 y98 0 H30 5 y98 0
166. e terminal screws to the recommended torque 4 Asingle phase motor has been connected gt Single phase motors cannot be used Note that the FRENIC Multi only drives three phase induction motors 6 GH Heat sink overheat Problem Possible Causes Temperature around heat sink rose What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 Temperature around the Measure the temperature around the inverter inverter exceeded that of inverter specifications gt Lower the temperature around the inverter e g ventilate the panel well 2 Air vent is blocked Check if there is sufficient clearance around the inverter gt Increase the clearance Check if the heat sink is not clogged gt Clean the heat sink 3 Accumulated running time of the cooling fan exceeded the standard period for replacement or the cooling fan malfunctioned 4 Load was too heavy Check the cumulative running time of the cooling fan Refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information Maintenance Information gt Replace the cooling fan Visually check whether the cooling fan rotates abnormally gt Replace the cooling fan Measure the output current gt Lighten the load e g lighten the load before the overload protection occurs using the overload early warning E34 In winter the load tends to increase gt Decease the motor sound carrier frequency F26 gt Enable t
167. ect operators service personnel and the general populace from fires and other accidents in the USA cUL certification means that UL has given certification for products to clear CSA Standards cUL certified products are equivalent to those compliant with CSA Standards 10 1 2 Considerations when using FRENIC Multi in systems to be certified by UL and cUL If you want to use the FRENIC Multi series of inverters as a part of UL Standards or CSA Standards cUL certified certified product refer to the related guidelines described on page viii 10 2 Compliance with European Standards The CE marking on Fuji products indicates that they comply with the essential requirements of the Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Directive 89 336 EEC and Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC issued by the Council of the European Communities If connected with a specified external EMC filter Fuji inverters that bear a CE marking but have no built in EMC filter become compliant with these EMC Directives Inverters that bear a CE marking are compliant with the Low Voltage Directive The products comply with the following standards Low Voltage Directive EN50178 1997 EMC Directives EN61800 3 2004 Immunity Second environment Industrial Emission See below Capacity of inverter 3 HP or below 5 HP 7 5 HP or above Three phase External Category C2 230 V class series Built in Category C2 Category C3 EMC filter Three phase External Category C3 4
168. ed below The inverter runs the motor with those codes that should be properly configured Function code name For Motor 1 For Motor 2 Maximum Frequency F03 A01 Base Frequency F04 A02 Rated voltage at Base Frequency F05 A03 Maximum Output Voltage F06 A04 Torque Boost F09 A05 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor F10 A06 Select motor characteristics Overload detection level F11 A07 Thermal time constant F12 A08 DC Braking Braking starting frequency F20 A09 Braking level F21 A10 Braking time F22 A11 Starting Frequency F23 A12 Load Selection Auto Torque Boost Auto Energy Saving Operation F37 A13 Control Mode Selection F42 A14 Motor No of poles P01 A15 Rated capacity P02 A16 Rated current P03 A17 Auto tuning P04 A18 Online tuning P05 A19 No load current P06 A20 R1 P07 A21 X P08 A22 Slip compensation gain for driving P09 A23 Slip compensation response time P10 A24 Slip compensation gain for braking P11 A25 Rated slip frequency P12 A26 Motor Selection P99 A39 Slip Compensation Operating conditions H68 A40 Output Current Fluctuation Damping Gain for Motor H80 A41 Cumulative Motor Run Time H94 A45 Startup Times of Motor H44 A46 5 45 Motor 2 imposes functional restrictions on the following function codes Confirm the settings of those function codes
169. elected frequency Other than multi frequency C05 Multi frequency 1 C06 Multi frequency 2 C07 Multi frequency 3 C08 Multi frequency 4 C09 Multi frequency 5 C10 Multi frequency 6 C11 C12 Multi frequency 8 C13 Multi frequency 9 C14 Multi frequency 1 Multi frequency 7 0 1 C15 Multi frequency 1 C16 Multi frequency 12 C17 Multi frequency 13 C18 Multi frequency 14 C19 Multi frequency 15 E Select ACC DEC time RT1 Function code data 4 This terminal command switches between ACC DEC time 1 F07 F08 and ACC DEC time 2 E10 E11 If no RT1 command is assigned ACC DEC time 1 F07 F08 takes effect by default Input i aa le Acceleration deceleration time OFF Acceleration deceleration time 1 F07 F08 ON Acceleration deceleration time 2 E10 E11 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 42 Enable 3 wire operation HLD Function code data 6 Turning this terminal command ON self holds the forward FWD or reverse REV run command issued with it to enable 3 wire inverter operation Short circuiting the terminals between HLD and CM i e when HLD is ON self holds the first FWD or REV command at its leading edge Turning HLD OFF releases the self holding When HLD is not as
170. en for charges levied in accordance with this company s fee schedule 2 Exclusion of liability for loss of opportunity etc Regardless of whether a breakdown occurs during or after the free of charge warranty period this company shall not be liable for any loss of opportunity loss of profits or damages arising from special circumstances secondary damages accident compensation to another company or damages to products other than this company s products whether foreseen or not by this company which this company is not be responsible for causing CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 10 3 Repair period after production stop spare parts supply period holding period Concerning models products which have gone out of production this company will perform repairs for a period of 7 years after production stop counting from the month and year when the production stop occurs In addition we will continue to supply the spare parts required for repairs for a period of 7 years counting from the month and year when the production stop occurs However if it is estimated that the life cycle of certain electronic and other parts is short and it will be difficult to procure or produce those parts there may be cases where it is difficult to provide repairs or supply spare parts even within this 7 year period For details please confirm at our company s business of
171. ent of the motor gt Reconsider and change the data of function codes F11 and A07 3 The acceleration deceleration time was too short Check that the motor generates enough torque for acceleration deceleration This torque is calculated from the moment of inertia for the load and the acceleration deceleration time Increase the acceleration deceleration time F07 F08 E10 E11 and H56 4 Load was too heavy 11 GL Overload Problem Possible Causes 1 Temperature around the inverter exceeded that of inverter specifications Measure the output current gt Lighten the load e g lighten the load before overload occurs using E34 Overload Early Warning In winter the load tends to increase Temperature inside inverter rose abnormally What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the temperature around the inverter gt Lower the temperature e g ventilate the panel well 2 The torque boost setting F09 and A05 was too high Check the setting of F09 and A05 Torque Boost and make sure that lowering it would not cause the motor to stall gt Adjust the setting of F09 and A05 3 The acceleration deceleration time was too short Recalculate the required acceleration deceleration torque and time from the moment of inertia for the load and the deceleration time gt Increase the acceleration deceleration time F07 F08 E10 E11 and H56 4 Load was
172. eous keying b A O keys from 0 to P and f a A keys from P to 0 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 13 y codes Link Functions RS 485 Communication Standard Station address Communications error processing Timer Baud rate Data length Parity check Stop bits No response error detection time Response interval Protocol selection RS 485 Communication Option Station address Communications error processing Timer Baud rate Data length Parity check Stop bits No response error detection time Response interval Protocol selection Bus Link Function Mode selection Loader Link Function Mode selection CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 0 Immediately trip with alarm 4 1 Trip with alarm after running for the period specified by timer y03 2 Retry during the period specified by timer y03 If the retry fails trip with alarm E If it succeeds continue to run 3 Continue to run 0 0 to 60 0 0 2400 bps 1 4800 bps 2 9600 bps 3 19200 bps 4 38400 bps 0 None 2 stop bits for Modbus RTU 1 Even parity 1 stop bit for Modbus RTU 2 Odd parity 1 stop bit for Modbus RTU 3 None 1 stop bit for Modbus RTU 0 No detection 1 to 60 0 00 to 1 00 0 07 T 0 0 to 60 0 A i
173. equency 1 specified by F23 The inverter stops its output when the output frequency reaches the stop frequency specified by F25 Set the starting frequency to a level at which the motor can generate enough torque for startup Generally set the motor s rated slip frequency as the starting frequency In addition F24 specifies the holding time for the starting frequency 1 in order to compensate for the delay time for the establishment of a magnetic flux in the motor F39 specifies the holding time for the stop frequency in order to stabilize the motor speed at the stop of the motor If the starting frequency is lower than the stop frequency the inverter will not output Note any power as long as the reference frequency does not exceed the stop frequency Output frequency Starting Stop frequency 1 frequency Holding time Holding time F24 F39 Starting _ gt lg p Stop 1 I frequency f I F25 frequency 1 F23 Time Inverter Out of running Out of running running state Gate OFF In running Gate ON Gate OFF Time F26 F27 Motor Sound Carrier frequency and tone E Motor sound Carrier frequency F26 F26 controls the carrier frequency so as to reduce an audible noise generated by the motor or electromagnetic noise from the inverter itself and to decrease a leakage current from the main output secondary wirings Carrier frequency 0 75 to 15 kHz Motor sound noise emis
174. equency reaches the zone defined by Reference frequency Hysteresis width specified by E30 the Frequency arrival signal FAR comes ON After the delay time specified by E29 the Frequency arrival signal 2 FAR2 comes ON For details about the operation timings refer to the graph below Frequency command Change the bequercy comenand Reference frequency 1 EJO janaan pe ee ee eee Reference bequency 1 Reference equancy 1 E30 pmm 9 lt lt Reterence troquency 2 Reference toquercy 2 E30 jm frr _ m h i i t i Se ey f i i i i i i Frequency arrival signal FAR ON Frequency arrival b Frequency i dolay ome E29 gt arrival daiay oo Frequency arrival signal 2 FARZ ON ON E34 E35 Overload Early Warning Current Detection Level and Timer E37 E38 Current Detection 2 Level and Timer These function codes define the detection level and time for the Motor overload early warning OL Current detected ID and Current detected 2 D2 output signals E Motor overload early warning signal OL The OL signal is used to detect a symptom of an overload condition alarm code i _ of the motor so that the user can take an appropriate action before the alarm actually happens The OL signal turns ON when the inverter output current has exceeded the level specified by E34 In typical cases set E34 data to 80 to 90 against F11 data Electronic
175. er and also for connection of the signal cable of an RS 485 Communications As with the motor clamp the shield wire firmly to a grounded plate See Figure 10 2 10 2 4 In the case of FRNOO1E1E 7U motor cable shall be wired through the ring core that comes with the inverter and the ring core shall be fixed by the EMC grounding flange Aine core EMC Grounding Fianse for EMC comPi lance Fieety clae the shields Motor cadie shigiaed inut wires Control wires shieiced For FRNOO1E1E 7U a ring core comes with the inverter Figure 10 2 Connecting Shielded Cables 5 If noise from the inverter exceeds the permissible level enclose the inverter and its peripherals within a metal enclosure as shown in Figure 10 3 Connect the shielding layer of shielded cable to the motor and enclosure electrically and ground the motor and enclosure Note Metal Enclosure MCCB or RCD GFCI Power supply FRENIC Multi LU R L1 L UO Three or single phase Shielded cable with overcurrent protection Figure 10 3 Installing the EMC Filter Built in Type of Inverters into a Metal Enclosure CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 10 3 E In the case of inverters with an external EMC compliant filter optional 1 Install the inverter and the filter on a grounded metal plate Use a shielded cable also for connecti
176. eral equipment causes the inverter to malfunction follow the basic measures outlined below 1 If noise generated from the inverter affects the other devices through power wires or grounding wires Isolate the grounded metal frames of the inverter from those of the other devices Connect a noise filter to the inverter power wires Isolate the power system of the other devises from that of the inverter with an insulated transformer 2 If induction or radio noise generated from the inverter affects other devices through power wires or grounding wires Isolate the main circuit wires from the control circuit wires and other device wires Put the main circuit wires through a metal conduit pipe and connect the pipe to the ground near the inverter Install the inverter into the metal switchboard and connect the whole board to the ground Connect a noise filter to the inverter power wires 3 When implementing measures against noise generated from peripheral equipment For the control signal wires use twisted or shielded twisted wires When using shielded twisted wires connect the shield of the shielded wires to the common terminals of the control circuit or ground Connect a surge absorber in parallel with magnetic contactor s coils or other solenoids if any 3 Leakage current A high frequency current component generated by insulated gate bipolar transistors IGBTs switching ON OFF inside the inverter becomes leakage cu
177. erials from getting into the inverter or from accumulating on the heat sink Otherwise a fire or an accident might result Do not install or operate an inverter that is damaged or lacking parts Doing so could cause fire an accident or injuries Do not get on a shipping box Do not stack shipping boxes higher than the indicated information printed on those boxes Doing so could cause injuries Wiring A WARNING When wiring the inverter to the power supply insert a recommended molded case circuit breaker MCCB or residual current operated protective device RCD a ground fault circuit interrupter GFCI with overcurrent protection Use the devices within the recommended current range e Use wires in the specified size When wiring the inverter to the power supply that is 500 kVA or more be sure to connect an optional DC reactor DCR Otherwise fire could occur Do not use one multicore cable in order to connect several inverters with motors Do not connect a surge killer to the inverter s output secondary circuit Doing so could cause fire Ground the inverter in compliance with the national or local electric code Otherwise electric shock could occur Qualified electricians should carry out wiring Be sure to perform wiring after turning the power OFF Otherwise electric shock could occur Be sure to perform wiring after installing the inverter body Otherwise electric shock or i
178. erted ON OFF logical value 1 true 0 false state of input or output signal An active ON signal the function takes effect if the terminal is short circuited in the normal logic system is functionally equivalent to active OFF signal the function takes effect if the terminal is opened in the negative logic system An active ON signal can be switched to active OFF signal and vice versa with the function code data setting To set the negative logic system for an I O terminal enter data of 1000s by adding 1000 to the data for the normal logic in the corresponding function code Some signals cannot switch to active OFF depending upon their assigned functions Example Coast to a stop command BX assigned to any of digital input terminals X1 to X5 using any of function codes E01 through E05 Function code data BX 7 Turning BX ON causes the motor to coast to a stop Active ON 1007 Turning BX OFF causes the motor to coast to a stop Active OFF CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 17 5 2 Overview of Function Codes This section provides an overview of the function codes frequently used for the FRENIC Multi series of inverter Q For details about the function codes given below and other function codes not given below refer to the FRENIC Multi User s Manual Chapter 9 FUNCTION CODES and the RS 485 Communications User s Manual
179. et function code E51 to 0 000 When the input watt hour exceeds 1000000 kWh it returns to 0 Input watt hour data Shows the value expressed by input watt hour kWh x E51 whose data range is 0 000 to 9999 Unit None Display range 0 001 to 9999 The data cannot exceed 9999 It will be fixed at 9999 once the calculated value exceeds 9999 Depending on the value of integrated input watt hour data the decimal point on the LED monitor shifts to show it within the LED monitors resolution To reset the integrated input watt hour data set function code E51 to 0 000 Number of RS 485 errors standard Shows the total number of errors that have occurred in standard RS 485 communication via the RJ 45 connector as standard since the power is turned ON Once the number of errors exceeds 9999 the count returns to 0 Content of RS 485 communication s error standard Shows the most recent error that has occurred in standard RS 485 communication in decimal format For error contents refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual Number of option errors Shows the total number of optional communications card errors since the power is turned ON Once the number of errors exceeds 9999 the count returns to 0 Inverter s ROM version Shows the inverter s ROM version as a 4 digit code Keypad s ROM version Shows the keypad s ROM version as a 4 digit code Number of RS 485 err
180. f displayed value the inverter is J key to switch key refer to Function code data for E43 Speed monitor and LED in Function code E48 specifies dicators what to be displayed on the LED monitor Output frequency before slip compensation cn ILIA mHz OA Okw Frequency actually being output Output frequency after slip compensation cn LIAM Frequency actually being output Reference frequency co LIAM Reference frequency being set MIT Motor speed SLA Output freq Hz utput frequency Hz x 4 P01 For motor 2 read P01 as A15 WWI ILILILI Load shaft speed Output frequency Hz x E50 WWII Line speed ikiiki Output frequency Hz x E50 Constant feeding rate time E50 Output frequency Hz x E39 Output current Current output from the inverter in RMS IWH 1 CLL Output voltage 2 Voltage output from the inverter in RMS Calculated torque Motor output torque in Calculated value Wy faie Input power 3 4 Input power to the inverter CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Monitor items PID command 3 4 Display sample on the LED monitor 1 HIWI Table 3 3 Monitoring Items Continued LED indicator m ON O OFF OHz OA Okw PID feedback amount 3 5 OHz OA Okw Meanin
181. f the PI controller in the current limiter of the current limit control block shown in FRENIC Multi User s Manual Chapter 4 Section 4 4 Figure 4 3 1 The PI constant is prefixed inside the inverter i T Not If the frequency fall rate is too high regeneration may take place at the moment the Jote motor rotation matches the inverter output frequency causing an overvoltage trip On the contrary if the frequency fall rate is too low the time required for the output frequency to match the motor speed duration of current limiting action may be prolonged triggering the inverter overload prevention control F15 F16 Frequency Limiter High and Low H63 Low Limiter Mode selection F15 and F16 specify the upper and lower limits of the output frequency respectively H63 specifies the operation to be carried out when the reference frequency drops below the low level specified by F16 as follows If H63 0 the output frequency will be held at the low level specified by F16 If H63 1 the inverter decelerates to stop the motor When you change the frequency limiter High F15 in order to raise the f Note reference frequency be sure to change the maximum frequency F03 A01 lt accordingly e Maintain the following relationship among the data for frequency control F15 gt F16 F15 gt F23 A12 and F15 gt F25 F03 A01 gt F16 where F23 A12 is of the starting frequency and F25 is of the stop frequen
182. f the watch rings and other metallic matter before starting work e Use insulated tools e Never modify the inverter Electric shock or injuries could occur 7 1 Daily Inspection Visually inspect errors in the state of operation from the outside without removing the covers while the inverter operates or while it is turned ON Check if the expected performance satisfying the standard specification is obtained Check if the surrounding environment satisfies Chapter 2 Section 2 1 Operating Environment Check that the LED monitor displays normally Check for abnormal noise odor or excessive vibration Check for traces of overheat discoloration and other defects 7 2 Periodic Inspection Perform periodic inspection by the following items of the list of periodic inspection in Table 7 1 Before performing periodic inspection be sure to stop the motor turn OFF the inverter and shut down power supply Then remove the covers of the control and main circuit terminal blocks Table 7 1 List of Periodic Inspections Check part Check item How to inspect Evaluation criteria Environment 1 Check the ambient temperature 1 Check visually or 1 The standard humidity vibration and measure using specification must atmosphere dust gas oil mist or apparatus be satisfied water drops 2 Check if tools or other foreign 2 Visual inspection 2 No foreign or materials or dangerous objects are dangerous objects left around
183. fice or our service office 4 Transfer rights In the case of standard products which do not include settings or adjustments in an application program the products shall be transported to and transferred to the customer and this company shall not be responsible for local adjustments or trial operation 5 Service contents The cost of purchased and delivered products does not include the cost of dispatching engineers or service costs Depending on the request these can be discussed separately 6 Applicable scope of service Above contents shall be assumed to apply to transactions and use of the country where you purchased the products Consult the local supplier or Fuji for the detail separately CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 11 Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS 8 1 Standard Models 8 1 1 Three phase 230 V class series Rem Specifications TepeFHN___ 13 20 Fiz ras Fe one on cos cor 0w on a20 4 4 4 4 4 Apo cstts motor tstrg 1P 4 w us 2 t BE E R ee Rated caoat Ava 2 os of 12 20 33 s os o Er Rated wotage V 2 Teveghan BO ta DOO V eh A Aneto oe T ts T 30 50 a0 T vw T 3s T s T T eo Rated current A i n mna as w2 eo Oey nas ms or iaa n Overtaad capatsity 150 of ramad carver ty 1 rn 200 t OS e i Rated topory Ha mr i VeitageTeqvencsy seun
184. fies what is output to analog output terminal FM Data for F31 FM output Output frequency before slip compensation Function Monitor the following Output frequency of the inverter Equivalent to the motor synchronous speed Meter scale Full scale at 100 Maximum frequency F03 A01 Output frequency after slip compensation Output frequency of the inverter Maximum frequency F03 A01 Output current Output current RMS of the inverter Twice the inverter rated current Output voltage Output voltage RMS of the inverter 250 V for 230 V class series 500 V for 460 V class series Output torque Motor shaft torque Twice the rated motor torque Load factor Load factor Equivalent to the indication of the load meter Twice the rated motor load Input power Input power of the inverter Twice the rated output of the inverter PID feedback amount PV Feedback amount under PID control 100 of the feedback amount PG feedback value Feedback value of closed loop control through the PG interface Maximum speed 100 of the feedback value DC link bus voltage DC link bus voltage of the inverter 500 V for 230 V class series 1000 V for 460 V class series Universal AO Command via communications link Refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual 20000 as 100 Motor output Motor output kW Twice the rate
185. frequency After slip compensation Reference frequency Motor speed in r min Load shaft speed in r min Line speed in m min Constant feeding rate time E50 Coefficient for Speed Indication 0 01 to 200 00 1 ines 5 53 E51 Bf Keypad Menu display mode 0 Function code data editing mode Menus 0 and 1 1 Function code data check mode Menu 2 2 Fullmenu mode Menus 0 through 6 E59 Terminal C1 Signal Definition 0 Current input C1 function 4 to 20 mADC 5 53 C1 V2 Function 1 Voltage input V2 function 0 to 10 VDC E61 Terminal 12 Extended Function Selecting function code data assigns the corresponding function to 5 54 terminals 12 and C1 C1 V2 function as listed below E62 Terminal C1 Extended Function 0 None C1 function 1 Auxiliary frequency command 1 E63 Terminal C1 Extended Function Auxiliary frequency command 2 V2 function PID command 1 PID feedback amount E65 The shaded function codes 77 are applicable to the quick setup 1 When you make settings from the keypad the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can display Example If the setting range is from 200 00 to 200 00 the incremental unit is 4 for 200 to 100 0 1 for 99 9 to 10 0 and for 100 0 to 200 0 and 0 01 for 9 99 to 0 01 and for 0 00 to 99 99 3 These function codes are for use with an optional multi function keypad 5 These are available on i
186. frequency command 1 is selected as a manual speed command when disabling the frequency setting command via communications link or multi frequency command switching the LED monitor to the speed monitor in Running mode enables you to modify the frequency command with the AIM keys In Programming or Alarm mode the AIO keys are disabled to modify the frequency command You need to switch to Running mode Table 3 5 lists the combinations of the commands and the figure illustrates how the manual speed command 1 entered via the keypad is translated to the final frequency command The setting procedure is the same as that for setting of a usual frequency command Table 3 5 Manual Speed Frequency Command Specified with A Q Keys and Requirements Communi LED Frequency Multi Multi cations Cancel PID monitor command 1 frequency frequency link control E43 F01 SS2 SSs1 operation Hz PID LE PID control Mode selection J01 Pressing a Q keys controls OFF PID output PID as final frequency enabled command Manual speed frequency command set by keypad OFF PID output PID as final frequency enabled command ON PID disabled Other than the above Manual speed ON PID disabled frequency command currently selected 0 F01 0 Link disabled OFF Manual speed command from keypad S2 SS1 OFF Rosso Frequency setting other T than above l
187. function code F14 is either 0 or q What to Check and Suggested Measures Check if an undervoltage trip occurs gt Change the data of function code F14 Restart mode after momentary power failure Mode selection to 4 or 5 2 The run command stayed off even after power has been restored Check the input signal with Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad gt Check the power recovery sequence with an external circuit If necessary consider the use of a relay that can keep the run command on While in 3 wire operation the power source to the inverter s control PCB went down because of a long momentary power failure or the HOLD signal was turned OFF once gt Change the design or the setting so that a run command can be issued again within 2 seconds after power has been restored 8 The inverter does not run as expected Possible Causes 1 Wrong configuration of function codes What to Check and Suggested Measures Check that all function codes are correctly configured gt Correct the configuration of the function codes Make a note of function code data currently configured and initialize all function code data H03 gt After initialization reconfigure the necessary function codes one by one checking the running status of the inverter 6 2 2 Problems with inverter settings 1 Nothing appears on the LED monitor Possible Causes 1 No power supplied to the inverte
188. g e Areactor is inserted between the motor and the inverter J For details of auto tuning refer to Section 4 1 3 Preparation before running the motor for a test Setting function code data P05 Motor 1 Online tuning The primary and secondary resistances R1 and R2 will change as the motor temperature rises P05 allows you to tune this change when the inverter is in operation online P06 PO7 P08 P12 Motor 1 No load current R1 X and Motor 1 Rated slip frequency P06 through P08 and P12 specify no load current R1 X and rated slip frequency respectively Obtain the appropriate values from the test report of the motor or by calling the manufacturer of the motor Performing auto tuning automatically sets these parameters E No load current P06 Enter the value obtained from the motor manufacturer E R1 P07 Enter the value calculated by the following expression R1 Cable R1 PRISA V 43x1 x100 5 56 where R1 Primary resistance of the motor Q Cable R1 Resistance of the output cable Q V Rated voltage of the motor V l Rated current of the motor A E X P08 Enter the value calculated by the following expression _ X1 X2 x XM X2 XM Cable X ae V1 J3 x1 x 100 where X1 Primary leakage reactance of the motor Q X2 Secondary leakage reactance of the motor converted to primary Q XM Exciting reactance of the motor Q Cable X React
189. g of displayed value PID command feedback amount transformed to that of virtual physical value of the object to be controlled e g temperature Refer to function codes E40 and E41 for details Function code E43 Timer Timer operation 3 OHz OA Okw Remaining time of timer opera tion PID output 3 4 NWI MILLI OHz OA Okw PID output in maximum frequency being at 100 For motor 2 read F03 as A01 the F03 as Load factor 6 OHz OA Okw Load factor of the motor in as the rated output being at 100 Motor output T OHz OA mkw Motor output in kW 1 A value exceeding 9999 cannot be displayed on the 4 digit LED monitor screen appear instead 42 stands for the unit of the voltage V 3 When the LED monitor displays an output voltage the 7 segment letter vd in the PID command specified by function code J01 1 2 or 3 lowest digit These PID related items appear only when the inverter PID controls the motor according to a The Timer item appears only when the timer operation is enabled with function code C21 When the PID control or timer operation is disabled appear 4 attached to the lowest digit of the 7 segment letter blinks 5 lowest digit of the 7 segment letter lights 6 oy 7 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation
190. ge e Displaying I O signal status in hexadecimal format Each I O terminal is assigned to bit 15 through bit 0 as shown in Table 3 18 An unassigned bit is interpreted as 0 Allocated bit data is displayed on the LED monitor as four hexadecimal digits to each With the FRENIC Multi digital input terminals FWD and REV are assigned to bit 0 and bit 1 respectively Terminals X1 through X5 are assigned to bits 2 through 6 The bit is set to 1 when the corresponding input terminal is short circuited ON and is set to 0 when it is open OFF For example when FWD and X1 are ON short circuited and all the others are OFF open 17 75 is displayed on LED4 to LED1 Digital output terminal Y1 and Y2 are assigned to bits 0 and 1 Each bit is set to 1 when the terminal is short circuited with CMY and 0 when it is open The status of the relay contact output terminal 30A B C is assigned to bit 8 It is set to 1 when the circuit between output terminals 30A and 30C is closed and 0 when the circuit between 30A and 30C is open For example if Y1 is ON Y2 is OFF and the circuit between 30A and 30C is closed then 7 i is displayed on the LED4 to LED1 Table 3 18 presents an example of bit assignment and corresponding hexadecimal display on the 7 segment LED CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 21
191. gt Release the coast to stop command setting 10 Broken wire incorrect connection or poor contact with the motor Check the cabling and wiring Measure the output current gt Repair the wires to the motor or replace them 11 Overload Measure the output current gt Lighten the load In winter the load tends to increase Check that a mechanical brake is in effect gt Release the mechanical brake if any 12 Torque generated by the motor was insufficient Check that the motor starts running if the value of torque boost F09 and A05 is increased gt Increase the value of torque boost F09 and A05 and try to run the motor Check the data of function codes F04 F05 H50 through H53 A02 and A03 gt Change the V f pattern to match the motor s characteristics Check that the motor switching signal selecting the motor 2 or 1 is correct and the data of function codes matches each motor gt Correct the motor switching signal gt Modify function codes to match the connected motor Check whether the frequency command signal is below the slip compensated frequency of the motor gt Change the frequency command signal so that it becomes higher than the slip compensated frequency of the motor 13 Miss poor connection of the DC reactor DCR CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Check
192. h UL Standards and Canadian Standards cUL certification 10 1 100177 Genetal eoo derana 10 1 10 1 2 Considerations when using FRENIC Multi in systems to be certified by UL and cUL a 10 2 Compliance with European Standards 10 3 Compliance with EMC Standards 10 3 1 General 10 3 2 Recommended installation PIOGCUI6 ise e sence edie cee seins ek 10 2 10 3 3 Leakage current from EMC filter built in type inverters or inverters with an external EMC complaint filter optional sisi eee 10 5 10 4 Harmonic Component Regulation in the 10 4 1 General comments 10 4 2 Compliance with the harmonic component regulation 10 8 10 5 Compliance with the Low Voltage Directive 10 8 10 8 10 5 1 General 10 5 2 Points for consideration when using the FRENIC Multi series in a system to be certified by the Low Voltage Directive in the EU 10 8 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net xvii Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INVERTER 1 1 Acceptance Inspection Unpack the package and check the following 1 An inverter and accessories below are contained in the package Cooling fan fixing screws for inverters of 7 5 to 20 HP Keypad rear cover with fixing screws e Instruction manual this manual 2 The inverter has not been damaged during transportation there should be no dents or parts missing 3 The inverter is the model y
193. h the inverter s output torque limiter between torque limiter 1 F40 F41 and Tip torque limiter 2 E16 E17 use the terminal command TL2 TL1 assigned to a digital input terminal Refer to the descriptions of E01 to E05 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 36 The torque limiter and current limiter are very similar function each other If both are Note activated concurrently they may conflict each other and cause a hunting in the system Avoid concurrent activation of these limiters F42 Control Mode Selection 1 H68 Slip Compensation 1 Operating conditions F42 specifies the control mode of the inverter to control a motor Data for F42 Control mode V f control with slip compensation inactive Dynamic torque vector control V f control with slip compensation active V f control with optional PG interface Dynamic torque vector control with optional PG interface E v f control In this control the inverter controls a motor by the voltage and frequency according to the V f pattern specified by function codes E Slip compensation Applying any load to an induction motor causes a rotational slip due to the motor characteristics decreasing the motor rotation The inverter s slip compensation facility first presumes the slip value of the motor based on the motor torque generated and raises the output freque
194. he Y and V keys are disabled to change the current frequency command even in Running mode Pressing either of these keys just displays the current reference frequency When you start specifying the reference frequency or any other parameter with the S V key the least significant digit on the display blinks that is the cursor lies in the least significant digit Holding down the N V key changes data in the least significant digit and generates a carry while the cursor remains in the least significant digit After the least significant digit blinks by pressing the key holding down the es key for more than 1 second moves the cursor from the least significant digit to the most significant digit Further holding it down moves the cursor to the next lower digit This cursor movement allows you to easily move the cursor to the desired digit and change the data in higher digits By setting function code C30 to 0 AIO keys on keypad and selecting frequency command 2 you can also specify or change the frequency command in the same manner using the N V key You can set a reference frequency not only with the frequency Hz but also with other menu items motor speed load shaft speed line speed and constant feeding rate time depending on the setting of function code E48 3 4 5 or 6 as listed in Table 3 3 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctia
195. he amp key and releasing the alarm return the data of the relevant function codes such as the frequency commands PID commands timer value for the timer driven operation specified through the keypad or the output frequencies modified by the UP DOWN terminal commands when the power was switched OFF back to the original values and then restart the operation 3 The control circuit failed Check if occurs each time power is switched ON gt The control PCB on which the CPU is mounted is defective Contact your Fuji Electric representative CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 22 21 amp H Hardware error Problem Abnormality on the control PCB or related hardware Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 The interface PCB is Remove the interface PCB once and remount it into the card slot wrongly mounted until it clicks into place 2 The capacity is not set The inverter capacity needs to be modified again ew ante conto gt Contact your Fuji Electric representative 3 An abnormality is found Replacement of any boards with an hazard may be required in the interconnection between the control PCB power PCB and interface PCB gt Contact your Fuji Electric representative 4 Connection problem Either the control PCB or the option card needs to be replaced between the control gt Contact Fu
196. he inverter displays the alarm voltage code RS 485 When the inverter is connected to a communications network via EnF Yes communications error detection an optional RS 485 communications card detecting a communications error stops the inverter output and displays an ia optional error code Er Retry When the inverter has stopped because of a trip this function allows the inverter to automatically reset itself and restart You can specify the number of retries and the latency between stop and reset Surge Protects the inverter against surge voltages which might appear protection between one of the power lines for the main circuit and the ground Command loss detected Upon detecting a loss of a frequency command because of a broken wire etc this function issues an alarm and continues the inverter operation at the preset reference frequency specified as a ratio to the frequency just before the detection Not applicable CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 8 17 LED Alarm Name Description monitor output displays 30A B C Protection Upon detecting a momentary power failure lasting more than 15 against ms this function stops the inverter output momentary If restart after momentary power failure is selected this function invokes a restart process when power has been resto
197. he inverter in an Altitude 3300ft 1000 m max Note 3 environment where it may be exposed to cotton waste or moist dust or dirt which will Atmospheric 86 to 106 kPa clog the heat sink in the inverter If the pressure inverter is to be used in such an environment install it in the panel of your system or other Vibration 0 12inch 3 mm 2 to less than 9 Hz dustproof containers Max amplitude 9 8 m s 9 to less than 20 Hz Note 3 If you use the inverter in an altitude 2 mis 20 to less than 55 Hz above 3300ft 1000 m you should apply an 4 m s2 55 to less than 200 Hz output current derating factor as listed in Table 2 2 2 2 Installing the Inverter Top 3 9inch 1 Mounting base The temperature of the heat sink will rise up to approx 90 C 194 F during operation of the inverter so the inverter should be mounted on a base made of material that can withstand temperatures of this level A WARNING Install the inverter on a base constructed from metal or other non flammable material A fire may result with other material Right 0 39inch 10mm 2 Clearances Ensure that the minimum clearances indicated in Figure 2 1 are maintained at all times When installing the inverter in the panel of your system take extra care with ventilation inside the panel as the temperature around the inverter will tend to increase Do not install the inverter in a small Figure 2 1 Mounting Direction and
198. he overload prevention control H70 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 14 7 G42 Alarm issued by an external device Problem External alarm was inputted THR when Enable external alarm trip THR is assigned to one of digital input terminals X1 through X5 FWD and REV Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 An alarm function of the external equipment was activated Inspect external equipment operation gt Remove the cause of the alarm that occurred 2 Connection has been performed incorrectly Check if the wire for the external alarm signal is correctly connected to the terminal to which the Alarm from external equipment has been assigned Any of E01 E02 E03 E04 E05 E98 and E99 is set to 9 gt Connect the wire for the alarm signal correctly 3 Incorrect settings Check if the Alarm from external equipment has not been assigned to an unused terminal E01 E02 E03 E04 E05 E98 or E99 gt Correct the assignment Check whether the assignment normal negative logic of the external signal agrees with that of thermal command THR set by E01 E02 E03 E04 E05 E98 and E99 gt Ensure that the polarity matches 8 GH Motor protection PTC thermistor Problem Possible Causes Temperature of the motor rose abnormally What to Check and Suggested
199. hooting procedures to be followed when the inverter malfunctions or detects an alarm condition In this chapter first check whether any alarm code is displayed or not and then proceed to the troubleshooting items Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION This chapter describes inspection measurement and insulation test which are required for safe inverter operation It also provides information about periodical replacement parts and guarantee of the product Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS This chapter lists specifications including output ratings control system external dimensions and protective functions Chapter 9 LIST OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT AND OPTIONS This chapter describes main peripheral equipment and options which can be connected to the FRENIC Multi series of inverters Chapter 10 COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARDS This chapter describes standards with which the FRENIC Multi series of inverters comply Icons The following icons are used throughout this manual Cnote This icon indicates information which if not heeded can result in the inverter not operating Chot to full efficiency as well as information concerning incorrect operations and settings which can result in accidents CTi This icon indicates information that can prove handy when performing certain settings or Crp operations QJ This icon indicates a reference to more detailed information XV Table of Content Preface Em Safety precautions m Precautions for use How
200. ht gt Match the V f pattern values with the motor ratings CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 4 Possible Causes 9 In the torque control mode the output frequency does not increase What to Check and Suggested Measures Check whether data of torque limiter related function codes F40 F41 E16 and E17 is correctly configured and the torque limit switching signal TL2 TL1 is correct gt Reconfigure data of F40 F41 E16 and E17 correctly or reset it to the factory default Switch correctly the torque switching terminal command TL2 TL1 10 Bias and gain set incorrectly Check the data of function codes F18 C50 C32 C34 C37 C39 C42 and C44 gt Readjust the bias and gain to appropriate values 3 The motor runs in the opposite direction to the command Possible Causes 1 Wiring has been connected to the motor incorrectly What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the wiring to the motor gt Connect terminals U V and W of the inverter to the respective U V and W terminals of the motor Incorrect connection and settings for run commands and rotation direction command FWD and REV S Check the data of function codes E98 and E99 and the connection to terminals FWD and REV gt Correct the data of the function codes and the connection The setting for the rotation dire
201. ht load is driven or a DC reactor is connected NO phase loss or line to line voltage unbalance may not be detected because of the relatively small stress on the apparatus connected to the main circuit EN Output phase loss protection 4 _ Bit 2 Upon detection of phase loss in the output while the inverter is running this feature stops the inverter and displays an alarm _ Where a magnetic contactor is installed in the inverter output circuit if the magnetic contactor goes OFF during operation all the phases will be lost In such a case this protection feature does not work Judgment threshold on the life of DC link bus capacitor Bit 3 Bit 3 is used to select the threshold for judging the life of the DC link bus capacitor between factory default setting and your own choice C Not Before specifying the threshold of your own choice measure and confirm the AD ote reference level in advance Judgment on the life of DC link bus capacitor Bit 4 Whether the DC link bus capacitor has reached its life is determined by measuring the length of time for discharging after power OFF The discharging time is determined by the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor and the load inside the inverter Therefore if the load inside the inverter fluctuates significantly the discharging time cannot be accurately measured and as a result it may be mistakenly determined that the life has been reached To avoid such an error you can
202. ies connect RJ 45 the power to the keypad through the pins specified below The or for connector extension cable for remote operation also uses wires connected to the these pins for supplying the keypad power keypad Remove the keypad from the standard RJ 45 connector and connect the RS 485 communications cable to control the inverter through the PC or PLC Programmable Logic Controller Refer to Section 2 3 7 Setting up the slide switches for setting of the terminating resistor Communication RJ 45 connector resistor SW3 R545 connector pin assignment Figure 2 20 RJ 45 Connector and its Pin Assignment Pins 1 2 7 and 8 are exclusively assigned to power lines for the standard keypad and multi function keypad so do not use those pins for any other equipment Route the wiring of the control circuit terminals as far from the wiring of the main circuit as Note possible Otherwise electric noise may cause malfunctions Fix the control circuit wires inside the inverter to keep them away from the live parts of the main circuit such as the terminal block of the main circuit The RJ 45 connector pin assignment on the FRENIC Multi series is different from that on the FVR E11S series Do not connect to the keypad of the FVR E11S series of inverter Doing so could damage the internal control circuit Cote Mounting the interface printed circuit board interface PCB ole Usually you do not need to remove th
203. ified with F12 Driving time of motor min F12 10 FI2 5 F12 0 5 0 50 100 150 200 Actual Output Current Overload Detection Level x 100 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 27 F14 H13 H14 H16 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Restart time Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Frequency fall rate Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Allowable momentary power failure time F14 specifies the action to be taken by the inverter such as trip and restart in the event of a momentary power failure E Restart mode after momentary power failure Mode selection F14 Data for F14 Disable restart Trip immediately Description As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the undervoltage detection level due to a momentary power failure the inverter issues undervoltage alarm and shuts down its output so that the motor enters a coast to stop state Disable restart Trip after recovery from power failure As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the undervoltage detection level due to a momentary power failure the inverter shuts down its output so that the motor enters a coast to stop state but it does not enter the undervoltage state or issue undervoltage alarm The moment the power is restored an undervoltage alarm i
204. igure D MHMHAH ee RILES Figure F Note 1 Filter oe Note 2 Note 1 Terminal screw type is listed in the table below Inverter type Screw type FRNOO7E1E 2U Cross FRNO10E1E 2U FRNO15E1E 2U Hxagon FRNO20E1E 2U FRNOO7E1E 4U Flat FRNO10E1E 4U FRNO15E1E 4U Cross FRNO20E1E 4U Note 2 Cables of EMC filter output are already connected to inverter input by factory default CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 8 2 The control circuit terminals common to all models CEECEE Screw size M3 Tightening torque 4 4 to 5 3 Ib in 0 5 to 0 6 N m Screwdriver type Flat screw driver 0 02 x 1 38 inch 0 6 x 3 5 mm Manufacturer of ferrules Phoenix Contact Inc Refer to Table 2 6 Table 2 6 Recommended Ferrule Terminals Screw size AWG24 0 25 mm Table 2 5 Control Circuit Terminal Block Allowable wire size AWG26 to AWG16 0 14 to 1 5 mm Wire strip length 0 24 inch 6 mm Type Dimension of openings in the control circuit terminals for ferrule for Europe type terminal block H 0 1 W x 0 07 H inch 2 51 W x 1 76 H mm Al0 25 6BU With insulated collar Without insulated collar 0 14 inch
205. igure this kind of circuit use a highly reliable relay Recommended product Fuji control relay Model HH54PW lt Control circuit gt lt Control circuit gt kd PLC PLC T tO SINK SINK Or swt TAL Tt SOURCE 1 X 1 SOURCE 1 CZI Xt to X5 X1 to X5 FWO REV Photocoupler FWD REV Photocoupler CM CM a With the switch turned to SINK b With the switch turned to SOURCE Figure 2 16 Circuit Configuration Using a Relay Contact C Tio m Using a programmable logic controller PLC to turn X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 C Tip FWD or REV ON or OFF Figure 2 17 shows two examples of a circuit that uses a programmable logic controller PLC to turn control signal input X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 FWD or REV ON or OFF In circuit a the slide switch SW1 has been turned to SINK whereas in circuit b it has been turned to SOURCE In circuit a below short circuiting or opening the transistor s open collector circuit in the PLC using an external power supply turns ON or OFF control signal X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 FWD or REV When using this type of circuit observe the following Connect the node of the external power supply which should be isolated from the PLC s power to terminal PLC of the inverter Do not connect terminal CM of the i
206. inals P1 and P Note The wiring length should be 10 m or below Chote Do not remove the jumper bar if a DC reactor DCR is not going to be used If a converter is connected you do not need to connect a DC reactor DCR A WARNING When wiring the inverter to the power supply that is 500 kVA or more be sure to connect an optional DC reactor DCR Otherwise fire could occur DC braking resistor terminals P and DB 1 Connect a DC braking resistor option to terminals P and DB 2 When using an external braking resistor arrange the inverter and braking resistor to keep the wiring length to 16ft 5 m or less and twist the two wires or route them together in parallel A WARNING Never insert a DC braking resistor between the terminals P and N P1 and N P and P1 DB and N or P1 and DB Doing so could cause fire CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 14 When a DC reactor DCR is not connected together with the braking resistor 1 Remove the screws from terminals P1 and P together with the jumper bar 2 Put the wire from terminal P of the braking resistor and the jumper bar on terminal P in this order then secure them with the screw removed in 1 above 3 Tighten the screw on terminal P1 4 Connect the wire from terminal DB of the braking resistor to the DB of the in
207. ing at a constant speed Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 The inverter output terminals were short circuited Remove the wires connected to the inverter output terminals U V and W and measure the interphase resistance of the wires Check if the resistance is too low gt Remove the part that short circuited including replacement of the wires relay terminals and motor CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 10 Possible Causes 2 Ground faults occurred at the inverter output terminals What to Check and Suggested Measures Remove the wires connected to the inverter output terminals U V and W and perform a Megger test gt Remove the part that short circuited including replacement of the wires relay terminals and motor 3 Loads were too heavy Measure the motor current with a measuring device and to trace the current trend Therefore use this information to judge if the trend is over the calculated load value for your system design gt If the load is too heavy decrease it or raise the inverter capacity Trace the current trend and check if there are any sudden changes in the current gt If there are any sudden changes make the load variation smaller or raise the inverter capacity gt Enable instantaneous overcurrent limiting H12 1 4 The value set for torque
208. ing time of the DC link bus capacitor and save the result in function code H47 Initial capacitance of DC link bus capacitor The condition under which the measurement has been conducted will be automatically collected and saved During the measurement will appear on the LED monitor 6 Switch ON the inverter again Confirm that H42 Capacitance of DC link bus capacitor and H47 Initial capacitance of DC link bus capacitor hold right values Move to Menu 5 Maintenance Information and confirm that the relative capacitance ratio to full capacitance is 100 E Note If the measurement has failed 0001 is entered into both H42 and H47 Check whether there has been any mistake in operation and conduct the measurement again To change the settings back to the state at the time of factory shipment set H47 Initial capacitance of DC link bus capacitor to 0002 the original values will be restored Hereafter each time the inverter is switched OFF the discharging time of the DC link bus capacitor is automatically measured if the above condition is met i Note The condition given above produces a rather large measurement error If this mode gives you a lifetime alarm set H98 Maintenance operation back to the default setting Bit 3 Specify service life criteria for replacing the DC link bus capacitor 0 and conduct the measurement under the condition at the time of factory shipment Electrolytic capacitors on
209. interrupter GFCI with overcurrent protection in the path of power supply Do not use the devices with the rated current out of the recommenced range Fire could occur CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 9 1 Name of peripheral Function and application equipment Magnetic An MC can be used at both the power input primary and output secondary contactor MC sides of the inverter At each side the MC works as described below When inserted in the output circuit of the inverter an MC can also switch the motor drive power supply between the inverter output and commercial power lines E At the power supply primary side Insert an MC in the power supply side of the inverter in order to 1 Forcibly cut off the inverter from the power supply generally commercial factory power lines with the protection function built into the inverter or with the terminal signal line 2 Stop the inverter operation in an emergency when the inverter cannot interpret the stop command due to internal external circuit failures 3 Cut off the inverter from the power supply when the MCCB inserted in the power supply side cannot cut it off for maintenance or inspection purpose If you are to use the MC for this purpose only it is recommended that you use an MC capable of turning the MC ON OFF manually Note When your system requires th
210. ion LED Monitor Description shows Cumulative run Shows the content of the cumulative power ON time counter of the time inverter Unit thousands of hours Display range 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 65 53 When the total ON time is less than 10000 hours display 0 001 to 9 999 data is shown in units of one hour 0 001 When the total time is 10000 hours or more display 10 00 to 65 53 it is shown in units of 10 hours 0 01 When the total time exceeds 65535 hours the counter will be reset to 0 and the count will start again DC link bus Shows the DC link bus voltage of the inverter main circuit voltage Unit V volts Max Shows the maximum temperature of the heat sink for every hour temperature of Unit C Temperatures below 20 C are displayed as 20 C heat sink Max effective Shows the maximum current in RMS for every hour output current Unit A amperes Capacitance of Shows the current capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor reservoir the DC link bus capacitor in based on the capacitance when shipping as 100 capacitor Refer to Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION for details Unit Cumulative run Shows the content of the cumulative run time counter of the electrolytic time of capacitors mounted on the printed circuit boards electrolytic Unit thousands of hours Display range 0 001 to 99 99 capacitors on the printed circuit boards When the total time exceeds 99990 hour
211. ipment e Remove the option card if already in use from the inverter e Incase another inverter is connected via the DC link bus to the P and N terminals of the main circuit disconnect the wires You do not need to disconnect a DC reactor optional if any e Incase the standard keypad has been replaced with an optional multi function keypad after the purchase put back the original standard keypad e Turn OFF all the digital input signals fed to terminals FWD REV and X1 through X5 of the control circuit e Ifa potentiometer is connected to terminal 13 disconnect it e f an external apparatus is attached to terminal PLC disconnect it e Ensure that transistor output signals Y1 and Y2 and relay output signals 30A B C will not be turned ON EC Note If negative logic is specified for the transistor output and relay output signals they are considered ON when the inverter is not running Specify positive logic for them e Keep the ambient temperature within 25 C 77 F 10 C 50 F 2 Switch ON the main circuit power 3 Confirm that the cooling fan is rotating and the inverter is in stopped state 4 Switch OFF the main circuit power 5 Start the measurement of the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor Make sure that appears on the LED monitor E Note If does not appear on the LED monitor the measurement will not start Check the conditions listed in 1 6 Once
212. ise from the motor If the sound level is set too high the output current may become unstable or Note mechanical vibration and noise may increase Also these function codes may not be very effective for certain types of motor F29 to F31 Analog Output FM Mode selection Voltage adjustment Function F Analog Output FM Pulse rate These function codes allow terminal FM to output monitored data such as the output frequency and the output current in an analog DC voltage or pulse pulse duty approximately 50 The magnitude of such analog voltage or pulse rate is adjustable E Mode selection F29 F29 specifies the property of the output to terminal FM You need to set switch SW6 on the interface printed circuit board PCB Refer to Chapter 2 Mounting and Wiring of the Inverter Position of slide switch SW6 Data for F29 Output form mounted on the interface PCB Voltage 0 to 10 VDC FMA function 2 Pulse 0 to 6000 p s FMP function FMP E Voltage adjustment F30 dedicated to FMA F30 allows you to adjust the output voltage or current representing the monitored data selected by F31 within the range of 0 to 300 F 200 FI0 100 F30 lt 50 Out of scale 10v T7 T 4 oe ii f ail FI0 33 Terminal FM output votage 300 Mator scale CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 35 E Function F31 F31 speci
213. ising edge of Insufficient braking torque may the current thereby preventing reverse result at the start of DC braking rotation at the start of DC braking Quick response Quickens the rising Reverse rotation may result edge of the current thereby accelerating depending on the moment of the build up of the braking torque inertia of the mechanical load and the coupling mechanism lt It is also possible to use an external digital input signal as an Enable DC braking K TIP terminal command DCBRK As long as the DCBRK command is ON the inverter performs DC braking regardless of the braking time specified by F22 Turning the DCBRK command ON even when the inverter is in a stopped state activates DC braking This feature allows the motor to be excited before starting resulting in smoother acceleration quicker build up of acceleration torque 5 33 In general specify data of function code F20 at a value close to the rated slip C Note frequency of motor If you set it at an extremely high value control may become unstable and an overvoltage alarm may result in some cases A CAUTION The DC brake function of the inverter does not provide any holding mechanism Injuries could occur F23 Starting Frequency 1 F24 Starting Frequency 1 Holding time F25 Stop Frequency F39 Stop Frequency Holding time At the startup of an inverter the initial output frequency is equal to the starting fr
214. itching the frequency command is chattering gt If the relay has a contact problem replace the relay 4 The connection between the inverter and the motor was too long Check whether auto torque boost or auto energy saving operation is enabled gt Perform auto tuning of the inverter for every motor to be used gt Enable load selection for higher startup torque F37 A13 1 and check for any vibration gt Make the output wire as short as possible 5 The inverter output is hunting due to vibration caused by low stiffness of the load Or the current is irregularly oscillating due to special motor parameters 5 Possible Causes If grating sound can b 1 The carrier frequency was set too low Once cancel all the automatic control systems auto torque boost auto energy saving operation overload prevention control current limiter torque limiter regenerative energy suppression auto search for idling motor speed slip compensation torque vector control and droop control overload stop function then check that the motor vibration comes to a stop gt Cancel the functions causing the vibration gt Readijust the data of the output current fluctuation damping gain H80 and A41 Check that the motor vibration is suppressed if you decrease the level of F26 Motor sound Carrier frequency or set F27 Motor sound Tone to 0 gt Decrease the carrier frequency F26 or set the tone to 0
215. ity on pages 5 15 and 5 16 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 8 H codes High Performance Functions H03 Data Initialization H04 Times H05 Reset interval H06 Cooling Fan ON OFF Control 0 Disable Always in operation 1 Enable ON OFF controllable i Change Code Name Data setting range nere Uniti when a ment copying runnin N Data 0 Disable initialization 1 Initialize all function code data to the factory defaults 2 Initialize motor 1 parameters 3 Initialize motor 2 parameters a HH H07 Acceleration Deceleration Pattern 0 Linear 1 S curve Weak 2 S curve Strong 3 _Curvilinear H08 Rotational Direction Limitation 0 Disable 1 Enable Reverse rotation inhibited 2 Enable Forward rotation inhibited H09 Starting Mode Auto search 0 Disable 1 Enable At restart after momentary power failure 2 Enable At restart after momentary power failure and at normal start H11 H12 instantaneous Overcurrent 0 Disable Limiting 1 Enable Mode selection H13 Restart Mode after Momentary Power 0 1 to 10 0 Failure Restart time H14 Frequency fall rate 0 00 Deceleration time selected by F08 0 01 to 100 00 999 Follow the current limit command H16 Allowable momentary 0 0 to 30 0 power failure time 999 Automatically determined by inverter H26 Thermistor Mode selection 0 Disable 1 En
216. ji Electri tati PCB and the option ontact your Fuji Electric representative card 5 Terminals 13 and 11 Check circuits wires hooking terminals 13 and 11 are short circuited with each other gt Remove all the parts causing the short circuit 22 Mock alarm Problem The LED displays the alarm Possible Causes 1 Data of the function code H45 has been set to 1 What to Check and Suggested Measures This setting makes the inverter issue a mock alarm Use this to check out the sequence related to an alarm occurrence gt To escape from this alarm state press the Ss key 23 LoF PID feedback wire break Problem The PID feedback wire is broken Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 The PID feedback Check whether the PID feedback signal wires are connected signal wire is broken correctly gt Check whether the PID feedback signal wires are connected correctly Or tighten up the related terminal screws gt Check whether any contact part bites the wire sheath 2 Ahigh intensity noise Check if appropriate noise control measures have been was given to implemented e g correct grounding and routing of signal wires somewhere in PID communication cables and main circuit wires feedback related gt Improve the countermeasures against the noise gt Separate signal wires from main power wires as far as possible circuits CTi Automation Phone 80
217. l When function code F01 is set to 0 keys on keypad and frequency command 1 is selected as a primary frequency command when disabling the frequency setting command via communications link and multi frequency command switching the LED monitor to the speed monitor in Running mode enables you to modify the frequency command with the V keys In Programming or Alarm mode the Aig keys are disabled to modify the frequency command You need to switch to Running mode Table 3 7 lists the combinations of the commands and the figure illustrates how the primary frequency command 1 entered via the keypad is translated to the final frequency command The setting procedure is the same as that for setting of a usual frequency command Table 3 7 Primary Frequency Command Specified with A Q Keys and Requirements Communi LED Frequency Multi Multi cations Cancel PID monitor command frequency frequency link control E43 1 F01 SS2 SS1 operation Hz PID LE PID control Mode selection J01 Pressing A Q keys controls OFF Final frequency PID command modified enabled by PID output ON Keypad primary PID command disabled Frequency OFF Final frequency PID command modified enabled by PID output Other than the above ON Current primary PID command disabled Frequency Link disabled F01 0 LE OFF SS2 SS1 OFF Primary frequency command from keypad
218. l C1 to C1 function Doing so could damage the internal control circuit Shielded wire lt Control circuit gt External device capacitor lt Control circuit gt analog output 0 022 uF nal 50V na 12 A 11 Ferrite core Pass the same phase wires through or turn them around the ferrite core 2 or 3 times Figure 2 13 Connection of Shielded Wire Figure 2 14 Example of Electric Noise Reduction Potentiometer Y 1kto5kQ X1 Digital 1 Various signals such as coast to stop alarm from external equipment input 1 and multi frequency commands can be assigned to terminals X1 to X5 FWD and REV by setting function codes E01 to E05 E98 and X2 Digital E99 For details refer to Chapter 5 Section 5 2 Overview of Function input 2 Codes x3 Digital Input mode i e SINK SOURCE is changeable by using the internal slide switch Refer to Section 2 3 7 Setting up the slide switches Switches the logic value 1 0 for ON OFF of the terminals X1 to X5 X4 Digital FWD or REV If the logic value for ON of the terminal X1 is 1 in the input 4 normal logic system for example OFF is 1 in the negative logic system and vice versa input 3 X5 Digital input 5 4 The negative logic system never applies to the terminals assigned for FWD and REV FWD Run Digital input circuit specifications forward Digital input
219. l commands you need to set frequency Note command 1 F01 or frequency command 2 C30 to 7 beforehand 5 47 m Enable communications link via RS 485 or field bus option LE Function code data 24 Turning this terminal command ON assigns priorities to frequency commands or run commands received via the RS 485 communications link H30 or the field bus option y98 No LE assignment is functionally equivalent to the LE being ON Refer to H30 Communications link function and y98 Bus link function m Enable auto search for idling motor speed at starting STM Function code data 26 This digital terminal command determines at the start of operation whether or not to search for idling motor speed and follow it Refer to H09 Starting mode E Force to stop STOP Function code data 30 Turning this terminal command OFF causes the motor to decelerate to a stop in accordance with the H56 data Deceleration time for forced stop After the motor stops the inverter enters the alarm state with the alarm 4 displayed E Run forward FWD Function code data 98 Turning this terminal command ON runs the motor in the forward direction turning it OFF decelerates it to stop EA This terminal command can be assigned only by E98 or E99 E Run reverse REV Function code data 99 Turning this terminal command ON runs the motor in the reverse direction turning it OFF decelerates it to stop EA This terminal command
220. le phase voltage input voltage may be output to inverter output terminals U V and W Turn OFF the power and wait more than five minutes Make sure that the LED monitor is turned OFF Further make sure using a multimeter or a similar instrument that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P and N has dropped below the safe voltage 25 VDC Electric shock may occur Follow the procedure below to solve problems 1 First check that the inverter is correctly wired referring to Chapter 2 Section 2 3 5 Wiring for main circuit terminals and grounding terminals 2 Check whether an alarm code is displayed on the LED monitor No alarm code appears on the LED monitor Abnormal motor operation Go bo Section 6 2 1 1 The motor does not rotate 2 The moter rotates but the speed does not increase 3 The moter runs in the opposite direction to the command 4 If the speed variation and current vibration such as hunting occur at the constant speed 5 If grating sound can be heard 6 The motor does not accelerate and decelerate at the set time 7 Even if the power recovers after an instantaneous power failure the motor does not restart 8 The inverter does not run as expected Problems with inverter settings I Go bo Section 6 2 2 1 Nothing appears on the LED monitor 2 The desired menu is not displayed 3 Data of function codes cannot be changed Wan alarm code appears on the LED
221. ltage for the control PCB dropped code data are initialized by setting the data of H03 to 1 gt Return the initialized function code data to their previous settings then restart the operation 2 A high intensity noise was given to the inverter while data especially initializing data was being written Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires Also perform the same check as described in 1 above gt Improve noise control Alternatively return the initialized function code data to their previous settings then restart the operation 3 The control PCB failed Initialize the function code data by setting HO3 to 1 then reset the alarm by pressing the key and check that the alarm goes on gt The control PCB on which the CPU is mounted is defective Contact your Fuji Electric representative CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 18 13 E e Keypad communications error Problem A communications error occurred between the standard keypad or the multi function keypad and the inverter Possible Causes 1 Break in the communications cable or poor contact What to Check and Suggested Measures Check continuity of the cable contacts and connections gt Re insert the connector firmly gt Replace the ca
222. mand you have specified will be automatically saved into the inverter s internal memory as function code J57 data It is retained even if you temporarily switch to another PID command source and then go back to the via keypad PID command Furthermore you can directly configure the command with function code J57 gi Even if multi frequency is selected as a PID command SS4 or SS8 ON you still can Ti a h C Tip set the PID dancer position command using the keypad When function code J02 is set to any value other than 0 pressing the N V key displays on the 7 segment LED monitor the PID command currently selected while you cannot change the setting On the 7 segment LED monitor the decimal point of the lowest digit is used to characterize what is displayed The decimal point of the lowest digit blinks when a PID command is displayed the decimal point lights when a PID feedback amount is displayed Decimal point Table 3 6 PID Command Manually Set with A V key and Requirements PID control PID control Mode Remote LED monitor Multi frequency selection command SV E43 SS4 SS8 J01 J02 With A O key PID command by keypad Other than 0 ON or OFF Other than 0 PID command currently selected CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 9 Setting up the primary frequency command with Qand Y keys under PID dancer contro
223. mation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 43 Ready for jogging JOG Function code data 10 This terminal command is used to jog or inch the motor for positioning a work piece Turning this command ON makes the inverter ready for jogging Simultaneous keying A keys on the keypad is functionally equivalent to this command however it is restricted by the run command source as listed below When the run command source is the keypad F02 0 2 or 3 Input terminal command JOG A keys on the keypad Inverter running state Ready for jogging Pressing these keys toggles between Normal operation the normal operation and ready for m jogging Ready for jogging When the run command source is digital input F02 1 Input terminal command JOG Bo AN keys on the keypad Inverter running state Ready for jogging Disable Normal operation Jogging operation Pressing the key or turning the FWD or REV terminal command ON starts jogging For the jogging by the keypad the inverter jogs only when the T key is held down Releasing the key decelerates to stop During jogging the frequency specified by C20 Jogging Frequency and the acceleration deceleration time specified by H54 ACC DEC Time apply The inverter s status transition between ready for jogging and normal Note operation is possible only when the inverter is stopped To start jogging operation with
224. measurement 2 Ifthe test voltage leaks to the control circuit due to the wiring disconnect all the control wiring 3 Connect the main circuit terminals with a common cable as shown in Figure 7 2 4 The Megger test must be limited to across the common line of the main circuit and the ground 5 5MQ 1 MQ for the EMC filter built in type of inverters or a larger value displayed at the Megger indicates a correct state The value is for a discrete inverter inverter LIR LYS LAT DB PI Pi Ni U Figure 7 2 Megger Test 2 Dielectric strength test of control circuit Do not perform a Megger test or dielectric strength test for the control circuit Prepare a high resistance range tester for the control circuit 1 Disconnect all the external wiring from the control circuit terminals 2 Perform a continuity test to the ground One MQ or a larger measurement indicates a correct state 3 Dielectric strength test of external main circuit and sequence control circuit Disconnect all the inverter terminals so that the test voltage is not applied CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 8 7 6 Inquiries about Product and Guarantee 7 6 1 When making an inquiry Upon breakage of the product uncertainties failure or inquiries inform your Fuji Electric representative of the following information 1 Inverter type Refer to Chapter 1 Se
225. mmands issued 1 000 indicates 1000 times When any number from 0 001 to 9 999 No of startups is displayed the counter increases by 0 001 per startup and when any number from 10 00 to 65 53 is counted the counter increases by 0 01 every 10 startups When the counted number exceeds 65535 the counter will be reset to 0 and the count will start again DC link bus Shows the DC link bus voltage of the inverter main circuit voltage Unit V volts 3 26 LED monitor shows item No Table 3 21 Alarm Information Displayed Continued Item displayed Max temperature of heat sink Description Shows the temperature of the heat sink Unit C Terminal I O signal status displayed with the ON OFF of LED segments Terminal input signal status in hexadecimal format Terminal output signal status in hexadecimal format Shows the ON OFF status of the digital I O terminals Refer to m Displaying control I O signal terminals in Section 3 4 5 Checking I O signal status for details No of consecutive occurrences This is the number of times the same alarm occurs consecutively Multiple alarm 1 Simultaneously occurring alarm codes 1 is displayed if no alarms have occurred Multiple alarm 2 Simultaneously occurring alarm codes 2 is displayed if no alarms have occurred Terminal I O signal status under communications control displayed with the ON
226. n Recommended value H50 1 10 of the base frequency H51 1 10 of the voltage at base frequency Output voltage V Variable torque output using non linear V f pattern Rated voltage at base frequency 1 F05 Variable torque output Non linear not using non linear V f pattern Vif pattem 1 f Voltage H51 0 Output frequency Non linear V f pattern 1 Base Hz Frequency frequency 1 H50 F04 E Torque boost Manual torque boost F09 In torque boost using F09 constant voltage is added to the basic V f pattern regardless of the load to give the output voltage To secure a sufficient starting torque manually adjust the output voltage to optimally match the motor and its load by using F09 Specify an appropriate level that guarantees smooth start up and yet does not cause over excitation with no or light load Torque boost per F09 ensures high driving stability since the output voltage remains constant regardless of the load fluctuation Specify the F09 data in percentage to the rated voltage at base frequency 1 F05 At factory shipment F09 is preset to a level that provides approx 100 of starting torque 7 Specifying a high torque boost level will generate a high torque but may cause Note overcurrent due to over excitation at no load If you continue to drive the motor it may overheat To avoid such a situation adjust torque boost to an appropriate level When the non linear V f pattern and the torq
227. n alarm Deviation alarm with Hold Deviation alarm with Latch Deviation alarm with Hold and Latch 312 Upper level alarm AH f 100t0100 mammam J13 Lower level alarm AL J18 Upper limit of PID process output J19 Lower limit of PID process output J56 Speed command filter 0 00 to 5 00 J57 Dancer reference position 100 to 100 J58 Detection width of dancer 0 Disable switching PID constant position deviation 1 to 100 o J59 P Gain 2 J60 1 Integral time 2 J61 D Differential time 2 J62 PID control block selection Bit 0 PID output polarity 0 addition 1 subtraction Bit 1 Select compensation of output ratio 0 Ratio relative to the main setting 1 Speed command relative to maximum frequency J63 Overload Stop o Torque Detection value _1 Current J64 Detection level J65 Mode selection 0 Disable Decelerate to stop Coast to a stop Hit and stop J66 Operation condition 0 Enable at constant speed and during deceleration Enable at constant speed Enable anytime 5 73 J67 Timer J68 Braking Signal 5 74 Brake OFF current J69 Brake OFF frequency J70 Brake OFF timer J71 Brake ON frequency J72 Brake ON timer 1 When you make settings from the keypad the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can display Example If the setting range is from 200 00 to 200 00 the incremental unit is 4 f
228. n go back to the via keypad PID process command Also it is retained in the memory even while the inverter is powered off and will be used as the initial PID process command next time the inverter is powered ON Citi e Even if multi frequency is selected as a PID process command SS4 or SS8 ON you p still can set the process command using the keypad When function code J02 is set to any value other than 0 pressing the AIO key displays on the 7 segment LED monitor the PID process command currently selected while you cannot change the setting On the 7 segment LED monitor the decimal point of the lowest digit is used to characterize what is displayed The decimal point of the lowest digit blinks when a PID process command is displayed the decimal point lights when a PID feedback amount is displayed IL 4 Decimal point Table 3 4 PID process Command Manually Set with A V Key and Requirements PID control PID control Mode Remote LED monitor Multi frequency selection command SV E43 SS4 SS8 J01 J02 With A key PID process command by keypad Other than 0 ON or OFF PID process command currently Other than 0 selected CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 7 Setting up the frequency command with Qand Y keys under PID process control When function code F01 is set to 0 keys on keypad and
229. nally Conditions apply when connecting models marked with If you want to connect them to public low voltage power supply you need to obtain permission from the local electric power supplier In general you will need to provide the supplier with the harmonics current data of the inverter To obtain the data consult your Fuji Electric representative 10 5 Compliance with the Low Voltage Directive in the EU 10 5 1 General General purpose inverters are regulated by the Low Voltage Directive in the EU Fuji Electric states that all our inverters with CE or TUV mark are compliant with the Low Voltage Directive 10 5 2 Points for consideration when using the FRENIC Multi series in a system to be certified by the Low Voltage Directive in the EU If you want to use the FRENIC Multi series of inverters in systems equipment in the EU refer to the guidelines on page vi CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 10 8
230. nals have become loose gt Tighten the terminal screws to the recommended torque 3 Interphase unbalance rate of three phase voltage was too large Measure the input voltage gt Connect an AC reactor ACR to lower the voltage unbalance between input phases gt Raise the inverter capacity 4 Overload cyclically occurred Measure ripple wave of DC link bus voltage gt If the ripple is large raise the inverter capacity 5 Single phase voltage was input to the three phase input inverter instead of three phase voltage input Note You can disable input Protection Maintenance Function Check the inverter type gt Apply three phase power FRENIC Multi of three phase input cannot be driven by single phase power supply phase loss protection using the function code H98 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 13 5 G1 Output phase loss Problem Possible Causes Output phase loss occurred What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 Inverter output wires are broken Measure the output current gt Replace the output wires 2 Wires for motor winding are broken Measure the output current gt Replace the motor 3 The terminal screws for inverter output were not tight enough Check if any screws on the inverter output terminals have become loose gt Tighten th
231. ncy to compensate for the decrease in motor rotation This prevents the motor from decreasing the rotation due to the slip That is this facility is effective for improving the motor speed control accuracy The compensation value is specified by combination of function codes P12 Rated slip frequency P09 Slip compensation gain for driving and P11 Slip compensation gain for braking H68 enables or disables the slip compensation facility according to the motor driving conditions Motor driving conditions Motor driving frequency zone Base frequency Above the base or below frequency Enable Enable Enable Enable Disable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Disable Disable Enable Enable Disable Data for H68 Accl Decel Constant speed E Dynamic torque vector control To get the maximal torque out of a motor this control calculates the motor torque for the load applied and uses it to optimize the voltage and current vector output Selecting this control automatically enables the auto torque boost and slip compensation function and disables auto energy saving operation Using the PG feedback speed control at same time however also disables the slip compensation function This control is effective for improving the system response against external disturbances and the motor speed control accuracy E PG speed feedback control PG interface This control is made available by mounting an optional pulse generat
232. nd 0 01 for 9 99 to 0 01 and for 0 00 to 99 99 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 7 P codes Motor 1 Parameters Change ment running COPING setting page Rated capacity 0 01 to 30 00 where P99 data is 0 3 or 4 kW da ksa i Rated current 0 00 to 100 0 Rated value of Fuji standard motor Auto tuning 0 Disable 1 Enable Tune R1 and X while the motor is stopped 2 Enable Tune R1 X and rated slip while the motor is stopped and no load current while running Online tuning n Disable ew TT No load current 0 7 to 50 00 0 07 Rated value of Fuji standard motor R1 0 00 to 50 00 Rated value of Fuji standard X 0 00 to 50 00 standard motor Slip compensation gain for driving paneer a 5 57 ial 0 50 Slip compensation response time Dito 10 00 Slip compensation gain for braking 0 0 to 200 0 Eee Aa Rated slip frequency 0 00 to 15 00 0 01 Hz Rated value 5 56 ere ae oT motor Motor 1 Selection 0 Motor characteristics 0 Fuji standard motors 8 series 5 57 1 Motor characteristics 1 HP rating motors 4 3 Motor characteristics 3 Fuji standard motors 6 series 4 Other motors The shaded function codes 777 are applicable to the quick setup 4 Default settings for these function codes vary depending on the inverter capacity See Table 5 1 Factory Defaults According to Inverter Capac
233. nd L2 N oe Perform wiring as necessary E g FRNOO1E1S 2U Power supply Chote Do not connect more than 2 wires to the Molded case terminal P circuit breaker MCCB or Residual current operated protective device RCD Ground fault circuit interrupter GFCI with overcurrent Other protection inverter s Magnetic contactor CNote When wiring the inverter to the power supply that is 500 kVA or more be sure to connect an optional DC reactor DCR Figure 2 9 Wiring Procedure for Peripheral Equipment CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 12 Grounding terminals G Be sure to ground either of the two grounding terminals for safety and noise reduction The inverter is designed to use with a safety grounding to avoid electric shock fire and other disasters Grounding terminals should be grounded as follows 1 Ground the inverter in compliance with the national or local electric code 2 Use a thick grounding wire with a large surface area and keep the wiring length as short as possible Inverter output terminals U V W and grounding terminals G Inverter s output terminals should be connected as follows 1 Connect the three wires of the three phase motor to terminals U V and W aligning phases each other 2 Connect the secondary grounding wire to the grounding te
234. need to use the of tne Banal external cooling attachment option for inverters with a 122 F eee T T capacity of 7 5 HP or above air intake External In an environment with high humidity or a lot of fibrous dust eir intako however do not use external cooling in an environment with high humidity or a lot of fibrous dust which tends to clog the _ Equipment heat sink pene QI For details refer to the Mounting Adapter for External Cooling PB F1 E1 Installation Manual Figure 2 2 External Cooling A CAUTION Prevent lint paper fibers sawdust dust metallic chips or other foreign materials from getting into the inverter or from accumulating on the heat sink This may result in a fire or accident CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 2 3 Mounting direction Mount the inverter vertically to the mounting surface and fix it securely with four screws or bolts so that the logo FRENIC Multi can be seen from the front CNote Do not mount the inverter upside down or horizontally Doing so will reduce the heat dissipation efficiency of the inverter and cause the overheat protection function to operate so the inverter will not run 4 Solving abnormal vibration after installation If any vibration in the surroundings reaches the inverter and causes abnormal vibration to the cooling fans or the keypad fix them firmly usi
235. nes Use of an arrester is effective in preventing electronic equipment including inverters from damage or malfunctioning caused by such surges and or noise Frequency meter Displays the frequency in accordance with signal output from the inverter Other options Panel mount adapter FRENIC Multi series of inverters can be installed to your system panel or equipment using mounting adapters which utilize the mounting holes used for conventional inverters of FVR E11S series Three phase 230 V 1 8 to 1 and 5 HP Three phase 460 V 5 HP Single phase 230 V 1 8 to 1 2 and 3 HP Mounting adapter for external cooling This adapter allows you to mount your FRENIC Multi series of inverters on the panel in such a way that the heat sink assembly may be exposed to the outside Using this adapter greatly reduces heat radiated or spread inside your panel Applicable only to inverters with a capacity of 7 5 to 20 HP CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 9 4 Chapter 10 COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARDS 10 1 Compliance with UL Standards and Canadian Standards cUL certification 10 1 1 General Originally the UL standards were established by Underwriters Laboratories Inc as private criteria for inspections investigations pertaining to fire accident insurance in the USA Later these standards were authorized as the official standards to prot
236. nfo ctiautomation net 5 1 F codes continued Change Refer owe me sap alae me wer nya sanno ment copying setting tunnir page Motor Sound Carrier frequency 0 75 to 15 oi PkHzy y y 2 584 Y F27 Tone 0 Level 0 Inactive ea Level 1 Y 1 2 Level 2 3 Level 3 0 Output in voltage 0 to 10 VDC FMA Mode selection _2 Output in pulse 0 to 6000 p s _ FMP F30 Voltage adjustment 0 to 300 FMA F31 Function Selecta function to be monitored from the followings Output frequency 1 before slip compensation Output frequency 2 after slip compensation Output current Output voltage Output torque Load factor Input power PID feedback amount PV PG feedback value DC link bus voltage Universal AO Motor output Calibration PID command SV PID output MV F33 Pulse rate 25 to 6000 FMP Pulse rate at 100 output F37 Load Selection Auto Torque Boost Variable torque load Auto Energy Saving Operation 1 Constant torque load Auto torque boost Auto energy saving operation Variable torque load during ACC DEC Auto energy saving operation Constant torque load during ACC DEC Auto energ F39 Stop Frequency 0 00 to 10 00 Holding Time F40 Torque Limiter 1 20 to 200 Limiting level for driving 999 Disable Fat Limiting level for braking 20 to 200 999 Disable F42 Control Mode Selection 1 0 Vif control with slip compensation inactive F29
237. ng and deactivating the safety device Switch to the motor 1 or motor 2 which the tuning is to be performed on Tuning results by P04 will be applied to P codes for the motor 1 and the tuning results by A18 will be applied to A codes for the motor 2 ee Assigning the command Switch to motor 2 SWM2 to any of the terminal Y1 Note Y2 or 30A B C will automatically switch the output status of SWM2 depending on the motor selected for the tuning 4 Perform tuning Set function code P04 or A18 to 1 or 2 and press the 5 key The blinking of or c on the LED monitor will slow down E Enter a run command for the rotation direction selected The factory default is Fe key on the keypad for forward rotation To switch to reverse rotation change the data of function code F02 The display of or lt stays lit and tuning takes place while the motor being stopped Maximum tuning time Approx 40 s If P04 or A18 2 the motor is accelerated to approximately 50 of the base frequency and then tuning takes place Upon completion of measurements the motor will decelerate to a stop Tuning will continue after the motor is stopped Maximum tuning time Approx 10 s If the terminal signal FWD or REV is selected as the run command F02 1 Eru will appear upon completion of the measurements The run command is turned OFF The run command given through the keypad or the communications link is automaticall
238. ng the fixing screws provided as accessories E Fixing the cooling fans Table 2 3 Fixing Screws i Screws Power Nominal Screw Tightening size torque accessory N m applied Inverter motor type HP supply voltage FRN007E1W 2U FRN010E1W 2U FRN015E1W 2U FRN020E1W 2U FRN007E1W 4U A A Figure 2 3 Fixing the Cooling Fans FRN015E1W 4U FRN020E1 W 4U Note 1 A box in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 3 2 3 Wiring Follow the procedure below In the following description the inverter has already been installed 2 3 1 Removing and mounting the terminal cover and the main circuit terminal block cover 1 For inverters with a capacity of 5HP or below To remove the terminal cover put your finger in the dimple of the terminal cover labeled PULL and then pull it up toward you To remove the main circuit terminal block cover hold its right and left ends with your fingers and slide it toward you Terminal cover PULL Main circuit terminal block cover Figure 2 4 Removing the Covers For Inverters with a Capacity of 5HP or below CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 4 2 For inverters with a capacity of
239. njuries could occur A WARNING Ensure that the number of input phases and the rated voltage of the product match the number of phases and the voltage of the AC power supply to which the product is to be connected Otherwise fire or an accident could occur Do not connect the power supply wires to output terminals U V and W Do not insert a braking resistor between terminals P and N P1 and N P and P1 DB and N or P1 and DB Doing so could cause fire or an accident e Generally control signal wires are not reinforced insulation If they accidentally touch any of live parts in the main circuit their insulation coat may break for any reasons In such a case an extremely high voltage may be applied to the signal lines Make a complete remedy to protect the signal line from contacting any hot high voltage lines Doing so could cause an accident or electric shock ACAUTION e Wire the three phase motor to terminals U V and W of the inverter aligning phases each other Otherwise injuries could occur e The inverter motor and wiring generate electric noise Take care of malfunction of the nearby sensors and devices To prevent the motor from malfunctioning implement noise control measures Otherwise an accident could occur Operation AWARNING Be sure to install the terminal cover before turning the power ON Do not remove the covers while power is applie
240. ns 1 The frame size and model of the MCCB or RCD GFCI with overcurrent protection will vary depending on the power transformer capacity Refer to the related technical documentation for details 2 The recommended wire size for main circuits is for the 70 C 158 F 600 V PVC wires used at an ambient temperature of 40 C 104 F 3 In the case of no DC reactor the wire sizes are determined on the basis of the effective input current calculated under the condition that the power supply capacity and impedance are 500 kVA and 5 respectively CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net vii Conformity to UL standards and Canadian standards cUL certification If installed according to the guidelines given below inverters marked with UL cUL are considered as compliant with the UL and CSA cUL certified standards A CAUTION Solid state motor overload protection motor protection by electronic thermal overload relay is provided in each model Use function codes F10 to F12 to set the protection level Connect the power supply satisfying the characteristics shown in the table below as an input power supply of the inverter Short circuit rating Use 75 C 167 F Cu wire only Use Class 1 wire only for control circuits Field wiring connection must be made by a UL Listed and CSA Certified closed loop terminal connector sized for the wire gauge inv
241. ntervals of approximately 1 second You can also have the item number e g amp _ and data e g Output current for any other item displayed using the and Okeys 6 Press the key to return to a list of alarm codes Press the e key again to return to the menu Table 3 21 Alarm Information Displayed LED monitor shows Item displayed Description item No Output frequency Output frequency Output current Output current Output voltage Output voltage Calculated Calculated motor output torque torque Reference frequency Frequency specified by frequency command Rotational This shows the rotational direction being output direction F forward s reverse This shows the running status in hexadecimal Refer to Running status m Displaying running status in Section 3 4 4 Shows the content of the cumulative power ON time counter of the inverter Unit thousands of hours Cumulative r n Display range 0 001 to 9 999 10 00 to 65 53 time When the total ON time is less than 10000 hours display 0 001 to 9 999 data is shown in units of one hour 0 001 When the total time is 10000 hours or more display 10 00 to 65 53 it is shown in units of 10 hours 0 01 When the total time exceeds 65535 hours the counter will be reset to 0 and the count will start again Shows the content of the cumulative counter of times the inverter is started up i e the number of run co
242. ntrol circuit and no protective functions are activated E Frequency arrival signal 2 FAR2 Function code data 21 This output signal comes ON when a difference between the output frequency before the torque limiting and the reference frequency comes to within the frequency arrival hysteresis width E30 and then the frequency arrival delay time E29 has elapsed Refer to the descriptions of E29 and E30 5 50 E Inverter output limiting with delay JOL2 Function code data 22 If the inverter enters any output limiting operation such as output torque limiting output current limiting automatic deceleration anti regenerative control or overload stop hit and stop it automatically activates the stall free facility and shifts the output frequency When such an output limiting operation continues for 20 ms or more this output signal comes ON This signal is used for lessening the load or alerting the user to an overload status with the monitor Heat sink overheat early warning OH Function code data 28 This output signal is used to issue a heat sink overheat early warning that enables you to take a corrective action before an overheat trip actually happens TILI I This signal comes ON when the temperature of the heat sink exceeds the overheat trip L47 Us a temperature minus 5 C and it goes OFF when it drops down to the overheat trip L47 temperature minus 8 C E Service lifetime alarm LIFE Fun
243. nverter to the common terminal of the PLC i a T 2 2 Q Programmable Programmable Ease K locks controler lt Control circuit gt K X lt Control ditut logic controller lt yea PLI as sink J SINKI 1 Swi SOURCE H T x1 10 5 X1 to X5 FWOD REV A FWD REV Photocoupler 24 VOC n T iom CM ith the switch turned to SINK b With the switch turned to SOURCE Figure 2 17 Circuit Configuration Using a PLC For details about the slide switch setting refer to Section 2 3 7 Setting up the slide switches 2 19 Table 2 9 Symbols Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals Continued Functions Classifi cation Analog The monitor signal for analog DC voltage 0 to 10 V is output You can monitor select FMA function with slide switch SW6 on the interface PCB and change the data of the function code F29 FMA You can also select the signal functions following with function code F31 function Output frequency 1 Before slip compensation Output frequency 2 After slip compensation e Output current Output voltage Output torque Load factor Input power PID feedback amount PV e PG feedback value DC link bus voltage Universal AO e Motor output Calibration PID command SV PID output MV
244. nverters with inverter s ROM version 0700 or later For the version checking procedure refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 5 E codes continued Thange Refer Code Name Data setting range incre when Data Default i ment copying setting ioe 98 Terminal FWD Function Selecting function code data assigns the corresponding function to N Y 5 40 terminals FWD and REV as listed below E99 Terminal REV Function 1000 Select multi frequency SS1 1001 Select multi frequency ss2 1002 Select multi frequency SS4 1003 Select multi frequency sss 1004 Select ACC DEC time RT1 1006 Enable 3 wire operation HLD 1007 Coast to a stop Bx 1008 Reset alarm RST 1009 Enable external alarm trip THR 1010 Ready for jogging JOG 1011 Select frequency command 2 1 Hz2 Hz1 1012 Select motor 2 motor 1 M2 M1 Enable DC braking DCBRK 1014 Select torque limiter level TL2 TL1 1017 UP Increase output frequency UP 1018 DOWN Decrease output DOWN frequency 1019 Enable data change with keypad WE KP 1020 Cancel PID control Hz PID 1021 Switch normal inverse operation IVs 1024 Enable communications link via LE RS 485 or field bus 1025 Universal DI U DI 1026 Enable auto search for i
245. o gt Change the settings of host equipment software or make the no set neatis is response error detection time be ignored y08 y18 0 not performed within the specified cycle 3 Host equipment e g Check the host equipment PLCs and personal computers did not operate due to incorrect settings and or defective software hardware gt Remove the cause of the equipment error 4 RS 485 converter did not operate due to incorrect connections and settings or defective hardware Check the RS 485 converter e g check for poor contact gt Change the various RS 485 converter settings reconnect the wires or replace hardware such as recommended devices as appropriate 5 Broken communications cable or poor contact Check continuity of the cable contacts and connections gt Replace the cable CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 21 Possible Causes 6 A high intensity noise was given to the inverter What to Check and Suggested Measures Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires gt Improve noise control gt Improve noise reduction measures on the host side gt Replace the RS 485 relay converter with a recommended insulated converter 7 The RS 485 communications card malfunctioned gt
246. o the stray capacitance in between inverter the wires connected to the phases Ensure that the wiring is and motor shorter than 164ft 50 m If this length must be exceeded Wiring lower the carrier frequency or mount an output circuit filter OFL Wiring size Select wires with a sufficient capacity by referring to the current value or recommended wire size When several inverters drive motors do not use one Wiring type multicore cable in order to connect several inverters with motors Grounding Securely ground the inverter using the grounding terminal Select an inverter according to the nominal applied motor Sons rating listed in the standard specifications table for the ping inverter eneral purpose Selecting AA purp When high starting torque is required or quick acceleration or inverter deceleration is required select an inverter with one rank capacity larger capacity than the standard Driving special motors Select an inverter that meets the following condition Inverter rated current gt Motor rated current CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net xiii When exporting an inverter built in a panel or equipment pack them in a previously fumigated wooden crate Do not fumigate them after packing since some parts Transpor inside the inverter may be corroded by halogen compounds such as methyl tation and bromide used in fumigation sto
247. odes continued Code H54 H56 Deceleration Time for Forced Stop 0 00 to 3600 H61 UP DOWN Control y 0 00 initial frequency setting 1 Last UP DOWN command value on releasing run command H63 Low Limiter Mode selection 7 Limit by F16 Frequency limiter Low and continue to run 5 31 1 If the output frequency lowers below the one limited by F16 Frequency limiter Low decelerate to stop the motor H64 Lower limiting frequency 0 0 Depends on F16 Frequency limiter Low 0 1 to 60 0 H68 Slip Compensation 1 Enable during ACC DEC and enable at base frequency or above 5 37 Operating conditions 1 Disable during ACC DEC and enable at base frequency or above Enable during ACC DEC and disable at base frequency or above Disable during ACC DEC and disable at base frequency or above H69 Automatic Deceleration Disable 5 70 Mode selection 2 Enable Canceled if actual deceleration time exceeds three times the one specified by FO8 E11 Enable Not canceled if actual deceleration time exceeds three times the one specified by FO8 E11 H70 Overload Prevention Control 0 00 Follow deceleration time specified by FO8 E11 S71 0 01 to 100 0 1999 Disable H71 Deceleration Characteristics 0 Disable 1 Enable H76 5 70 H80 z H89 Motor overload memory retention lO inactive er H90 Reserved 2 000 JO a H91 C1 Disconnection Detection Time 0 0 Disable F94 Cumulative Motor Run Time 1 Change or reset the cumulative
248. olved Connector must be fixed using the crimp tool specified by the connector manufacturer Short circuit rating Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100 kA rms symmetrical amperes 240 volts maximum for Three phase or Single phase 230 V input class Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100 kA rms symmetrical amperes 480 volts maximum for Three phase 460 V input class CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net viii Conformity to UL standards and Canadian standards cUL certification Continued A CAUTION 7 Install UL CSA certified circuit breaker rated 240 V or more for 230 V input 480 V or more for 460 V input between the power supply and the inverter referring to the table below Standard type Required torque Wire size Power Ib in N m AWG or kemil mm supply Inverter type voltage Main re Main Saad Control circuit Control circuit terminal terminal FRNF12E1S 2U FRNF25E1S 2U FRNFSOE1S 2U FRNOO1E1S 2U FRNOO2E1S 2U FRNOO3E1S 2U 15 9 1 8 FRNOOSE1S 2U FRNOO7E1S 2U FRNO10E1S 2U FRNO15E1S 2U FRNO20E1S 2U FRNFSOE1S 4U 10 6 1 2 a o o Circuit breaker A Oo Three phase 230 V 33 6 3 8 51 3 5 8 FRNOO1E1S 4U FRNO02E1S 4U 15 9 1 8 FRNOO3E1S 4U FRNOOSE1S 4U FRNOO7E1S 4U FRNO10E1S 4U FRNO15E1S 4U
249. olytic capacitors on the 87000 hours or longer as accumulated run time printed circuit boards estimated service life at the inverter s ambient temperature of 40 C 104 F under 80 of full load Cooling fan 87000 hours or longer as accumulated run time estimated service life at the inverter s ambient temperature of 40 C 104 F under 80 of full load 7 4 Measurement of Electrical Amounts in Main Circuit Because the voltage and current of the power supply input primary circuit of the main circuit of the inverter and those of the motor output secondary circuit include harmonic components the readings may vary with the type of the meter Use meters indicated in Table 7 4 when measuring with meters for commercial frequencies The power factor cannot be measured by a commercially available power factor meter that measures the phase difference between the voltage and current To obtain the power factor measure the power voltage and current on each of the input and output sides and calculate in the following formula m Three phase input m Single phase input Electri Ww j Power factor ecine power x 100 Power factor EEE x 100 3xVoltage V xCurrent A Voltage V Current A CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 6 Table 7 4 Meters for Measurement of Main Circuit DC link bus Input primary side Output secondary side
250. on of the motor Make the cables as short as possible Connect the shield wire firmly to the metal plate Also connect the shield wire electrically to the grounding terminal of the motor For the inverters from 7 5 to 20 HP install them in a metal enclosure to comply with the EMC directive 2 Use shielded wire for connection around the control terminals of the inverter and also for connection of the signal cable of an RS 485 Communications Card As with the motor clamp the shield wire firmly to a grounded plate 3 If noise from the inverter exceeds the permissible level enclose the inverter and its peripherals within a metal enclosure as shown in Figure 10 4 Note Connect the shielding layer of shielded cable to the motor and enclosure electrically and ground the motor and enclosure MCCB or s Metal Enclosure RCD GFCI sae FRENIC Multi Qo L41 R L1 L U oe A compliant T L2 s v ilter optional O O Three o or OQ C Motor single f EN Pg phase Shielded cable with overcurrent protection Figure 10 4 Installing the Inverter with an External EMC compliant Filter Optional into a Metal Enclosure CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 10 4 10 3 3 Leakage current from EMC filter built in type inverters or inverters with an external EMC compilaint filter optional Table 10 1 Leakage
251. on the nameplate labeled on the motor If0O is set the rated voltage at base frequency is determined by the power source of the inverter The output voltage will vary in line with any variance in input voltage If the data is set to anything other than 0 the inverter automatically keeps the output voltage constant in line with the setting When any of the auto torque boost settings auto energy saving or slip compensation is active the voltage settings should be equal to the rated voltage of the motor E Non linear V f Patterns 1 and 2 for Frequency H50 and H52 Set the frequency component at an arbitrary point of the non linear V f pattern Setting 0 0 to H50 or H52 disables the non linear V f pattern operation E Non linear V f Patterns 1 and 2 for Voltage H51 and H53 Sets the voltage component at an arbitrary point of the non linear V f pattern E Maximum Output Voltage F06 Set the voltage for the maximum frequency 1 F03 ao If FO5 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 1 is set to 0 settings of H50 through Note 453 and F06 do not take effect When the non linear point is below the base frequency the linear V f pattern applies when it is above the output voltage is kept constant When the auto torque boost F37 is enabled the non linear V f pattern takes no effect CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 21 Examples E Norm
252. one Voltage 10 to 15X Vatas ubatence 2 or wss frequency 5 io 2 iwah OCR os on te 30 ar 63 o a1 78 22 srs Rated current A r t t t t t t t t t H oao 11 ta a ss os 12 22 ns eer r mo Amgred pomer supply sagao AMA oz as o6 u z0 29 7A o Tas 5 1 1 m F tega 80 180 amp OComrg Sariy Geqvercy 0 1 0 600 He Grating bre 0 5 00 90 0 Beating ewe O00 100 of iaoe corer Dery berente ban Sepiuta mite Gateste AASORE C322 Na 14 ENIOVIO NIG Coches ECHOIID IP20 UL open type Coctny method Neasa Doeg Ea ag Wagttsn baigi 1206 1 S07 Oe 2717 BIN SIGH 7484 lT pn lta 1 Standard 4 pole motor 2 Rated capacity is calculated assuming the output rated voltage as 230 V 3 Output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage 4 Use the inverter at the current enclosed with parentheses or below when the carrier frequency is set to 4 kHz or above F26 and the inverter continuously runs at 100 load 5 In the case of inverters with a capacity of 20 HP at an ambient temperature of 45 C 104 F or above this overload capability is assured provided that the inverter has run continuously with 85 of the rated current t M It V Mi It V 6 Voltage unbalance M2 voltage V Min voltage V 67 IEC 61800 3 Three phase average voltage V If this value is 2 to 3 use an optional AC reactor ACR 7 The value is calculated assuming that the inverter is connected with a
253. one second and then returns to 9 7 again a Function codes C20 and H54 specify the jogging frequency and acceleration K Tip deceleration time respectively Use these function codes exclusively for the g jogging operation with your needs Using the input terminal command Ready for jogging JOG switches between the normal operation state and ready to jog state e Switching between the normal operation state and read to jog state with the f A keys is possible only when the inverter is stopped Jogging the motor Hold down the T key during which the motor continues jogging To decelerate to stop the motor release the key Exiting the ready to jog state and returning to the normal operation state Press the F A keys simultaneously CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 4 5 Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES 5 1 Function Code Tables The following tables list the function codes available for the FRENIC Multi series of inverters F codes Fundamental Functions Refer to page FOO Data Protection Disable both data protection and digital reference protection 5 18 Enable data protection and disable digital reference protection Disable data protection and enable digital reference protection Enable both data protection and digital reference protection Frequency Command 1 UP DOWN keys on keypad Voltage input to terminal 12 10 to 10
254. or 200 to 100 0 1 for 99 9 to 10 0 and for 100 0 to 200 0 and 0 01 for 9 99 to 0 01 and for 0 00 to 99 99 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 12 J codes continued Change Refer Code Name Data setting range when Data Default to mank setting runni page J73 Positioning Control Start timer 510 0 to 1000 0 orf s Y 8 3 5 amp J74 Start point upper digits 5 999 to 999 Y Y 0 y5 Preset point upper igts 5 909 999 SSS I7 rset po er de POST ap EA E A E J78 Creep speed SW point o 0 999 Y 0 J79 Creep speed SW point 10 to 9999 worms TTT EE Creep speed a re A a r End point upper O PY E Tez End point e 0199S i J S 83 Positioning allowance 8 010 9989 Cd Pe Pv Tv od Jz End timer 8 0 07 TOO E E YY 0d J5 Coasting compensation s000 ooo U UU a vO J86 End point command 5 0 4 J87 Preset positioning requirement 5 0 4 2 a SST r S o 788 Position detection direction sp I yo J90 Overload Stop Function 0 000 to 2 000 999 0 001 Y 999 ean WEDA Tai 1 integral time 5 YY Jz Level adjustment 5 5 These are available on inverters with inverter s ROM version 0700 or later For the version checking procedure refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information 7 P Current position Absolute position Switching between 0 and P requires the simultan
255. or PG interface card It uses the speed feedback from the PG on the motor shaft to control the motor speed with high accuracy CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 37 In the slip compensation and dynamic torque vector control the inverter uses the Note motor parameters to control its speed Therefore the following conditions should be satisfied if not the inverter may not get the proper performance from the motor A single motor should be controlled It is difficult to apply this control to a group motor driving system e Motor parameters P02 P03 and P06 to P12 are properly configured or they are fully auto tuned The rating of the motor to be controlled should be two ranks lower than that of the inverter If not the output current detection sensibility of the motor lowers causing it difficult to accurately control the motor e The wiring between the inverter output and motor input terminals should not exceed 50 m in length A long wiring run could not suppress the earth leakage current since the cable s electrostatic capacitance against the earth increases causing it difficult to accurately control the motor speed F43 F44 Current Limiter Mode selection Level When the output current of the inverter exceeds the level specified by the current limiter F44 the inverter automatically manages its output frequency to prevent a stall an
256. or after Power on CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 4 1 4 1 3 Preparation before running the motor for a test Setting function code data Before running the motor set function code data specified in Table 4 1 to the motor ratings and your system design values For the motor check the rated values printed on the nameplate of the motor For your system design values ask system designers about them Q For details about how to change function code data refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 1 Setting up function codes quickly Refer to the function code HO3 in Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES for the factory default setting of motor parameters If any of them is different from the default setting change the function code data Table 4 1 Settings of Function Code Data before Driving the Motor for a Test Function code Function code data Factory setting Base frequency 60 0 Hz Rated voltage Three phase 230 V class series 230 V at base frequency Three phase 460 V class series 460 V Motor ratings printed on the nameplate Applicable motor rated capacity of the motor Motor parameter Rated capacity Motor parameter Rated current Rated current of applicable motor 0 Motor characteristics 0 Motor selection Fuji standard 8 series motors System design values For a test driving of the motor increase values so
257. or any other purpose ensure that both Installing an MC the inverter and the motor are completely stopped before you in ee turn the MC ON or OFF me Remove the magnet contactor MC already installed and built in surge killer from the inverter s output secondary circuit before installing the MC to switch the motor power Combina tion with Do not turn the magnetic contactor MC in the primary circuit peripheral ON or OFF more than once an hour as an inverter failure devices InstallinganMC may result in the primary g circuit If frequent starts or stops are required during motor operation use terminal FWD REV signals or the fuy sr key Protecting the motor The electronic thermal function of the inverter can protect the motor The operation level and the motor type general purpose motor inverter motor should be set For high speed motors or water cooled motors set a small value for the thermal time constant and protect the motor If you connect the motor thermal relay to the motor with a long wire a high frequency current may flow into the wiring stray capacitance This may cause the relay to trip at a current lower than the set value for the thermal relay If this happens lower the carrier frequency or use the output circuit filter OFL CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net xII Discontinuance of power capacitor
258. oration 1 2 Visual inspection 1 2 No abnormalities Terminal block Check that the terminals are not damaged Visual inspection No abnormalities DC link bus capacitor Main circuit 1 Check for electrolyte leakage discoloration cracks and swelling of the case 2 Check if the safety valve does not protrude remarkably 3 Measure the capacitance if necessary 1 2 Visual inspection 3 Measure discharge time with capacitance probe 1 2 No abnormalities 3 The discharge time is not shorter than time specified by the replacement manual Braking resistor 1 Check for odor caused by overheat and cracked insulator 2 Check for broken wire 1 Smelling and visual inspection 2 Visual inspection or measurement with multimeter under disconnection of one lead 1 No abnormalities 2 Within 10 of the specified resistance Transformer and reactor Check for abnormal roaring noise and odor Hearing visual and smelling inspection No abnormalities Magnetic contactor and relay 1 Check for chatters during operation 2 Check for rough contacts 7 2 1 Hearing inspection 2 Visual inspection 1 2 No abnormalities Check part Printed circuit board Control circuit Table 7 1 List of Periodic Inspections Continued Check item 1 Check for loose screws and connectors 2 Check for odor and discoloration
259. ormation in Programming mode on the keypad and check the voltage of the DC link bus which should be 200 VDC or below for three phase 200 V and 400 VDC or below for three phase 400 V gt Connect the inverter to a power supply that meets its input specifications 3 E Jappears Problem Parentheses C J has appeared on the LED monitor while the keypad displaying the Drive Monitor Possible Causes 1 The data to be displayed could not fit the LED monitor e g overflown What to Check and Suggested Measures Check that the product of the output frequency and the display coefficient E50 does not exceed 9999 gt Adjust the setting of E50 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 24 Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION Perform daily and periodic inspection to avoid trouble and keep reliable operation for a long time Take care of the following items during work A WARNING Before proceeding to the maintenance and inspection turn OFF the power and wait more than five minutes Make sure that the LED monitor is turned OFF Further make sure using a multimeter or a similar instrument that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P and N has dropped below the safe voltage 25 VDC Electric shock may occur e Maintenance inspection and parts replacement should be made only by authorized persons Take of
260. ors option Shows the total number of errors that have occurred in optional RS 485 communication since the power is turned ON Once the number of errors exceeds 9999 the count returns to 0 Content of RS 485 communication s error option Shows the most recent error that has occurred in optional RS 485 communication in decimal format For error contents refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual Option s ROM version Shows the option s ROM version as a 4 digit code Cumulative motor run time Shows the content of the cumulative power ON time counter of the motor The display method is the same as for Cumulative run time 5_ i above 3 24 3 4 7 Reading alarm information Menu 6 Alarm Information Menu 6 Alarm Information shows the causes of the past 4 alarms in alarm code Further it is also possible to display alarm information that indicates the status of the inverter when the alarm occurred Figure 3 6 shows the menu transition in Menu 6 Alarm Information and Table 3 21 lists the details of the alarm information Power ON Running mode Spe Programming mode 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 nT I 1 1 1 1 1 ji 1 LITT List of alarm codes Running status info at the time Ol t Q an alarm occurred ttem Pa Output frequency or gt gt Switching atapprox on h cone 1 second intervals caccr
261. otection for Motor 1 Select motor characteristics Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 1 Overload detection level Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 1 Thermal time constant F10 through F12 specify the thermal characteristics of the motor for its electronic thermal overload protection that is used to detect overload conditions of the motor F10 selects the motor cooling mechanism to specify its characteristics F11 specifies the overload detection current and F12 specifies the thermal time constant Thermal characteristics of the motor specified by F10 and F12 are also used for the Note overload early warning Even if you need only the overload early warning set these Characteristics data to these function codes To disable the electronic thermal overload protection set function code F11 to 0 00 E Select motor characteristics F10 F10 selects the cooling mechanism of the motor shaft driven or separately powered cooling fan For a general purpose motor with shaft driven cooling fan The cooling effect will decrease in low frequency operation For an inverter driven motor non ventilated motor or motor with separately powered cooling fan The cooling effect will be kept constant regardless of the output frequency 5 25 The figure below shows operating characteristics of the electronic thermal overload protection when F10 1 The characteristic factors a1 through 3 as well a
262. ou ordered You can check the model name and specifications on the main nameplate Main and sub nameplates are attached to the inverter and are located as shown on the following page FO TYPE FF RNOO2ZE1S 4U SOURCE JPH 180 480V 50 607 5 A re FRNOOZEIS 4U OUTPUT an 38 400 O 1 400H2 3 TA See 754123400012 nin SERNo 75A123A00012 50010A ji Bectric FA Made in Japan a Main Nameplate b Sub Nameplate Figure 1 1 Nameplates TYPE Type of inverter FRN 002 E1S 4U Code Series name FRN FRENIC series Code Nominal applied motor F12 1 8HP F25 1 4HP F50 1 2HP 001 1HP Code Shipping destination 002 2HP Instruction manual version 003 3HP U USA English 005 5HP 007 7HP 010 10HP 015 15HP 020 20HP Code Power supply voltage 2 Three phase 230v Code Applicable area 4 Three phase 460V E High performance Compact 7 Single phase 230 V Code Development code Code Enclosure 1 jtn aa S Standard IP20 E EMC filter built in type IP20 SOURCE Number of input phases three phase 3PH single phase 1PH input voltage input frequency input current OUTPUT Number of output phases rated output capacity rated output voltage output frequency range rated output current overload capacity SER No Product number 75A123A0001Z Serial number of production lot Production month 1 to 9 January to September X Y or Z October November or December Production year Last digit of year If you suspect the product i
263. peration mode Simultaneous keying ED A keys Change certain function code data Refer to codes F00 H03 H45 H97 J75 and J77 in Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES Programming mode E A keys Switch to Programming mode without resetting alarms currently occurred Alarm mode Go G3 keys 3 2 Overview of Operation Modes FRENIC Multi features the following three operation modes E Running mode This mode allows you to enter run stop commands in regular operation You can also monitor the running status in real time E Programming mode This mode allows you to configure function code data and check a variety of information relating to the inverter status and maintenance E Alarm mode If an alarm condition arises the inverter automatically enters Alarm mode In this mode you can view the corresponding alarm code and its related information on the LED monitor Alarm code Indicates the cause of the alarm condition that has triggered a protective function For details refer to Chapter 8 Section 8 5 Protective Functions CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 2 Figure 3 1 shows the status transition of the inverter between these three operation modes Running mode Programming mode Power ON Run stop of motor Setting of function codes Monitor of running status Monitor of various inverter status Menu driven S P
264. prevention control OLP 1037 Current detected ID 1038 Current detected 2 ID2 1042 PID alarm PID ALM 1049 Switched to motor 2 SWM2 1056 Motor overheat detected by thermistor PTC THM 1057 Brake signal BRKS 1059 Terminal C1 wire break C1OFF 1076 PG error detected PG ERR 1080 Stop position override alarm OT 1081 Timer output TO 1082 Positioning completed N N N nN O N J N wo w wo w a wo O wo J wo iN N A o a O oa N oa Oo N O N fee wo 1083 Current position count overflowed Alarm output for any alarm m Inverter running RUN Function code data 0 This output signal tells the external equipment that the inverter is running at a starting frequency or higher It comes ON when the output frequency exceeds the starting frequency and it goes OFF when it is less than the stop frequency It is also OFF when the DC braking is in operation If this signal is assigned in negative logic Active OFF it can be used as a signal indicating Inverter being stopped CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 49 E Frequency arrival signal FAR Function code data 1 This output signal comes ON when the difference between the output frequency and reference frequency comes within
265. processing in accordance with the F14 data Mode selection If no run command has been received within 2 second wait period the inverter cancels the restart mode after a recovery from momentary power failure and needs to be started again from the ordinary starting frequency Therefore ensure that a run command is entered within 2 seconds after a recovery of power or install a mechanical latch relay When run commands are entered via the keypad the above operation is also necessary for the mode F02 0 in which the rotational direction is determined by the terminal command FWD or REV In the modes where the rotational direction is fixed F02 2 or 3 it is retained inside the inverter so that the restart will begin as soon as the inverter enters the ready to run state Power failure Recovery t DC link bus voltage soc Se Undervoltage level 1 1 i i 1 1 No power e E PTA 4h A Time reserved for restart N S about 0 3 to 0 6 s Gate ON command Gate OFF _ Ready to run State of the inverter r gf Waiting for run command Run command ON ON Restart sm When the power is restored the inverter will wait 2 seconds for input of a run C Note command However if the allowable momentary power failure time H16 elapses after the power failure was recognized even within the 2 seconds the restart time for a run command is cancele
266. put to terminal 12 10 to 10 VDC Current input to terminal C1 C1 function 4 to 20 mA DC Sum of voltage and current inputs to terminals 12 and C1 C1 function Voltage input to terminal C1 V2 function 0 to 10 VDC Terminal command UP DOWN control Digital I O interface option 12 PG interface card option 5 18 C31 Analog Input Adjustment for 12 5 0 to 5 0 oT 5 55 ose C32 Gain 0 00 to 200 00 1 oor Y 5 32 C33 Filter time constant 5 55 C34 Gain base point 5 32 C35 Polarity 0 Bipolar N Y T 1 Unipolar C36 Analog Input Adjustment for C1 5 0 to 5 0 Y 0 0 5 55 C1 function Offset C37 Gain 5 32 C38 Filter time constant 5 55 C41 Analog Input Adjustment for C1 5 0 to 5 0 Y 0 0 5 55 V2 function Offset C42 Gain 5 32 C43 Filter time constant 5 55 C44 Gain base point 0 00 to 100 00 1 Y 100 5 32 C50 Bias Frequency command 1 0 00 to 100 00 1 Y C51 Bias PID command 1 T Bias value C52 Bias base point 0 00 to 100 00 1 Y C53 Selection of Normal inverse Operation 0 Normal operation Y Frequency command 1 1 Inverse operation 1 When you make settings from the keypad the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can display Example If the setting range is from 200 00 to 200 00 the incremental unit is 4 for 200 to 100 0 1 for 99 9 to 10 0 and for 100 0 to 200 0 a
267. r What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the input voltage output voltage and interphase voltage unbalance gt Connect a molded case circuit breaker MCCB a residual current operated protective device RCD a ground fault circuit interrupter GFCI with overcurrent protection or a magnetic contactor MC gt Check for voltage drop phase loss poor connections or poor contacts and fix them if necessary 2 The power for the control PCB did not reach a high enough level CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax Check if the jumper bar has been removed between terminals P1 and P or if there is poor contact between the jumper bar and the terminals gt Connect the jumper bar or DC reactor between terminals P1 and P or retighten the screws 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 8 Possible Causes 3 The keypad was not properly connected to the inverter Check and Measures Check whether the keypad is properly connected to the inverter gt Remove the keypad put it back and see whether the problem persists gt Replace the keypad with another one and check whether the problem persists When running the inverter remotely ensure that the extension cable is securely connected both to the keypad and to the inverter gt Disconnect the cable reconnect it and see whether the problem persists gt Replace the keypad with another on
268. r supply side of the inverter when the inter phase unbalance factor of the commercial power supply is 2 to 3 Max voltage V Min voltage V Three phase average voltage V In case the inter phase unbalance factor of the commercial power supply exceeds 3 you would need to take other measures such as increasing the capacity of the inverter Consult your Fuji Electric representative e Ina DC link bus system using terminals P and N the AC reactor protects the inverter against damage caused by unbalance in current Voltage unbalance Braking resistors DBRs A braking resistor converts regenerative energy generated from deceleration of the motor and converts it to heat for consumption Use of a braking resistor results in improved deceleration performance of the inverter CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 9 3 Name of option Function and application Options for Operation and Communications External potentiometer for frequency commands An external potentiometer may be used to set the drive frequency Connect the potentiometer to control signal terminals 11 to 13 of the inverter Multi function keypad Allows you to monitor the status of the inverter including voltage current and input power as well as to set various parameters in a conversational mode Equipped with a liqui
269. r to the FRENIC Multi User s Manual Chapter 4 gt Correct any incorrect data of function code e g cancel higher priority run commands etc 5 The acceleration time was too long or too short Check the data of function codes F07 and E10 Acceleration time gt Change the acceleration time to match the load 6 Overload Measure the output current gt Lighten the load Adjust the dumper of the fan or the valve of the pump In winter the load tends to increase Check if mechanical brake is working gt Release the mechanical brake 7 Mismatch with the characteristics of the motor In case auto torque boost or auto energy saving operation is under way check whether P02 P03 P06 P07 and P08 A16 A17 A20 A21 and A22 agree with the parameters of the motor gt Perform auto tuning of the inverter for every motor to be used 8 The current limiting operation did not increase the output frequency Make sure that F43 Current limiter mode selection is set to 2 and check the setting of F44 Current limiter level gt Readjust the data of F44 or set F43 to 0 disabled if the current limiting operation is not needed Decrease the value of torque boost F09 then run the motor again and check if the speed increases gt Adjust the value of the torque boost F09 Check the data of function codes F04 F05 H50 through H53 to ensure that the V f pattern is rig
270. r wires Ground the shielded wires To prevent malfunction due to noise keep the control circuit wiring away from the main circuit wiring as far as possible recommended 10 cm or more Never install them in the same wire duct When crossing the control circuit wiring with the main circuit wiring set them at right angles CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 8 7 8 5 External Dimensions 8 5 1 Standard models Unit inch mm 3 15 80 D 0 26 6 5 2 64 67 0 26 6 5 D1 D2 k 2AE 4 0 2x0 28 4 5x6 ge s8 Oblong hole Ir 0 u ale F l p 4 g Main nameplate E en ry Power supply Dimensions inch mm mn voltage Inverter type D Di D2 FRNF12E1S 2U 3 62 92 0 39 10 Three phase FRNF25E1S 2U 92 19 230 V FRNF50E1S 2U 4 21 107 0 98 25 FRNOO1E1S 2U 5 20 132 3 23 82 1 97 50 FRNF12E1S 7U 3 62 92 0 39 10 Single phase FRNF25E1S 7U eA ao 230 V FRNF50E1S 7U 4 21 107 0 98 25 FRNOO1E1S 7U 5 00 152 4 02 102 1 97 50
271. rage When packing an inverter alone for export use a laminated veneer lumber LVL For other transportation and storage instructions see Chapter 1 Section 1 3 Transportation and Section 1 4 Storage Environment CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net xiv How this manual is organized This manual is made up of chapters 1 through 10 Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INVERTER This chapter describes acceptance inspection and precautions for transportation and storage of the inverter Chapter 2 MOUNTING AND WIRING OF THE INVERTER This chapter provides operating environment precautions for installing the inverter wiring instructions for the motor and inverter Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD This chapter describes inverter operation using the keypad The inverter features three operation modes Running Programming and Alarm modes which enable you to run and stop the motor monitor running status set function code data display running information required for maintenance and display alarm data Chapter 4 RUNNING THE MOTOR This chapter describes preparation to be made before running the motor for a test and practical operation Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES This chapter provides a list of the function codes Function codes to be used often and irregular ones are described individually Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter describes troubles
272. re based on the estimated service life of the inverter at an ambient temperature of 40 C 104 F under 80 of full load In environments with an ambient temperature above 40 C 104 F or a large amount of dust or dirt the replacement intervals may need to be reduced Standard replacement intervals mentioned above is only a guide for replacement not a guaranteed service life CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 3 7 3 1 Judgment on service life 1 Viewing data necessary for judging service life Measurement procedures Through Menu 5 Maintenance Information in Programming mode you can view on the keypad various data as a guideline necessary for judging whether key components such as the DC link bus capacitor electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit boards and cooling fan are approaching their service life 1 Measuring the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor in comparison with that at factory shipment Measure the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor according to the procedure given below The result will be displayed on the keypad as a ratio to the initial capacitance at the time of factory shipment wenn nnn nnn nnn nnn nnn nnn nna Procedure for measuring capacitance 1 To ensure validity in the comparative measurement put the condition of the inverter back to the state at factory sh
273. re shown in Figure 2 22 To access the slide switches remove the terminal cover and keypad For details on how to remove the terminal cover refer to Section 2 3 1 Removing the terminal cover and main circuit terminal block cover Table 2 10 lists function of each slide switch Table 2 10 Function of Each Slide Switch Switch Function Switches the service mode of the digital input terminals between SINK and SOURCE To make the digital input terminal X1 to X5 FWD or REV serve as a current sink turn SW1 to the SINK position To make them serve as a current source turn SW1 to the SOURCE position Switches the terminating resistor of RS 485 communications port on the inverter on and off To connect a keypad to the inverter turn SW3 to OFF Factory default If the inverter is connected to the RS 485 communications network as a terminating device turn SW3 to ON Switches the output mode of the output terminal FM between analog voltage and pulse output When changing this switch setting also change the data of function code F29 SW6 Data for F29 Analog voltage output FMA 0 Factory default Current output FMP Switches property of the input terminal C1 for C1 V2 or PTC When changing this switch setting also change the data of function code E59 and H26 Data for Data for Sw7 SW8 E59 H26 Analog frequency setting in current Factory default a OFF
274. red within a predetermined period power failure Overload In the event of overheating of the heat sink or an overload prevention condition alarm code 74 or LiL L the output frequency of control the inverter is reduced to keep the inverter from tripping Hardware error The inverter is stopped when poor connection between the ErH Yes control printed circuit board control PCB and power printed circuit board power PCB interface printed circuit board interface PCB or option card or short circuit between terminals 13 and 11 is detected Mock alarm Simulated alarm is output to check the fault sequence Err Yes PID feedback When the inverter is under PID control detecting a PID Cor Yes wire break feedback wire break stops the inverter output and displays an detection error code L oF Not applicable CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 8 18 Chapter9 LIST OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT AND OPTIONS The table below lists the main peripheral equipment and options that are connected to the FRENIC Multi Use them in accordance with your system requirements For details refer to the FRENIC Multi User s Manual Chapter 6 SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT Name of peripheral equipment Function and application Main peripheral equipment Molded case circuit breaker MCCB Residual current
275. relay is installed in the path between the inverter and the motor to protect the motor from overheating the thermal relay may malfunction even with a wiring length shorter than 164ft 50 m In this situation add an output circuit filter option or lower the carrier frequency Function code F26 If the motor is driven by a PWM type inverter surge voltage that is generated by switching the inverter component may be superimposed on the output voltage and may be applied to the motor terminals Particularly if the wiring length is long the surge voltage may deteriorate the insulation resistance of the motor Consider any of the following measures Use a motor with insulation that withstands the surge voltage All Fuji standard motors feature insulation that withstands the surge voltage Connect an output circuit filter option to the output terminals secondary circuits of the inverter Minimize the wiring length between the inverter and motor 33ft 10 m to 66ft 20 m or less N ote Wiring length for EMC filter built in type When the wiring length between the inverter and motor exceeds 33ft 10 m the filter circuit may be overheated and damaged due to increase of leakage current To reduce the leakage current set the motor sound carrier frequency to 2 kHz or below with function code F26 DC reactor terminals P1 and P 1 Remove the jumper bar from terminals P1 and P 2 Connect a DC reactor option to term
276. rent alarm code is displayed 3 27 E Displaying the status of inverter at the time of alarm When the alarm code is displayed you may check various running status information output frequency and output current etc by pressing the 8 key The item number and data for each running information will be displayed alternately Further you can view various pieces of information on the running status of the inverter using the A IY key The information displayed is the same as for Menu 6 Alarm Information in Programming mode Refer to Table 3 21 in Section 3 4 7 Reading alarm information Pressing the amp S key while the running status information is displayed returns the display to the alarm codes When the running status information is displayed after removal of the alarm cause pressing the amp key twice returns to the alarm code display and releases the inverter from the alarm state This means that the motor starts running if a run command has been received by this time Note E Switching to Programming mode You can also switch to Programming mode by pressing 6 amp displayed and modify the function code data keys simultaneously with the alarm Figure 3 7 summarizes the possible transitions between different menu items Pag ing Running Programming N mode pra pne S _mode _ 2 ae Ns N Alarm occurs R10 y a 4 ey O L f x
277. rent detection 2 Level for the time longer than the one specified by E35 Current detection Timer or E38 Current detection 2 Timer respectively The minimum ON duration is 100 ms The ID or ID2 goes OFF when the output current drops below 90 of the rated operation level These two output signals can be assigned to two different digital output terminals independently if necessary Function code E34 is effective for not only the motor overload early warning OL but also for the operation level of the current detection ID Refer to the description of E34 C Note a mE Switched to motor 2 SWM2 Function code data 49 This output signal comes ON when motor 2 is selected with the M2 M1 terminal command assigned to a digital input terminal For details refer to the descriptions of E01 through E05 Function code data 12 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 51 E Brake signal BRKS Function code data 57 This signal outputs a brake control command that releases or activates the brake Refer to the descriptions of J68 through J72 E Alarm output for any alarm ALM Function code data 99 This output signal comes ON if any of the protective functions is activated and the inverter enters Alarm mode E29 Frequency Arrival Delay Time for FAR2 E30 Frequency Arrival Hysteresis width for FAR and FAR2 The moment the output fr
278. requency settings or driving the motor do not disconnect the keypad from the inverter when the motor is running Doing so may stop the inverter Note 3 4 Programming Mode The Programming mode provides you with these functions setting and checking function code data monitoring maintenance information and checking input output I O signal status The functions can be easily selected with the menu driven system Table 3 9 lists menus available in Programming mode The leftmost digit numerals of each letter string on the LED monitor indicates the corresponding menu number and the remaining three digits indicate the menu contents When the inverter enters Programming mode from the second time on the menu selected last in Programming mode will be displayed CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 11 Table 3 9 Menus Available in Programming Mode LED monitor Main functions shows Displays only basic function codes to customize Section Quick Setup Frac the inverter operation 3 4 1 F codes Fundamental functions E codes Extension terminal functions C codes Control functions P codes Selecting each of Motor 1 parameters these function H codes codes enables Section i 3 4 2 High perfi functi its data to be High performance functions displayed changed Data Setting A codes Motor 2 parameters J codes
279. restart if an UP or DOWN terminal command is entered before the Note internal frequency reaches the output frequency saved in the memory the inverter saves the current output frequency into the memory and starts the UP DOWN control with the new frequency The previous frequency held will be overwritten by the current one Frequency f Frequency saved in internal memory i Output frequency Run ij g OFF z command ON OFF phy AON UP shot terminal command E ON Initial frequency for the UP DOWN control when the frequency command source is switched When the frequency command source is switched to the UP DOWN control from other sources the initial frequency for the UP DOWN control is as listed below Frequency command Initial frequency for UP DOWN control Switching command RIR H61 0 H61 1 Reference frequency given by the frequency command source used just before switching Other than UP DOWN Select frequency F01 C30 command 2 1 Hz2 Hz1 PID conditioner Cancel PID control Reference frequency given by PID control Hz PID PID controller output Select multi frequency Reference Reference Multi frequency SS1 SS2 SS4 and frequency given frequency at the SS8 by the frequency time of previous command source UP DOWN control used just before switching Enable communications Communications link link via RS 485 or field bus LE To enable the UP and DOWN termina
280. rminal G Cote The wiring length between the inverter and motor should not exceed 164ft 50 m when x they are connected directly If the wiring length exceeds 164ft 50 m an output circuit filter option should be inserted E g total power cable length is 1300ft 400 m as shown in the figure below Do not use one multicore cable to connect several inverters with motors even if some possible combinations of inverters and motors are considered No output circuit filter installed Output circuit filter installed Power Power 16ft 5m or less EE input input y Output circuit filter Inverter 164ft 50 m or less 1300ft 400 m or less CNote Do not connect a power factor correcting capacitor or surge absorber to the inverter s a ee output lines secondary circuit If the wiring length is long the stray capacitance between the wires will increase resulting in an outflow of the leakage current It will activate the overcurrent protection increase the leakage current or will not assure the accuracy of the current display In the worst case the inverter could be damaged If more than one motor is to be connected to a single inverter the wiring length should be the sum of the length of the wires to the motors CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 13 Driving 460 V class series motor Note e Ifa thermal
281. rning on the brake To assure the service life of brake body the inverter checks the motor speed lowering enough less than one specified monitoring that the run command turns OFF and the output frequency lowers than one specified for the time long enough and turn on the brake terminal command BRKS OFF Brake ON frequency 0 0 to 25 0 Hz Brake ON timer 0 0 to 5 0 s _ e The braking signal control is only applicable to motor 1 If the motor switching K Note Face ak A oe function selects motor 2 the braking signal always remains at state of turning on e When an event such as an occurrence of alarm and turning the coast to stop terminal command BX ON shuts down the inverter the braking signal turns on immediately CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 73 Chapter6 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 1 Before Proceeding with Troubleshooting AWARNING If any of the protective functions have been activated first remove the cause Then after checking that the all run commands are set to off reset the alarm Note that if the alarm is reset while any run commands are set to on the inverter may supply the power to the motor which may cause the motor to rotate Injury may occur Even though the inverter has interrupted power to the motor if the voltage is applied to the main circuit power input terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T L1 L and L2 N for sing
282. rrent limiting by hardware H12 1 e Automatic deceleration Anti regenerative control H69 2 or 4 Overload stop Hit and stop J65 3 Note When the IOL signal is ON it may mean that the output frequency may have deviated from the frequency specified by the frequency command because of this limiting function Auto restarting after momentary power failure IPF Function code data 6 This output signal is ON either during continuous running after a momentary power failure or during the period from when the inverter has detected an undervoltage condition and shut down the output until restart has been completed the output has reached the reference frequency To enable this IPF signal set F14 Restart mode after momentary power failure to 4 Enable restart Restart at the frequency at which the power failure occurred or 5 Enable restart Restart at the starting frequency beforehand Motor overload early warning OL Function code data 7 This output signal is used to issue a motor overload early warning that enables you to take an corrective action before the inverter detects a motor overload alarm and shuts down its output Refer to the description of E34 E Inverter ready to run RDY Function code data 10 This output signal comes ON when the inverter becomes ready to run by completing hardware preparation such as initial charging of DC link bus capacitors and initialization of the co
283. rrent through stray capacitance of inverter input and output wires or a motor If any of the problems listed below occur take an appropriate measure against them Table 2 11 Leakage Current Countermeasures Problem Measures A residual current operated Decrease the carrier frequency protective device RCD or a Make the wires between the inverter and motor shorter ground fault circuit Use an RCD or GFCI with lower sensitivity than the one currently interrupter GFCI that is used connected to the input x Use an RCD or GFCI that features measures against the high primary side has tripped frequency current component Fuji SG and EG series An external thermal relay Decrease the carrier frequency was activated Increase the settling current of the thermal relay Use the electronic thermal overload protection built in the inverter instead of the external thermal relay CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 28 Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD 3 1 LED Monitor Keys and LED Indicators on the Keypad 7 segment LED As shown at the right the keypad monitor consists of a four digit LED monitor LED six keys and five LED indicators indicators The keypad allows you to run and stop the motor monitor running status and switch to the menu mode In the menu mode you can set the Program RUNT function code data monitor I O
284. rrently they may conflict each other and cause a hunting in the system Avoid concurrent activation of these limiters C Note Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Braking Resistor Discharging capability and Allowable average loss F50 F51 These function codes specify the electronic thermal overload protection feature for the braking resistor Set F50 and F51 data to the discharging capability and allowable average loss respectively Those values differ depending on the specifications of the braking resistor as listed on the following pages Depending on the thermal marginal characteristics of the braking resistor the Note electronic thermal overload protection feature may act so that the inverter issues the overheat protection alarm A even if the actual temperature rise is not enough If it happens review the relationship between the performance index of the braking resistor and settings of related function codes 5 38 The table below lists the discharging capability and allowable average loss of the braking resistor These values depend upon the inverter and braking resistor models E External Braking Resistors Standard models The thermal sensor relay mounted on the braking resistor acts as a thermal protector of the motor for overheat so assign an Enable external alarm trip terminal command THR to any of digital input terminals X1 to X5 FWD and REV and connect that terminal an
285. ry circuit to 1 Suppress the surge voltage at motor terminal OFLs This protects the motor from insulation damage caused by the application of high surge voltage 2 Suppress leakage current from the power output lines due to harmonic components This reduces the leakage current when the motor is hooked by long power feed lines It is recommended that the length of the power feed line be kept to less than 1300ft 400 m 3 Minimize emission and or induction noise issued from the power output lines OFLs are effective in reducing noise from long power feed lines such as those used in plants etc Note Use an output circuit secondary filter of OFL OOO DA Zero phase An ACL is used to reduce radio noise emitted by the inverter reactors for reducing radio frequency noise ACL An ACL suppresses the outflow of high frequency noise caused by switching operation for the power supply primary lines inside the inverter Pass the power supply lines together through the ACL for 4 turns coiled 3 times Use 4 ACLs and let the power supply lines pass through them when the sizes of the power supply lines are large If wiring length between the inverter and motor is less than 66ft 20 an ACL to the power supply primary lines if it is more than 66ft 20 it to the power output secondary lines of the inverter m insert m insert AC Reactor ACR e This optional feature must be connected to the primary side commercial powe
286. s the count stops and the display remains at 99 99 Cumulative run Shows the content of the cumulative run time counter of the cooling fan time of the This counter does not work when the cooling fan ON OFF control cooling fan function code H06 is enabled and the fan is stopped Unit thousands of hours Display range 0 001 to 99 99 Shown in units of 10 hours When the total time exceeds 99990 hours the count stops and the display remains at 99 99 Shown in units of 10 hours 3 23 LED Monitor shows Table 3 20 Display Items for Maintenance Information Continued Number of startups Description Shows the content of the cumulative counter of times the inverter is started up i e the number of run commands issued 1 000 indicates 1000 times When any number from 0 001 to 9 999 is displayed the counter increases by 0 001 per startup and when any number from 10 00 to 65 53 is counted the counter increases by 0 01 every 10 startups When the counted number exceeds 65535 the counter will be reset to 0 and the count will start again Input watt hour Shows the input watt hour of the inverter Unit 100 kWh Display range 0 001 to 9999 Depending on the value of integrated input watt hour the decimal point on the LED monitor shifts to show it within the LED monitor s resolution e g the resolution varies between 0 001 0 01 0 1 or 1 To reset the integrated input watt hour and its data s
287. s A ni 10 00 to 1 00 0 Modbus RTU protocol 1 FRENIC Loader protocol SX protocol 2 Fuji general purpose inverter protocol Immediately trip with alarm 74 Trip with alarm amp after running for the period specified by timer y13 Retry during the period specified by timer y13 If the retry fails trip with alarm E If it succeeds continue to run 3 _Continue to run 0 2400 bps 1 4800 bps 2 9600 bps 3 19200 bps 4 38400 bps 0 None 2 stop bits for Modbus RTU 1 Even parity 1 stop bit for Modbus RTU 2 Odd parity 1 stop bit for Modbus RTU 3 None 1 stop bit for Modbus RTU y N 0 2 bits 4 1 bit 0 No detection 1 to 60 0 Modbus RTU protocol Frequency command Run command Follow H30 data Follow H30 data Via field bus option Follow H30 data Follow H30 data Via field bus option Via field bus option Via field bus option Frequency command Run command Follow H30 and y98 data Follow H30 and y98 data Via RS 485 link Loader Follow H30 and y98 data Follow H30 and y98 data Via RS 485 link Loader Via RS 485 link Loader _Via RS 485 link Loader 5 14 o 5 68 Power supply voltage Three phase 230 V Three phase 460 V Single phase 230 V Note 1 A box W in Table 5 1 1 Factory Defaults According to Inverter Capacity Restart mode after Nominal Fuji s standar
288. s are satisfied Be sure to auto tune the inverter preceding the start of auto search for the idling j Note motor speed When the estimated speed exceeds the maximum frequency or the upper limit frequency the inverter disables auto search and starts in normal mode In auto search with the restart after momentary power failure enabled F14 4 or 5 and the allowable momentary power failure time specified H16 turning a run command ON will start auto search even if the time specified by H16 has elapsed During auto search if an overcurrent or overvoltage trip occurs the inverter restarts the suspended auto search Perform auto search at 60 Hz or below Note that auto search may not fully provide the expected designed performance depending on conditions including the load motor parameters power cable length and other externally determined events CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 63 H11 Deceleration Mode H11 specifies the deceleration mode to be applied when a run command is turned OFF Data for H11 Function Normal deceleration The inverter decelerates and stops the motor according to deceleration commands specified by H07 Acceleration deceleration pattern F08 Deceleration time 1 and E11 Deceleration time 2 Coast to stop The inverter immediately shuts down its output so the motor stops according to the inertia of
289. s being used Check that there is no noise in the external signal wires gt Isolate the control signal wires from the main circuit wires as far as possible gt Use shielded wire or twisted wire for the control signal wires gt Connect a capacitor to the output terminal of the frequency command or insert a ferrite core in the signal wire Refer to Chapter 2 Section 2 3 6 Wiring for control circuit terminals 7 In torque limit operation the acceleration deceleration is suppressed Check whether data of torque limiter related function codes F40 F41 E16 and E17 is correctly configured and the torque switching signal TL2 TL1 is correct gt Reconfigure data of F40 F41 E16 and E17 correctly or reset it to the factory default gt Switch correctly the torque switching terminal TL2 TL1 gt Lengthen the acceleration deceleration time F07 F08 E10 and E11 command 8 Any acceleration deceleration time is invalidly set The terminal command RT1 switching between the acceleration deceleration time 2 and 1 turns ON OFF invalidly gt Turn the RT1 ON OFF validly For reference if RT1 is ON the acceleration deceleration time 2 is applied CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 7 7 Even if the power recovers after a momentary power failure the motor does not restart Possible Causes 1 The data of
290. s issued while the motor remains in a coast to stop state Enable restart Restart at the frequency at which the power failure occurred for general loads As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the undervoltage detection level due to a momentary power failure the inverter saves the output frequency being applied at that time and shuts down the output so that the motor enters a coast to stop state If a run command has been input restoring power restarts the inverter at the output frequency saved during the last power failure processing This setting is ideal for applications with a moment of inertia large enough not to slow down the motor quickly such as fans even after the motor enters a coast to stop state upon occurrence of a momentary power failure Enable restart Restart at the starting frequency for low inertia load stopping it Refer to H09 After a momentary power failure restoring power and then entering a run command restarts the inverter at the starting frequency specified by function code F23 This setting is ideal for heavy load applications such as pumps having a small moment of inertia in which the motor speed quickly goes down to zero as soon as it enters a coast to stop state upon occurrence of a momentary power failure When the motor restarts after a momentary power failure the auto search mode can apply which detects the idling motor speed and runs the idling motor
291. s not working properly or if you have any questions about your product contact your Fuji Electric representative CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 1 1 1 2 External View and Terminal Blocks 1 Outside and inside views Terminal cover Cooling fans Control circuit pis terminal block cover Warning pond nameplate Main nameplate Main circuit Terminal cover fastening screw Terminal cover terminal block cover Main circuit terminal block Figure 1 2 Outside and Inside Views of Inverters FRNO20E1S 2U 2 Warning plates and label FRENIC Multi Warning plate RISK OF INJURY OR ELECTRIC SHOCK Refer to the instruction manual before installation and operation e Do not remove any cover while applying power and at least Smin after disconnecting power e Securely ground earth the equipment Only type B of RCD is allowed See manual for details 3PH Series mee FRNOOZEIS 49 FO mase 754123400012 Sub nameplate Figure 1 3 Warning Plate and Sub Nameplate 3 Terminal block location Terminal cover Control circuit terminal block Control circuit terminal block Main circuit Main circuit terminal block terminal block cover Main circuit terminal block a FRNOO1E1S 2U b FRNO20E1S 2U Figure 1 4 Terminal Blocks CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 36
292. s of the control circuit terminals The wiring to the control circuit terminals differs depending upon the setting of the function codes which reflects the use of the inverter Route wires properly to reduce the influence of noise CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 16 Table 2 9 Symbols Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals Functions Classifi cation Power Power supply 10 VDC for frequency command potentiometer supply Potentiometer 1 to 5kQ for the potentio meter The potentiometer of 1 2 W rating or more should be connected Analog 1 The frequency is commanded according to the external analog input setting voltage ae 0 to 10 VDC 0 to 100 Normal operation P 10 to 0 VDC 0 to 100 Inverse operation 2 Inputs setting signal PID command value or feedback signal 3 Used as additional auxiliary setting to various frequency settings Input impedance 22kQ The maximum input is 15 VDC however the current larger than 10 VDC is handled as 10 VDC Inputting a bipolar analog voltage 0 to 10 VDC to terminal 12 requires setting function code C35 to 0 Analog 1 The frequency is commanded according to the external analog input setting current current 4 to 20 mA DC 0 to 100 Normal operation input 20 to 4 mA DC 0 to 100 Inverse operation C1 2 Inputs setting signal PID comm
293. s their corresponding switching frequencies f2 and f3 vary with the characteristics of the motor The tables below list the factors of the motor selected by P99 Motor 1 Selection Actual Output Current Continuous Overload Detection Level F11 fb Base frequency Even if the specified i base frequency exceeds i 60 Hz fb 60 Hz Output frequency fo Hz 0 f2 f3 f Cooling Characteristics of Motor with Shaft driven Cooling Fan Nominal Applied Motor and Characteristic Factors when P99 Motor 1 selection 0 or 4 Nominal applied motor HP Thermal time constant t Factory default Reference current for setting the thermal time constant Imax Output frequency for motor characteristic factor Characteristic factor f2 f3 at a2 a3 1 8 to 1 Allowable continuous current x 150 25 to 30 Nominal Applied Motor and Characteristic Factors when P99 Motor 1 Selection 1 or 3 Characteristic factor Output frequency for motor characteristic factor Nominal applied motor HP Reference current for setting the thermal time constant Imax Thermal time constant t Factory default Base frequency x 33 Allowable continuous current x 150 Base frequency x 33 1 8 to 30 E Overload detection level F11 F11 specifies the level at which the electronic thermal overload protection
294. s used 7 Average braking torque obtained when reducing the speed from 60 Hz with AVR control OFF It varies with the efficiency of the motor them Tyoeah E1570 Fiz F5 tso 007 oz om Agoncatae motor iaro P x M 4 i 2 3 Rated cagectty VA a Ty oe T 2 T 20 32 as Fated wotage V I Trwee praee 200 m 260 V wen AVR Anaoa H 5 os 5 20 so zo mtam 7 on 4 en uzi Pa o versed carmttey ESUN of ramet current for prin 200 tor 05 5 Mates bequercy a 0 00 T nasen vainga Regancy Seg Pame XO n 289 V O0 He i Vonegetbequency veruiines aage 12 10 Frequency 5002 20 as on ne ws 3 naau S hana OCR 1 i 33 j4 s7 a ue Reqeed pomer supply capecty AWA a Sy SS E za as sa 180 o 0 Tome 8 s 19 OC ishing Swt Gequency 0 1 90 60 0 Mr Grating lover O s 100 of ruad current Grating bma 0 9 00 30 08 Reaung rosato tune Agomcabte satoty arian CABS C222 No 14 ENSOT7E 1007 Eoctopee 16 ChOS28 i PIO Ul coer tree Cocting mathet cs Fae coeting venga Nanang 1308 Eer 107 200 rir EZ 8 Average braking torque obtained by use of an external braking resistor standard type available as option CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 8 3 8 2 Models Available on Order EMC filter built in type 8 2 1 Three phase 230 V class series Type FRN_ _ _ E1E 2U 001 002 010 015 Applicable motor rating HP 1 1 2 y
295. s you to issue frequency commands and run commands from a computer or PLC at a remote location as well as monitoring the inverter running information and the function code data H30 and y98 specify the sources of those commands inverter itself and computers or PLCs via the RS 485 communications link or field bus H30 is for the RS 485 communications link y98 for the field bus LE OFF H30 y98 Lg Inverter itself i ais Selected command QO Q O Frequency command i 1 i ON Run command RS 485 communications link o i mO Saa RIAS i t 7t lino LEis assigned RS 485 a e o i the command source selected i PR IRE 4 by H30 y98 will apply Field bus Option Command sources selectable Command sources Description Inverter itself Sources except RS 485 communications link and field bus Frequency command source Specified by F01 C30 or multi frequency command Run command source Via the keypad or digital input terminals selected by F02 Via RS 485 communications link Via the standard RJ 45 port used for connecting keypad standard Via RS 485 communications link Via RS 485 communications link option card option card Via field bus option Via field bus option using FA protocol such as DeviceNet or PROFIBUS DP CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 65 Command sources specified by H30 Mod
296. saving operation This feature automatically controls the supply voltage to the motor to minimize the total power loss of motor and inverter Note that this feature may not be effective depending upon the motor or load characteristics Check the advantage of energy saving before actually apply this feature to your power system This feature applies to constant speed operation only During acceleration deceleration the inverter will run with manual torque boost F09 or auto torque boost depending on the F37 data If auto energy saving operation is enabled the response to a change in motor speed may be slow Do not use this feature for such a system that requires quick acceleration deceleration Use auto energy saving only where the base frequency is 60 Hz or lower If the Note base frequency is set at 60 Hz or higher you may get a little or no energy saving advantage The auto energy saving operation is designed for use with the frequency lower than the base frequency If the frequency becomes higher than the base frequency the auto energy saving operation will be invalid e Since this function relies also on the characteristics of the motor set the base frequency 1 F04 the rated voltage at base frequency 1 F05 and other pertinent motor parameters P01 through P03 and P06 through P99 in line with the motor capacity and characteristics or else perform auto tuning P04 F10 F11 F12 Electronic Thermal Overload Pr
297. se injuries could occur Modifying F03 data to allow a higher reference frequency requires also changing C TIP E15 data specifying a frequency limiter high CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 20 F04 Base Frequency 1 F05 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 1 F06 Maximum Output Voltage 1 H50 H51 Non linear V f Pattern 1 Frequency and Voltage H52 H53 Non linear V f Pattern 2 Frequency and Voltage These function codes specify the base frequency and the voltage at the base frequency essentially required for running the motor properly If combined with the related function codes H50 through H53 these function codes may profile the non linear V f pattern by specifying increase or decrease in voltage at any point on the V f pattern The following description includes setups required for the non linear V f pattern At high frequencies the motor impedance may increase resulting in an insufficient output voltage and a decrease in output torque This feature is used to increase the voltage with the maximum output voltage 1 to prevent this problem from happening Note however that you cannot increase the output voltage beyond the voltage of the inverter s input power E Base Frequency 1 F04 Set the rated frequency printed on the nameplate labeled on the motor E Rated Voltage at Base Frequency F05 Set 0 or the rated voltage printed
298. shows the menu transition in Menu 3 Drive Monitoring Power ON mi ee t mode OF oe List of monitoring items Running status info Y e _ amp Output fi 2oPE i t nn gt we utput frequency i k t i 3 08 k 4950 Before slip TENN 4 oa A gt ey compensation Wy V Ka Gu 3 0 pos as 59 99 Output frequency ome l After slip gt compensation 3 02 PEN p T ican Torque limit value 3 13 ae i500 Level 2 Figure 3 4 Menu Transition in Menu 3 Drive Monitoring CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 16 Basic key operation To monitor the running status on the drive monitor set function code E52 to 2 Full menu mode beforehand 1 Turn the inverter ON It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears 2 Use the A and keys to display Drive Monitoring a 3 Press the key to proceed to a list of monitoring items e g 7_ 77 5 key to p g g key to 4 Use the Nand v keys to display the desired monitoring item then press the 5 key The running status information for the selected item appears 5 Press the e key to return to a list of monitoring items Press the eS key again to return to the menu Table 3 12 Drive Monitor Display Items LED monitor Description
299. signed 2 wire operation involving only FWD and REV takes effect Output iroque mamor reno Em Coast to a stop BX Function code data 7 Turning this terminal command ON immediately shuts down the inverter output so that the motor coasts to a stop without issuing any alarms Em Reset alarm RST Function code data 8 Turning this terminal command ON clears the ALM state alarm output for any fault Turning it OFF erases the alarm display and clears the alarm hold state When you turn the RST command ON keep it ON for 10 ms or more This command should be kept OFF for the normal inverter operation An alarm occurrence Inverter Turning alarm display on and No alarm displayed running status holding alarm status Stop and ready to run Alarm output TANT 7 ALM rr Min 10 ms i Reset alarm m j RST OFF its OFF Em Enable external alarm trip THR Function code data 9 Turning this terminal command OFF immediately shuts down the inverter output so that the motor coasts to a stop displays the alarm 74i and outputs the alarm relay for any fault ALM The THR command is self held and is reset when an alarm reset takes place ee Use this alarm trip command from external equipment when you have to C Tip immediately shut down the inverter output in the event of an abnormal situation ina peripheral equipment CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiauto
300. sion High lt gt Low Motor temperature due to harmonics components High lt gt Low Ripples in output current waveform Large lt gt Small Leakage current Low lt High Electromagnetic noise emission Low High Inverter loss Low High CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 34 Specifying a too low carrier frequency will cause the output current waveform to have a Note large amount of ripples As a result the motor loss increases causing the motor pras temperature to rise Furthermore the large amount of ripples tends to cause a current limiting alarm When the carrier frequency is set to 1 kHz or below therefore reduce the load so that the inverter output current comes to be 80 or less of the rated current When a high carrier frequency is specified the temperature of the inverter may rise due to an ambient temperature rise or an increase of the load If it happens the inverter automatically decreases the carrier frequency to prevent the inverter overload alarm LIL Li With consideration for motor noise the automatic reduction of carrier frequency can be disabled Refer to the description of H98 E Motor sound Tone F27 F27 changes the motor running sound tone This setting is effective when the carrier frequency set to function code F26 is 7 kHz or lower Changing the tone level may reduce the high and harsh running no
301. stor S485 pon Peci Note 1 When connecting an optional DCR remove the jumper bar from the terminals P1 and P Note 2 Install a recommended MCCB or RCD GFCI with overcurrent protection in the primary circuit of the inverter to protect wiring At this time ensure that the circuit breaker capacity is equivalent to or lower than the recommended capacity Note 3 Install an MC for each inverter to separate the inverter from the power supply apart from the MCCB or RCD GFCI when necessary Connect a surge killer in parallel when installing a coil such as the MC or solenoid near the inverter Note 4 THR function can be used by assigning code 9 external alarm to any of the terminals X1 to X5 FWD and REV function code E01 to E05 E98 or E99 8 6 8 4 3 Running the inverter by terminal commands Note 2 MECB or Neto 2 RCONGFCI Mc oen Power supply eis Pane 1 An pi ce DOV caves seres 4 OCR 5 l THR Note 4 200 mw OV i i 4 al i S00 Hz ce Mote 2 ly A Power supply MOCB or Now 3 z n a ex Maen crcut ae RCDIGFC uc m meowil 200 240 ea ILIRI Me ir 5060 Hz L n _ s 450 V class series o amm u 380 o 480 V a pan 5060 Hz r o fe Note 5 3 Potenbometes power EuSoy na PTC we wet ke seting 7 t121 beio y t lint Anaiog Y wi e npa Curentvetiage hpt ie pan for setting t zom v2 OC s4 bo 20 mAOCO to 40 V PUA poci FMg 308 A
302. t pressing the te key Even if the LED monitor displays any item except the timer count the timer operation is possible o lt _ After the countdown of the timer operation triggered by a terminal command such as Note FWD the inverter decelerates to stop and at that moment the LED monitor displays Ene and any LED monitor item for the timer count alternately Turning FWD OFF returns to the LED monitor item C31 C33 Analog Input Adjustment for 12 Offset and Filter time constant C36 C38 Analog Input Adjustment for C1 C1 function Offset and Filter time constant C41 C43 Analog Input Adjustment for C1 V2 function Offset and Filter time constant C31 C36 or C41 configures an offset for an analog voltage current input at terminal 12 C1 C1 function or C1 V2 function respectively The offset also applies to signals sent from the external equipment C33 C38 or C43 configures a filter time constant for an analog voltage current input at terminal 12 C1 C1 function or C1 V2 function respectively The larger the time constant the slower the response Specify the proper filter time constant taking into account the response speed of the machine load If the input voltage fluctuates due to line noises increase the time constant CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 55 P01 Motor 1 No of poles P01 specifies the
303. t protection or SF Motor overheated LiH IU HT HII mmn a Overvoltage protection 4 7 Lii or Lilia Motor overloaded Ei i ore Heat sink overheated iiH i Inverter overloaded Ch Braking resistor JL LI overheated oon E Number of reset times H04 H04 specifies the number of reset times for automatically escaping the tripped state When H04 0 the auto reset function will not be activated A WARNING If the auto reset function has been specified the inverter may automatically restart and run the motor stopped due to a trip fault depending on the cause of the tripping Design the machinery so that human body and peripheral equipment safety is ensured even when the auto resetting succeeds Otherwise an accident could occur E Reset interval H05 After the reset interval specified by HO5 from when the inverter enters the tripped state it issues a reset command to auto reset the tripped state Refer to the timing scheme diagrams below lt Timing scheme for failed retry No of reset times 3 gt Alarm factor Protective function Tripped state Reset command Inverter output frequency Auto reset signal TRY Alarm output for any alarm 0 Time The reset operation state can be monitored by external equipment via the inverter s digital output terminal Y1 Y2 or 30A B C to which the TRY is assigned by setting 26 with function code E20 E21 or
304. t the gain base point to 50 C34 50 The setting procedure for specifying a gain or bias alone without changing any Note base points is the same as that of Fuji conventional inverters of FRENIC5000G11S P11S series FVR E11S series etc F20 to F22 DC Braking 1 Braking starting frequency Braking level and Braking time H9 DC Braking Braking response mode F20 through F22 specify the DC braking that prevents motor 1 from running by inertia during decelerate to stop operation If the motor enters a decelerate to stop operation by turning OFF the run command or by decreasing the reference frequency below the stop frequency the inverter activates the DC braking by flowing a current at the braking level F21 during the braking time F22 when the output frequency reaches the DC braking starting frequency F20 Setting the braking time to 0 0 F22 0 disables the DC braking E Braking starting frequency F20 F20 specifies the frequency at which the DC braking starts its operation during motor decelerate to stop state E Braking level F21 F21 specifies the output current level to be applied when the DC braking is activated The function code data should be set assuming the rated output current of the inverter as 100 in increments of 1 E Braking time F22 F22 specifies the braking period that activates DC braking E Braking response mode H95 H95 specifies the DC braking response mode Slow response Slows the r
305. t with the relevant Directives In addition to satisfy the requirements noted above use a Fuji FRENIC inverter in connection with an EMC compliant filter optional feature in accordance with the instructions contained in this instruction manual Installing the inverter s in a metal enclosure may be necessary depending upon the operating environment of the equipment that the inverter is to be used with Tic Our EMC compliance test is performed under the following conditions Motor Sound carrier frequency F26 15 kHz Wiring length of the shielded cable between the inverter and motor 33ft 10 m 10 3 2 Recommended installation procedure To make the machinery or equipment fully compliant with the EMC Directive have certified technicians wire the motor and inverter in strict accordance with the procedure described below E In the case of EMC filter built in type of inverters with a capacity of 5 HP or below 1 Mount the EMC grounding flange that comes with the inverter to the inverter with screws in order to ground the wire shield s See Figure 10 1 Figure 10 1 Attaching the EMC Grounding Flange 2 Use shielded wires for the motor cable and route it as short as possible Firmly clamp the wire shield to the flange to ground it Further connect the wire shield electrically to the grounding terminal of motor See Figure 10 2 3 Use shielded wire for connection around the control terminals of the invert
306. tails refer to Section 2 3 7 Setting up the slide switches Analog Common for analog input output signals 13 12 C1 and FM common Isolated from terminals CM s and CMY 2 17 Table 2 9 Symbols Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals Continued Functions Classifi cation Since low level analog signals are handled these signals are especially susceptible to the external noise effects Route the wiring as short as possible within 66ft 20 m and use shielded wires In principle ground the shielded sheath of wires if effects of external inductive noises are considerable connection to terminal 11 may be effective As shown in Figure 2 13 ground the single end of the shield to enhance the shield effect Use a twin contact relay for low level signals if the relay is used in the control circuit Do not connect the relay s contact to terminal 11 When the inverter is connected to an external device outputting the analog signal a malfunction may be caused by electric noise generated by the inverter If this happens according to the circumstances connect a ferrite core a toroidal core or an equivalent to the device outputting the analog signal and or connect a capacitor having the good cut off characteristics for high frequency between control signal wires as shown in Figure 2 14 Analog input Do not apply a voltage of 7 5 VDC or higher to terminal C1 when you assign the termina
307. tained Initialize all function code data to the factory defaults Initialize motor 1 parameters in accordance with P02 Rated capacity and P99 Motor 1 selection Function codes subject to initialization P01 P03 PO6 to P12 and constants for internal control These function codes will be initialized to the values listed in tables on the following pages Initialize motor 2 parameters in accordance with A16 Rated capacity and A39 Motor 2 selection Function codes subject to initialization A15 A17 A20 to A26 and constants for internal control These function codes will be initialized to the values listed in tables on the following pages To initialize the motor parameters set the related function codes as follows 1 PO2 A16 Set the rated capacity of the motor to be used in HP or kW Motor Rated capacity 2 P99 A39 Select the characteristics of the motor Motor Selection 3 H03 Data Initialization Initialize the motor parameters H03 2 or 3 4 P03 A17 Set the rated current on the nameplate if the already set data Motor Rated current differs from the rated current printed on the nameplate of the motor Upon completion of the initialization the H03 data reverts to 0 factory default If the P02 or A16 data is set to a value other than the nominal applied motor rating data initialization with H03 internally converts the specified value forcedly to the equivalent nominal applied motor r
308. ter The inverter cannot be used at altitudes of more than 9800ft 3000 m CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net vi Conformity to the Low Voltage Directive in the EU Continued ACAUTION 10 Use wires listed in EN60204 Appendix C Recommended wire size mm 2 5 Main circuit DCR aie of power input 2 P1 rating Invertertype MCCB or RCD GFCI aye Waa che yener aah HP Grounding SG U V W resistor 3 3 IP w o DCR w DCR wloDCR DB 1 Applied Rated current A Control circuit 30A 30B 30C Power supply voltage FRNF12E1gy 2U FRNF25E1 2U FRNF50E1 2U FRN001E1 g 2U FRNOO2E1 gy 2U FRNOO3E1 gy 2U FRNOOSE1 g 2U FRNOO7E1m 2U FRNO10E1m 2U FRNO15E1g 2U FRNO20E1m 2U FRNFSOE1g 4U FRN001E1 g 4U FRN002E1 4U FRN003E1 g 4U FRN005E1 g 4U FRN007E1 g 4U FRN010E1 g 4U FRN015E1 g 4U FRNO20E1m 4U FRNF12E1g 7U FRNF25E1g 7U FRNFSOE1g 7U FRNOO1E1m 7U FRNOO2E1g 7U FRNOO3E1g 7U Three phase Three phase Single phase MCCB Molded case circuit breaker RCD Residual current operated protective device GFCI Ground fault circuit interrupter Note 1 A box W in the above table replaces S Standard type or E EMC filter built in type depending on the product specificatio
309. that they are longer than your system design values If the set time is short the inverter may Deceleration time 1 not start running the motor Maximum frequency 60 0 Hz Acceleration time 1 aZ In any of the following cases the default settings may not produce the best results for K Tip auto torque boost torque calculation monitoring auto energy saving torque limiter 7 automatic deceleration auto search for idling motor speed slip compensation torque vector droop control or overload stop since the standard settings of motor parameters for Fuji motors are not applicable Tune the motor parameters according to the procedure set forth below e The motor to be driven is not a Fuji product or is a non standard product The cabling between the motor and the inverter is long A reactor is inserted between the motor and the inverter A codes are used to specify the data for motor 2 Use them if necessary lt Tuning procedure gt 1 Preparation Referring to the rating plate on the motor set the following function codes to their nominal ratings F04 and A02 Base frequency F05 and A03 Rated voltage at base frequency e P02 and A16 Rated capacity P03 and A17 Rated current CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 4 2 2 Selection of tuning process Check the situation of the machine system and choose
310. the DC link bus uring HE deceleration This protection is not assured if extremely A 7 DHS large AC line voltage is applied inadvertently During running LE at constant speed stopped Undervoltage Stops the inverter output when the DC link bus voltage drops Lis Yes 1 protection below the undervoltage level 200 VDC for three phase 230 V 400 VDC for three phase 460 V class series However if data 4 or 5 is selected for F14 no alarm is output even if the DC link bus voltage drops Input phase Detects input phase loss stopping the inverter output This in Yes loss protection function prevents the inverter from undergoing heavy stress that may be caused by input phase loss or inter phase voltage unbalance and may damage the inverter If connected load is light or a DC reactor is connected to the inverter this function will not detect input phase loss if any Output phase Detects breaks in inverter output wiring at the start of running OL Yes loss protection and during running stopping the inverter output Overheat Stops the inverter output upon detecting excess heat sink GH i Yes protection temperature in case of cooling fan failure or overload Discharging and inverter operation are stopped due to oot Yes overheating of an external braking resistor Function codes must be set corresponding to the braking resistor 1 This alarm on 30A B C should be ignored depending upon the function code setting CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412
311. the frequency arrival hysteresis width specified by E30 Refer to the description of E30 Em Frequency detected FDT Function code data 2 This output signal comes ON when the output frequency exceeds the frequency detection level specified by E31 and it goes OFF when the output frequency drops below the Frequency detection level E31 Hysteresis width E32 Em Undervoltage detected LU Function code data 3 This output signal comes ON when the DC link bus voltage of the inverter drops below the specified undervoltage level and it goes OFF when the voltage exceeds the level This signal is ON also when the undervoltage protective function is activated so that the motor is in an abnormal stop state e g tripped When this signal is ON a run command is disabled if given E Torque polarity detected B D Function code data 4 The inverter detects the polarity of the internally calculated torque and issues the driving or braking polarity signal to this digital output This signal comes OFF when the calculated torque is the driving one and it goes ON when it is the braking one E inverter output limiting IOL Function code data 5 This output signal comes ON when the inverter is limiting the output frequency by activating any of the following actions minimum width of the output signal 100 ms Torque limiting F40 F41 E16 and E17 Current limiting by software F43 and F44 Instantaneous overcu
312. the inverter is to be restarted Specify the coast to stop time during which the machine system and facility can be tolerated If the power is restored within the specified duration the inverter restarts in the restart mode specified by F14 If the power is restored after the specified duration the inverter recognizes that the power has been shut down so that it does not restart but starts normal starting If H16 Allowable momentary power failure time is set to 999 restart will take place until the DC link bus voltage drops down to the allowable voltage for restart after a momentary power failure 50 V for 230 V class series and 100 V for 460 V class series If the DC link bus voltage drops below the allowable voltage the inverter recognizes that the power has been shut down so that it does not restart but starts normal starting 7 The time required from when the DC link bus voltage drops from the threshold of Note undervoltage until it reaches the allowable voltage for restart after a momentary power failure greatly varies depending on the inverter capacity the presence of options and other factors E Auto restart after momentary power failure Restart time H13 H13 specifies the time period from momentary power failure occurrence until the inverter reacts for restarting process If the inverter starts the motor while motor s residual voltage is still in a high level a large inrush current may flow or an overvoltage alarm m
313. the motor and machine and their kinetic energy losses When reducing the reference frequency the inverter decelerates the motor Note according to the deceleration commands even if H11 1 Coast to stop H12 Instantaneous Overcurrent Limiting Mode selection H12 specifies whether the inverter invokes the current limit processing or enters the overcurrent trip when its output current exceeds the instantaneous overcurrent limiting level Under the current limit processing the inverter immediately turns OFF its output gate to suppress the further current increase and continues to control the output frequency Disable An overcurrent trip occurs at the instantaneous overcurrent limiting level Enable The current limiting operation is effective If any problem occurs when the motor torque temporarily drops during current limiting processing it is necessary to cause an overcurrent trip H12 0 and actuate a mechanical brake at the same time The similar function is the current limiter specified by F43 and F44 The current i Note limiter F43 F44 implements the current control by software so an operation delay occurs When you have enabled the current limiter F43 F44 also enable the instantaneous overcurrent limiting with H12 to obtain a quick response current limiting Depending on the load extremely short acceleration time may activate the current limiting to suppress the increase of the inverter output
314. the second PG pulse rate p s in Z phase when two PG interfaces are installed CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 20 E Displaying control I O signal terminals The status of control I O signal terminals may be displayed with ON OFF of the LED segment or in hexadecimal display e Display I O signal status with ON OFF of each LED segment As shown in Table 3 17 and the figure below each of segments a to g on LED1 lights when the corresponding digital input terminal circuit FWD REV X1 X2 X3 X4 or X5 is closed it goes off when it is open Segment a and b on LED3 light when the circuit between output terminal Y1 or Y2 and terminal CMY and do not light when the circuit is open Segment a on LED4 is for terminals 30A B C Segment a on LED4 lights when the circuit between terminals 30C and 30A is short circuited ON and does not light when it is open C Tip If all terminal input signals are OFF open segment g on all of LED1 to LED4 will light k OS Table 3 17 Segment Display for External Signal Information LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 Segment 30A B C oh No corresponding control circuit terminal exists XF XR and RST are assigned for communication Refer to m Displaying control I O signal terminals under communications control on the next pa
315. the specified times Refer to the description of H07 for details Specifying an improperly short acceleration deceleration time may activate the current limiter torque limiter or anti regenerative control resulting in a longer acceleration deceleration time than the specified one e Acceleration time 1 F07 F08 and deceleration time 1 E10 E11 is switched by terminal command RT7 assigned to any of the digital input terminals with any of function codes E01 through E05 lt Acceleration deceleration time 1 F07 F08 and acceleration deceleration time 2 Tip E10 E11 are switched by terminal command RT7 assigned to any of the digital input terminals with any of function codes E01 through E05 FO9 Torque Boost 1 F37 Load Selection Auto Torque Boost Auto Energy Saving Operation 1 F37 specifies V f pattern torque boost type and auto energy saving operation for optimizing the operation in accordance with the characteristics of the load F09 specifies the type of torque boost in order to provide sufficient starting torque Data for F37 Torque boost Auto energy F09 saving Variable Torque torque V f boosi pattern specified by F09 Disable V f pattern Applicable load Variable torque load General purpose fans and pumps Constant torque load Constant torque load To be selected if a motor may be over excited at no load Variable torque load General purpose fans and pumps Linear V f pattern
316. the wiring gt Connect the DC reactor correctly Repair or replace wires for the DC reactor 6 3 2 The motor rotates but the speed does not increase Possible Causes 1 The maximum frequency currently specified was too low What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the data of function codes F03 and A01 frequency gt Readjust the data of F03 and A01 Maximum 2 The data of frequency limiter currently specified was too low Check the data of function code F15 Frequency limiter high gt Readjust the data of F15 3 The reference frequency currently specified was too low Check the signals for the frequency command from the analog input terminals with Menu 4 I O Checking on the keypad gt Increase the frequency of the command gt If an external potentiometer for frequency command signal converter switches or relay contacts are malfunctioning replace them gt Connect the external circuit wires to terminals 13 12 11 and C1 correctly 4 A frequency command e g multi frequency or via communications with higher priority than the one expected was active and its reference frequency was too low Check the data of the relevant function codes and what frequency commands are being received through Menu 1 Data Setting Menu 2 Data Checking and Menu 4 I O Checking on the keypad by referring to the block diagram of the frequency command Refe
317. thermal overload protection for motor 1 Overload detection level Specify also the thermal characteristics of the motor with F10 Select motor characteristics and F12 Thermal time constant To utilize this feature you need to assign OL data 7 to any of the digital output terminals E Current detected and Current detected 2 signals ID and ID2 When the inverter output current has exceeded the level specified by E34 or E37 and it continues longer than the period specified by E35 or E38 the ID or ID2 signal turns ON respectively When the output current drops below 90 of the rated operation level the D or 1D2 turns OFF Minimum width of the output signal 100 ms To utilize this feature you need to assign ID data 37 or ID2 data 38 to any of digital output terminals CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 52 EM EN EM EJ 0 9 Output Current E35 E38 S i ON wwe on E39 Coefficient for Constant Feeding Rate Time E50 Coefficient for Speed Indication E39 and E50 specify coefficients for determining the constant feeding rate time load shaft speed and line speed as well as for displaying the output status monitored Calculation expression Coefficient for speed indication E50 Frequency x Coefficient for constant feeding rate time E39 Constant feeding rate time min Load shaft speed Coefficient for spee
318. tion CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net v Conformity to the Low Voltage Directive in the EU If installed according to the guidelines given below inverters marked with CE or TUV are considered as compliant with the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC ACAUTION 1 The ground terminal G should always be connected to the ground Do not use only a residual current operated protective device RCD a ground fault circuit interrupter GFCI as the sole method of electric shock protection Be sure to use ground wires whose size is greater than power supply lines With overcurrent protection 2 When used with the inverter a molded case circuit breaker MCCB residual current operated protective device RCD a ground fault circuit interrupter GFCI or magnetic contactor MC should conform to the EN or IEC standards 3 When you use a residual current operated protective device RCD a ground fault circuit interrupter GFCI for protection from electric shock in direct or indirect contact power lines or nodes be sure to install type B of RCD GFCI on the input primary of the inverter if the power supply is three phase 230 460 V For single phase 230 V power supply use type A When you use no RCD GFCI take any other protective measure that isolates the electric equipment from other equipment on the same power supply line using double or reinfor
319. tion code data gt Press the D key after changing the function code data G The setting data of function code F02 E01 through E05 E98 and E99 could not be changed CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net The inputs to the terminals of FWD and REV commands are concurrently turned ON gt Turn OFF both FWD and REV 6 9 6 3 If an Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor E Quick reference table of alarm codes Instantaneous overcurrent Refer to Electronic thermal overload alarm 1 Electronic thermal overload alarm 2 Refer to Overload Memory error Overvoltage Keypad communications error CPU error Option card communications error Undervoltage Option card error Input phase loss Operation protection Output phase loss Tuning error Heat sink overheat RS 485 communications error RS 485 communications error Option card Alarm issued by an external Data saving error during device undervoltage Motor protection PTC thermistor Hardware error Braking resistor overheated Mock alarm PID feedback wire break 1 in Instantaneous overcurrent Problem The inverter momentary output current exceeded the overcurrent level the i Overcurrent occurred during acceleration Overcurrent occurred during deceleration Overcurrent occurred when runn
320. too heavy Measure the output current gt Lighten the load e g lighten the load before overload occurs using the overload early warning E34 In winter the load tends to increase gt Decrease the motor sound carrier frequency F26 gt Enable overload prevention control H70 5 Air vent is blocked Check if there is sufficient clearance around the inverter gt Increase the clearance Check if the heat sink is not clogged gt Clean the heat sink 6 17 Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 6 The service life of the Check the cumulative running time of cooling fan Refer to Chapter cooling fan has expired or the cooling fan malfunctioned 3 Section 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information Maintenance Information gt Replace the cooling fan Visually check that the cooling fan rotates normally gt Replace the cooling fan 7 The wires to the motor are too long and caused a large amount of current to leak from Measure the leakage current gt Insert an output circuit filter OFL them 12 E Memory error Problem Error occurred in writing the data to the memory in the inverter Possible Causes 1 While the inverter was What to Check and Suggested Measures Check if pressing the key resets the alarm after the function writing data especially initializing data or copying data power supply was turned OFF and the vo
321. tor while No Alarm Codeis BT Tol h aao MPAA NEN TA EEOAE EA 6 24 we 6 2 6 2 6 8 Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 7 1 7 4 Daily Inspection 7 2 Periodic Inspection 7 3 List of Periodical Replacemeni 7 3 1 Judgment on service life bye 7 4 Measurement of Electrical Amounts in Main Circuit 7 5 Insulation Test 7 6 Inquiries about Product and Guarantee 7 6 1 When making an inquiry 0 7 6 2 Product warranty c eceeeeeeeeeees Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS 8 1 Standard Models 8 1 1 Three phase 230 V class series 8 1 2 Three phase 460 V class series 8 1 3 Single phase 230 V class series 8 2 Models Available on Order EMC filter built in type eee 8 2 1 Three phase 230 V class series 8 2 2 Three phase 460 V class series 8 2 3 Single phase 230 V class series 8 3 Specifications of Keypad Related 8 3 1 General specifications of keypad 8 3 2 Communications specifications of 8 4 Terminal Specifications 8 4 1 Terminal functions 8 4 2 Running the inverter with keypad 8 6 8 4 3 Running the inverter by terminal commands 8 5 External Dimensions 8 5 1 Standard models 8 5 2 Models Available on Order EMC filter built in type 8 5 3 Standard keypad 8 6 Protective Functions Chapter 9 LIST OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT ANT OPTIONS Le Gein 9 1 Chapter 10 COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARDS 10 1 10 1 Compliance wit
322. train entered via the PG interface card option For details refer to the PG Interface Card Instruction Manual Sus To input bipolar analog voltage 0 to 10 VDC to terminal 12 set function code C35 to 0 Setting C35 to 1 enables the voltage range from 0 to 10 VDC and interprets the negative polarity input from 0 to 10 VDC as 0 V Terminal C1 can be used for current input C1 function or voltage input V2 function depending upon the settings of switch SW7 on the interface PCB and function code E59 In addition to the frequency command sources described above higher priority command sources including communications link and multi frequency are provided oe Using the terminal command Hz2 Hz7 assigned to one of the digital input terminals C Tip switches between frequency command 1 F01 and frequency command 2 C30 Refer to function codes E01 to E05 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 19 F02 Operation Method F02 selects the source that specifies a run command for running the motor Data for F02 Run Command Source Description Keypad Enables the ey keys to run and stop the motor Rotation direction The rotation direction of the motor is specified by specified by terminal terminal command FWD or REV command External signal Enables terminal command FWD or REV to run and stop the motor Enables a gt
323. uct warranty period is 1 year from the date of purchase or 24 months from the manufacturing date imprinted on the name place whichever date is earlier 2 However in cases where the use environment conditions of use use frequency and times used etc have an effect on product life this warranty period may not apply 3 Furthermore the warranty period for parts restored by Fuji Electric s Service Department is 6 months from the date that repairs are completed CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 9 2 Warranty range 1 In the event that breakdown occurs during the product s warranty period which is the responsibility of Fuji Electric Fuji Electric will replace or repair the part of the product that has broken down free of charge at the place where the product was purchased or where it was delivered However if the following cases are applicable the terms of this warranty may not apply The breakdown was caused by inappropriate conditions environment handling or use methods etc which are not specified in the catalog operation manual specifications or other relevant documents The breakdown was caused by the product other than the purchased or delivered Fuji s product The breakdown was caused by the product other than Fuji s product such as the customer s equipment or software design etc Concerning the Fuji s programmable products the break
324. ue CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 71 E Mode selection J65 J65 specifies operation when the load amount exceeds that of one specified by J64 Data for J65 Description Disable The inverter cancels the overload stop function The inverter decelerate to stops the motor by the Decelerate to sto R specified deceleration time The inverter shuts down the output immediately and the motor coast to stops Coast to a stop The inverter decelerates the motor with the torque limit operation and is controlling the output current to keep the hold toque until the run command turned OFF Make Hit and stop the mechanical brake turn ON before turning the run command OFF The inverter issues an alarm OL or IOL2 during the hit and stop operation Once the overload stop function is activated the inverter holds it and cannot accelerate the motor again To reaccelerate the motor turn the run command OFF and ON again If J65 3 the inverter ignores the driving toque limit operation already specified E Operation condition J66 J66 specifies the inverter s operation state to apply the overload stop function Note that carefully specify it so as not to induce a malfunction by any setting that is not needed Data for J66 Applicable operation mode Takes effect in the constant speed or deceleration operation mode
325. ue boost are used together the torque boost takes effect below the frequency on the non linear V f pattern s point Output voltage V Rated voltage at base frequency 1 7 7 7 r eri t rrr F05 Increased output voltage e using torque boost 1 Non linear V f pattern 1 Voltage H51 Torque boost 1 F09 Output frequency 0 Non linear Vif Base Hz pattern 1 frequency 1 Frequency H50 F04 CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 24 Auto torque boost This function automatically optimizes the output voltage to fit the motor with its load Under light load auto torque boost decreases the output voltage to prevent the motor from over excitation Under heavy load it increases the output voltage to increase output torque of the motor _ee Since this function relies also on the characteristics of the motor set the base Note frequency 1 F04 the rated voltage at base frequency 1 F05 and other pertinent motor parameters P01 through P03 and P06 through P99 in line with the motor capacity and characteristics or else perform auto tuning P04 When a special motor is driven or the load does not have sufficient rigidity the maximum torque might decrease or the motor operation might become unstable In such cases do not use auto torque boost but choose manual torque boost per F09 F37 0 or 1 E Auto energy
326. und electrodes Otherwise electric shock may occur 2 Check for short circuits between terminals and exposed live parts and ground faults ii 3 Check for loose terminals connectors and screws 6 6 0 6 S A ee 4 Check if the motor is separated from mechanical equipment 5 Turn the switches OFF so that the inverter does not start or operate erroneously at power on 6 Check if safety measures are taken against eed E g Wire connection for three phase runaway of the system e g a defense to protect power supply people from unexpectedly approaching your power Figure 4 1 Connection of Main Circuit system Terminals 4 1 2 Turning ON power and checking AWARNING e Be sure to install the terminal cover if any before turning the power ON Do not remove any cover while powering on e Do not operate switches with wet hands Otherwise electric shock could occur Turn the power ON and check the following points This is a case when no function code data is changed from the KEYPAD factory setting aea Poppies 1 Check if the LED monitor displays 7 7 means that the frequency command is 0 Hz that is blinking See Figure 4 2 If the LED monitor displays numbers except LiL press N V keys to set 7 as the frequency command 2 Check if a built in cooling fan rotates For the inverter of 1 HP or below no cooling fan is mounted Figure 4 2 Display of the LED Monit
327. urrent To reduce the leakage current set the motor sound carrier frequency to 2 kHz or below with function code F26 Otherwise a failure could occur CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net iv Maintenance and inspection parts replacement and installation of an option card AAWARNING Turn the power OFF and wait for at least five minutes before starting inspection parts replacement and installation of an option card Further check that the LED monitor is unlit and that the DC link bus voltage between the P and N terminals is lower than 25 VDC Otherwise electric shock could occur e Maintenance inspection and parts replacement should be made only by qualified persons Take off the watch rings and other metallic objects before starting work e Use insulated tools Otherwise electric shock or injuries could occur Disposal ACAUTION e Treat the inverter as an industrial waste when disposing of it Otherwise injuries could occur Others AWARNING e Never attempt to modify the inverter Doing so could cause electric shock or injuries GENERAL PRECAUTIONS Drawings in this manual may be illustrated without covers or safety shields for explanation of detail parts Restore the covers and shields in the original state and observe the description in the manual before starting opera
328. utomation net 3 6 E Settings under PID process control To enable the PID process control you need to set function code J01 to 1 or 2 Under the PID control the items that can be specified or checked with Y and keys are different from those under regular frequency control depending upon the current LED monitor setting If the LED monitor is set to the speed monitor E43 0 you can access manual speed commands frequency command with A and V keys if it is set to any other you can access the PID process command with those keys I Refer to the FRENIC Multi User s Manual for the details of the PID control Setting the PID process command with the and Q keys 1 Set function code J02 to 0 Y Q keys on keypad 2 Set the LED monitor to something other than the speed monitor E43 0 when the inverter is in Running mode When the keypad is in Programming or Alarm mode you cannot modify the PID process command with the A Okey To enable the PID process command to be modified with the S V key first switch to Running mode 3 Press the A V key to display the PID process command The lowest digit of the displayed command and its decimal point blink 4 To change the PID process command press the V key again The PID process command you have specified will be automatically saved into the inverter s internal memory It is retained even if you temporarily switch to another PID process command source and the
329. utomation net 5 54 C Note ee C21 Timer Operation C21 enables or disables a timer operation that is triggered by a run command and continues for the timer count previously specified with the N w keys The operating procedure for the timer operation is given below Data for C21 Function Disable timer operation Enable timer operation o gt Pressing the key during timer countdown quits the timer operation Even if C21 1 setting the timer to 0 no longer starts the timer operation with the fen key Applying terminal command FWD or REV instead of the key command can also start the timer operation Operating procedure for timer operation example Preparation Set E43 data to 13 LED monitor to display the timer count on the LED monitor and set C21 to 1 Enable timer operation Specify the reference frequency to apply to timer operation When the keypad is selected as a frequency command source press the key to shift to the speed monitor and specify the desired reference frequency Triggering the timer operation with the T key 1 While watching the timer count displayed on the LED monitor press the AVY key to set the timer for the desired count in seconds Note that the timer count on the LED monitor appears as an integral number without a decimal point 2 Press the T key The motor starts running and the timer starts counting down If the timer counts down the motor stops withou
330. utput of the inverter s control circuit and a PLC In example a the input circuit of the PLC serves as a SINK for the control circuit output whereas in example b it serves as a SOURCE for the output lt Control circuit gt Z Programmable lt Control circuit gt Programmabie logic controller logic controller Current Photocoupler Current 5 SINK input va 1 peceses A D tya p CMY SOURCE input al 24 VDC a PLC serving as SINK b PLC serving as SOURCE Figure 2 19 Connecting PLC to Control Circuit 2 21 Table 2 9 Symbols Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals Continued Functions Classifi cation 30A B Outputs a contact signal SPDT when a protective function has been C activated to stop the motor Contact rating 250 VAC 0 3A cos p 0 3 48 VDC 0 5A Any one of output signals assigned to terminals Y1 and Y2 can also be assigned to this relay contact to use it for signal output Switching of the normal negative logic output is applicable to the following two contact output modes Between terminals 30A and 30C is closed excited for ON signal output Active ON or Between erminals 30A and 30C is open non excited for ON signal output Active OFF Relay output RJ 45 Standard Used to connect the inverter with the keypad The inverter suppl
331. verter Figure 2 10 Braking Resistor Connection without DC Reactor DCR When connecting a DC reactor DCR together with the braking resistor 1 Remove the screw from terminal P 2 Overlap the DC reactor DCR wire and braking resistor wire P as shown at left and then secure them to terminal P of the inverter with the screw 3 Connect the wire from terminal DB of the braking resistor to terminal DB of the inverter 4 Do not use the jumper bar Figure 2 11 Braking Resistor Connection with DC Reactor DCR DC link bus terminals P and N These are provided for the DC link bus powered system Connect these terminals with terminals P and N of other inverters Note Consult your Fuji Electric representative if these terminals are to be used CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 15 Main circuit power input terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T three phase input or L1 L and L2 N single phase input 1 For safety make sure that the molded case circuit breaker MCCB or magnetic contactor MC is turned off before wiring the main circuit power input terminals 2 Connect the main circuit power supply wires L1 R L2 S and L3 T for three phase input or L1 L and L2 N for single phase input to the input terminals of the inverter via an MCCB or residual current operated protective device RCD a ground fault circuit
332. without A WARNING If you enable the Restart mode after momentary power failure Function code F14 4 or 5 the inverter automatically restarts the motor running when the power is restored Design the machinery or equipment so that human safety is ensured after restarting Otherwise an accident could occur 5 28 E Restart mode after momentary power failure Basic operation The inverter recognizes a momentary power failure upon detecting the condition that DC link bus voltage goes below the undervoltage detection level while the inverter is running If the load of the motor is light and the duration of the momentary power failure is extremely short the voltage drop may not be great enough for a momentary power failure to be recognized and the motor may continue to run uninterrupted Upon recognizing a momentary power failure the inverter enters the restart mode after a recovery from momentary power failure and prepares for restart When power is restored the inverter goes through an initial charging stage and enters the ready to run state When a momentary power failure occurs the power supply voltage for external circuits such as relay sequence circuits may also drop so as to turn the run command OFF In consideration of such a situation the inverter waits 2 seconds for a run command input after the inverter enters a ready to run state If a run command is received within 2 seconds the inverter begins the restart
333. y 1kW or less Inverter 1kW or less The inverter connected here is The inverter connected regulated by the harmonics here is not regulated regulations If the harmonics flowing to the power source exceeds the regulated level permission by the local power supplier will be needed Figure 10 5 Power Source and Regulation CTi Automation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 208 368 0415 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 10 7 10 4 2 Compliance with the harmonic component regulation Table 10 3 Compliance with Harmonic Component Regulation Applicable DC reactor type Power supply voltage Inverter type w o DC reactor w DC reactor FRNF12E1m 2U DCR2 0 2 Three phase FRNF25E1 2U DCR2 0 2 230 V FRNF50E1M 2U DCR2 0 4 FRNOO1E1M l 2U DCR2 0 75 Three phase FRNFSOE1M 4U DCR4 0 4 460 V FRNOO1E1Ml 4U DCR4 0 75 FRNF12E1 7U DCR2 0 2 Single phase FRNF25E10 7U DCR2 0 4 230 V FRNF50E1m 7U DCR2 0 75 FRNOO1E1Ml 7U DCR2 1 5 When supplying three phase 230 VAC power stepped down from a three phase 460 VAC power line using a transformer the level of harmonic flow from the 460 VAC line will be regulated Note 1 A box W in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure Note 2 Inverter types marked with in the table above are compliant with the EN61000 3 2 A14 so they may be connected to public low voltage power supply unconditio
334. y turned OFF The tuning completes and the next function code 7 5 or appears on the keypad 4 3 E Errors during tuning Improper tuning would negatively affect the operation performance and in the worst case could even cause hunting or deteriorate precision Therefore if the inverter finds any abnormality in the results of the tuning or any error in the process of the tuning it will display 4 7and discard the tuning data Listed below are the abnormal or error conditions that can be recognized during tuning Possible tuning error causes Error in tuning results Details An interphase voltage unbalance has been detected Tuning has resulted in an abnormally high or low value of a parameter Output current error An abnormally high current has flown during tuning Sequence error During tuning a run command has been turned OFF or STOP Force to stop BX Coast to a stop DWP Protect from dew condensation or other similar terminal command has been received Error due to limitation During tuning any of the operation limiters has been activated The maximum frequency or the frequency limiter high has limited tuning operation Other errors An undervoltage or any other alarm has occurred If any of these conditions has occurred either eliminate the abnormal or error factor s and perform tuning again or consult your Fuji Electric representative

FE FRENIC-Multi High Performance Compact Inverter Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents